The Falcon v2 Long only strategy Using Stop loss and take profitHello,
Here is a backtest result from the beginning of the year on BTC. The white line is the Buy & Hold return.
Comission is set to 0.05% and there is no repainting : the price variable I'm using is heikenashi(tickerid).
The indicator is built upon RSI, EMAs and some other personnal tricks so predict trends.
I coded a stop loss and take profit system : the script will simply buy and sell upon conditions.
As usual I am selling access to the script, If some are interested I will publish an alert setup version. I am also open to development or reverse engineering commissions.
Cari dalam skrip untuk "take profit"
QuantBuilder | FractalystWhat's the strategy's purpose and functionality?
QuantBuilder is designed for both traders and investors who want to utilize mathematical techniques to develop profitable strategies through backtesting on historical data.
The primary goal is to develop profitable quantitive strategies that not only outperform the underlying asset in terms of returns but also minimize drawdown.
For instance, consider Bitcoin (BTC), which has experienced significant volatility, averaging an estimated 200% annual return over the past decade, with maximum drawdowns exceeding -80%. By employing this strategy with diverse entry and exit techniques, users can potentially seek to enhance their Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) while managing risk to maintain a lower maximum drawdown.
While this strategy employs quantitative techniques, including mathematical methods such as probabilities and positive expected values, it demonstrates exceptional efficacy across all markets. It particularly excels in futures, indices, stocks, cryptocurrencies, and commodities, leveraging their inherent trending behaviors for optimized performance.
In both trending and consolidating market conditions, QuantBuilder employs a combination of multi-timeframe probabilities, expected values, directional biases, moving averages and diverse entry models to identify and capitalize on bullish market movements.
How does the strategy perform for both investors and traders?
The strategy has two main modes, tailored for different market participants: Traders and Investors.
1. Trading:
- Designed for traders looking to capitalize on bullish markets.
- Utilizes a percentage risk per trade to manage risk and optimize returns.
- Suitable for both swing and intraday trading with a focus on probabilities and risk per trade approach.
2. Investing:
- Geared towards investors who aim to capitalize on bullish trending markets without using leverage while mitigating the asset's maximum drawdown.
- Utilizes pre-define percentage of the equity to buy, hold, and manage the asset.
- Focuses on long-term growth and capital appreciation by fully/partially investing in the asset during bullish conditions.
How does the strategy identify market structure? What are the underlying calculations?
The strategy utilizes an efficient logic with for loops to pinpoint the first swing candle featuring a pivot of 2, establishing the point at which the break of structure begins.
What entry criteria are used in this script? What are the underlying calculations?
The script utilizes two entry models: BreakOut and fractal.
Underlying Calculations:
Breakout: The script assigns the most recent swing high to a variable. When the price closes above this level and all other conditions are met, the script executes a breakout entry (conservative approach).
Fractal: The script identifies a swing low with a period of 2. Once this condition is met, the script executes the trade (aggressive approach).
How does the script calculate probabilities? What are the underlying calculations?
The script calculates probabilities by monitoring price interactions with liquidity levels. Here’s how the underlying calculations work:
Tracking Price Hits: The script counts the number of times the price taps into each liquidity side after the EQM level is activated. This data is stored in an array for further analysis.
Sample Size Consideration: The total number of price interactions serves as the sample size for calculating probabilities.
Probability Calculation: For each liquidity side, the script calculates the probability by taking the average of the recorded hits. This allows for a dynamic assessment of the likelihood that a particular side will be hit next, based on historical performance.
Dynamic Adjustment: As new price data comes in, the probabilities are recalculated, providing real-time aduptive insights into market behavior.
Note: The calculations are performed independently for each directional range. A range is considered bearish if the previous breakout was through a sellside liquidity. Conversely, a range is considered bullish if the most recent breakout was through a buyside liquidity.
How does the script calculate expected values? What are the underlying calculations?
The script calculates expected values by leveraging the probabilities of winning and losing trades, along with their respective returns. The process involves the following steps:
This quantitative methodology provides a robust framework for assessing the expected performance of trading strategies based on historical data and backtesting results.
How is the contextual bias calculated? What are the underlying calculations?
The contextual bias in the QuantBuilder script is calculated through a structured approach that assesses market structure based on swing highs and lows. Here’s how it works:
Identification of Swing Points: The script identifies significant swing points using a defined pivot logic, focusing on the first swing high and swing low. This helps establish critical levels for determining market structure.
Break of Structure (BOS) Assessment:
Bullish BOS: The script recognizes a bullish break of structure when a candle closes above the first swing high, followed by at least one swing low.
Bearish BOS: Conversely, a bearish break of structure is identified when a candle closes below the first swing low, followed by at least one swing high.
Bias Assignment: Based on the identified break of structure, the script assigns directional biases:
A bullish bias is assigned if a bullish BOS is confirmed.
A bearish bias is assigned if a bearish BOS is confirmed.
Quantitative Evaluation: Each identified bias is quantitatively evaluated, allowing the script to assign numerical values representing the strength of each bias. This quantification aids in assessing the reliability of market sentiment across multiple timeframes.
What's the purpose of using moving averages in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Using moving averages is a widely-used technique to trade with the trend.
The main purpose of using moving averages in this strategy is to filter out bearish price action and to only take trades when the price is trading ABOVE specified moving averages.
The script uses different types of moving averages with user-adjustable timeframes and periods/lengths, allowing traders to try out different variations to maximize strategy performance and minimize drawdowns.
By applying these calculations, the strategy effectively identifies bullish trends and avoids market conditions that are not conducive to profitable trades.
The MA filter allows traders to choose whether they want a specific moving average above or below another one as their entry condition.
What type of stop-loss identification method are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
- Initial Stop-loss:
1. ATR Based:
The Average True Range (ATR) is a method used in technical analysis to measure volatility. It is not used to indicate the direction of price but to measure volatility, especially volatility caused by price gaps or limit moves.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ATR, the True Range (TR) first needs to be identified. The TR takes into account the most current period high/low range as well as the previous period close.
The True Range is the largest of the following:
- Current Period High minus Current Period Low
- Absolute Value of Current Period High minus Previous Period Close
- Absolute Value of Current Period Low minus Previous Period Close
- The ATR is then calculated as the moving average of the TR over a specified period. (The default period is 14)
2. ADR Based:
The Average Day Range (ADR) is an indicator that measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ADR for a particular day:
- Calculate the average of the high prices over a specified number of days.
- Calculate the average of the low prices over the same number of days.
- Find the difference between these average values.
- The default period for calculating the ADR is 14 days. A shorter period may introduce more noise, while a longer period may be slower to react to new market movements.
3. PL Based:
This method places the stop-loss at the low of the previous candle.
If the current entry is based on the hunt entry strategy, the stop-loss will be placed at the low of the candle that wicks through the lower FRMA band.
Example:
If the previous candle's low is 100, then the stop-loss will be set at 100.
This method ensures the stop-loss is placed just below the most recent significant low, providing a logical and immediate level for risk management.
- Trailing Stop-Loss:
One of the key elements of this strategy is its ability to detect structural liquidity and structural invalidation levels across multiple timeframes to trail the stop-loss once the trade is in running profits.
By utilizing this approach, the strategy allows enough room for price to run.
By using these methods, the strategy dynamically adjusts the initial stop-loss based on market volatility, helping to protect against adverse price movements while allowing for enough room for trades to develop.
Each market behaves differently across various timeframes, and it is essential to test different parameters and optimizations to find out which trailing stop-loss method gives you the desired results and performance.
What type of break-even and take profit identification methods are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
For Break-Even:
Percentage (%) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain percentage above the entry.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price * (1 + Percentage / 100)
Example:
If the entry price is $100 and the break-even percentage is 5%, the break-even level is $100 * 1.05 = $105.
Risk-to-Reward (RR) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain RR ratio.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price + (Initial Risk * RR Ratio)
For TP1 (Take Profit 1):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed or 50% if the TP2 boolean is enabled.
- Similar to break-even, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP1 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
For TP2 (Take Profit 2):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed.
- As with break-even and TP1, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP2 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
What's the day filter Filter, what does it do?
The day filter allows users to customize the session time and choose the specific days they want to include in the strategy session. This helps traders tailor their strategies to particular trading sessions or days of the week when they believe the market conditions are more favorable for their trading style.
Customize Session Time:
Users can define the start and end times for the trading session.
This allows the strategy to only consider trades within the specified time window, focusing on periods of higher market activity or preferred trading hours.
Select Days:
Users can select which days of the week to include in the strategy.
This feature is useful for excluding days with historically lower volatility or unfavorable trading conditions (e.g., Mondays or Fridays).
Benefits:
Focus on Optimal Trading Periods:
By customizing session times and days, traders can focus on periods when the market is more likely to present profitable opportunities.
Avoid Unfavorable Conditions:
Excluding specific days or times can help avoid trading during periods of low liquidity or high unpredictability, such as major news events or holidays.
What tables are available in this script?
- Summary: Provides a general overview, displaying key performance parameters such as Net Profit, Profit Factor, Max Drawdown, Average Trade, Closed Trades and more.
Total Commission: Displays the cumulative commissions incurred from all trades executed within the selected backtesting window. This value is derived by summing the commission fees for each trade on your chart.
Average Commission: Represents the average commission per trade, calculated by dividing the Total Commission by the total number of closed trades. This metric is crucial for assessing the impact of trading costs on overall profitability.
Avg Trade: The sum of money gained or lost by the average trade generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the Net Profit by the overall number of closed trades. An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.
MaxDD: Displays the largest drawdown of losses, i.e., the maximum possible loss that the strategy could have incurred among all of the trades it has made. This value is calculated separately for every bar that the strategy spends with an open position.
Profit Factor: The amount of money a trading strategy made for every unit of money it lost (in the selected currency). This value is calculated by dividing gross profits by gross losses.
Avg RR: This is calculated by dividing the average winning trade by the average losing trade. This field is not a very meaningful value by itself because it does not take into account the ratio of the number of winning vs losing trades, and strategies can have different approaches to profitability. A strategy may trade at every possibility in order to capture many small profits, yet have an average losing trade greater than the average winning trade. The higher this value is, the better, but it should be considered together with the percentage of winning trades and the net profit.
Winrate: The percentage of winning trades generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the number of winning trades by the total number of closed trades generated by a strategy. Percent profitable is not a very reliable measure by itself. A strategy could have many small winning trades, making the percent profitable high with a small average winning trade, or a few big winning trades accounting for a low percent profitable and a big average winning trade. Most mean-reversion successful strategies have a percent profitability of 40-80% but are profitable due to risk management control.
BE Trades: Number of break-even trades, excluding commission/slippage.
Losing Trades: The total number of losing trades generated by the strategy.
Winning Trades: The total number of winning trades generated by the strategy.
Total Trades: Total number of taken traders visible your charts.
Net Profit: The overall profit or loss (in the selected currency) achieved by the trading strategy in the test period. The value is the sum of all values from the Profit column (on the List of Trades tab), taking into account the sign.
- Monthly: Displays performance data on a month-by-month basis, allowing users to analyze performance trends over each month and year.
- Weekly: Displays performance data on a week-by-week basis, helping users to understand weekly performance variations.
- UI Table: A user-friendly table that allows users to view and save the selected strategy parameters from user inputs. This table enables easy access to key settings and configurations, providing a straightforward solution for saving strategy parameters by simply taking a screenshot with Alt + S or ⌥ + S.
User-input styles and customizations:
To facilitate studying historical data, all conditions and filters can be applied to your charts. By plotting background colors on your charts, you'll be able to identify what worked and what didn't in certain market conditions.
Please note that all background colors in the style are disabled by default to enhance visualization.
How to Use This Quantitive Strategy Builder to Create a Profitable Edge and System?
Choose Your Strategy mode:
- Decide whether you are creating an investing strategy or a trading strategy.
Select a Market:
- Choose a one-sided market such as stocks, indices, or cryptocurrencies.
Historical Data:
- Ensure the historical data covers at least 10 years of price action for robust backtesting.
Timeframe Selection:
- Choose the timeframe you are comfortable trading with. It is strongly recommended to use a timeframe above 15 minutes to minimize the impact of commissions/slippage on your profits.
Set Commission and Slippage:
- Properly set the commission and slippage in the strategy properties according to your broker/prop firm specifications.
Parameter Optimization:
- Use trial and error to test different parameters until you find the performance results you are looking for in the summary table or, preferably, through deep backtesting using the strategy tester.
Trade Count:
- Ensure the number of trades is 200 or more; the higher, the better for statistical significance.
Positive Average Trade:
- Make sure the average trade is above zero.
(An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.)
Performance Metrics:
- Look for a high profit factor, and net profit with minimum drawdown.
- Ideally, aim for a drawdown under 20-30%, depending on your risk tolerance.
Refinement and Optimization:
- Try out different markets and timeframes.
- Continue working on refining your edge using the available filters and components to further optimize your strategy.
What makes this strategy original?
QuantBuilder stands out due to its unique combination of quantitative techniques and innovative algorithms that leverage historical data for real-time trading decisions. Unlike most algorithmic strategies that work based on predefined rules, this strategy adapts to real-time market probabilities and expected values, enhancing its reliability. Key features include:
Mathematical Framework: The strategy integrates advanced mathematical concepts, such as probabilities and expected values, to assess trade viability and optimize decision-making.
Multi-Timeframe Analysis: By utilizing multi-timeframe probabilities, QuantBuilder provides a comprehensive view of market conditions, enhancing the accuracy of entry and exit points.
Dynamic Market Structure Identification: The script employs a systematic approach to identify market structure changes, utilizing a blend of swing highs and lows to detect contextual/direction bias of the market.
Built-in Trailing Stop Loss: The strategy features a dynamic trailing stop loss based on multi-timeframe analysis of market structure. This allows traders to lock in profits while adapting to changing market conditions, ensuring that exits are executed at optimal levels without prematurely closing positions.
Robust Performance Metrics: With detailed performance tables and visualizations, users can easily evaluate strategy effectiveness and adjust parameters based on historical performance.
Adaptability: The strategy is designed to work across various markets and timeframes, making it versatile for different trading styles and objectives.
Suitability for Investors and Traders: QuantBuilder is ideal for both investors and traders looking to rely on mathematically proven data to create profitable strategies, ensuring that decisions are grounded in quantitative analysis.
These original elements combine to create a powerful tool that can help both traders and investors to build and refine profitable strategies based on algorithmic quantitative analysis.
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data.
Built-in components, features, and functionalities of our charting tools are the intellectual property of @Fractalyst Unauthorized use, reproduction, or distribution of these proprietary elements is prohibited.
By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer and agrees to respect our intellectual property rights and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
AlgoBuilder [Mean-Reversion] | FractalystWhat's the strategy's purpose and functionality?
This strategy is designed for both traders and investors looking to rely and trade based on historical and backtested data using automation.
The main goal is to build profitable mean-reversion strategies that outperform the underlying asset in terms of returns while minimizing drawdown.
For example, as for a benchmark, if the S&P 500 (SPX) has achieved an estimated 10% annual return with a maximum drawdown of -57% over the past 20 years, using this strategy with different entry and exit techniques, users can potentially seek ways to achieve a higher Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) while maintaining a lower maximum drawdown.
Although the strategy can be applied to all markets and timeframes, it is most effective on stocks, indices, future markets, cryptocurrencies, and commodities and JPY currency pairs given their trending behaviors.
In trending market conditions, the strategy employs a combination of moving averages and diverse entry models to identify and capitalize on upward market movements. It integrates market structure-based moving averages and bands mechanisms across different timeframes and provides exit techniques, including percentage-based and risk-reward (RR) based take profit levels.
Additionally, the strategy has also a feature that includes a built-in probability function for traders who want to implement probabilities right into their trading strategies.
Performance summary, weekly, and monthly tables enable quick visualization of performance metrics like net profit, maximum drawdown, profit factor, average trade, average risk-reward ratio (RR), and more.
This aids optimization to meet specific goals and risk tolerance levels effectively.
-----
How does the strategy perform for both investors and traders?
The strategy has two main modes, tailored for different market participants: Traders and Investors.
Trading:
1. Trading:
- Designed for traders looking to capitalize on bullish trending markets.
- Utilizes a percentage risk per trade to manage risk and optimize returns.
- Suitable for active trading with a focus on mean-reversion and risk per trade approach.
◓: Mode | %: Risk percentage per trade
3. Investing:
- Geared towards investors who aim to capitalize on bullish trending markets without using leverage while mitigating the asset's maximum drawdown.
- Utilizes pre-define percentage of the equity to buy, hold, and manage the asset.
- Focuses on long-term growth and capital appreciation by fully investing in the asset during bullish conditions.
- ◓: Mode | %: Risk not applied (In investing mode, the strategy uses 10% of equity to buy the asset)
-----
What's is FRMA? How does the triple bands work? What are the underlying calculations?
Middle Band (FRMA):
The middle band is the core of the FRMA system. It represents the Fractalyst Moving Average, calculated by identifying the most recent external swing highs and lows in the market structure.
By determining these external swing pivot points, which act as significant highs and lows within the market range, the FRMA provides a unique moving average that adapts to market structure changes.
Upper Band:
The upper band shows the average price of the most recent external swing highs.
External swing highs are identified as the highest points between pivot points in the market structure.
This band helps traders identify potential overbought conditions when prices approach or exceed this upper band.
Lower Band:
The lower band shows the average price of the most recent external swing lows.
External swing lows are identified as the lowest points between pivot points in the market structure.
The script utilizes this band to identify potential oversold conditions, triggering entry signals as prices approach or drop below the lower band.
Adjustments Based on User Inputs:
Users can adjust how the upper and lower bands are calculated based on their preferences:
Upper/Lower: This method calculates the average bands using the prices of external swing highs and lows identified in the market.
Percentage Deviation from FRMA: Alternatively, users can opt to calculate the bands based on a percentage deviation from the middle FRMA. This approach provides flexibility to adjust the width of the bands relative to market conditions and volatility.
-----
What's the purpose of using moving averages in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Using moving averages is a widely-used technique to trade with the trend.
The main purpose of using moving averages in this strategy is to filter out bearish price action and to only take trades when the price is trading ABOVE specified moving averages.
The script uses different types of moving averages with user-adjustable timeframes and periods/lengths, allowing traders to try out different variations to maximize strategy performance and minimize drawdowns.
By applying these calculations, the strategy effectively identifies bullish trends and avoids market conditions that are not conducive to profitable trades.
The MA filter allows traders to choose whether they want a specific moving average above or below another one as their entry condition.
This comparison filter can be turned on (>) or off.
For example, you can set the filter so that MA#1 > MA#2, meaning the first moving average must be above the second one before the script looks for entry conditions. This adds an extra layer of trend confirmation, ensuring that trades are only taken in more favorable market conditions.
⍺: MA Period | Σ: MA Timeframe
-----
What entry modes are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
The strategy by default uses two different techniques for the entry criteria with user-adjustable left and right bars: Breakout and Fractal.
1. Breakout Entries :
- The strategy looks for pivot high points with a default period of 3.
- It stores the most recent high level in a variable.
- When the price crosses above this most recent level, the strategy checks if all conditions are met and the bar is closed before taking the buy entry.
◧: Pivot high left bars period | ◨: Pivot high right bars period
2. Fractal Entries :
- The strategy looks for pivot low points with a default period of 3.
- When a pivot low is detected, the strategy checks if all conditions are met and the bar is closed before taking the buy entry.
◧: Pivot low left bars period | ◨: Pivot low right bars period
2. Hunt Entries :
- The strategy identifies a candle that wicks through the lower FRMA band.
- It waits for the next candle to close above the low of the wick candle.
- When this condition is met and the bar is closed, the strategy takes the buy entry.
By utilizing these entry modes, the strategy aims to capitalize on bullish price movements while ensuring that the necessary conditions are met to validate the entry points.
-----
What type of stop-loss identification method are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Initial Stop-Loss:
1. ATR Based:
The Average True Range (ATR) is a method used in technical analysis to measure volatility. It is not used to indicate the direction of price but to measure volatility, especially volatility caused by price gaps or limit moves.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ATR, the True Range (TR) first needs to be identified. The TR takes into account the most current period high/low range as well as the previous period close.
The True Range is the largest of the following:
- Current Period High minus Current Period Low
- Absolute Value of Current Period High minus Previous Period Close
- Absolute Value of Current Period Low minus Previous Period Close
- The ATR is then calculated as the moving average of the TR over a specified period. (The default period is 14).
Example - ATR (14) * 2
⍺: ATR period | Σ: ATR Multiplier
2. ADR Based:
The Average Day Range (ADR) is an indicator that measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ADR for a particular day:
- Calculate the average of the high prices over a specified number of days.
- Calculate the average of the low prices over the same number of days.
- Find the difference between these average values.
- The default period for calculating the ADR is 14 days. A shorter period may introduce more noise, while a longer period may be slower to react to new market movements.
Example - ADR (20) * 2
⍺: ADR period | Σ: ADR Multiplier
3. PL Based:
This method places the stop-loss at the low of the previous candle.
If the current entry is based on the hunt entry strategy, the stop-loss will be placed at the low of the candle that wicks through the lower FRMA band.
Example:
If the previous candle's low is 100, then the stop-loss will be set at 100.
This method ensures the stop-loss is placed just below the most recent significant low, providing a logical and immediate level for risk management.
Application in Strategy (ATR/ADR):
- The strategy calculates the current bar's ADR/ATR with a user-defined period.
- It then multiplies the ADR/ATR by a user-defined multiplier to determine the initial stop-loss level.
By using these methods, the strategy dynamically adjusts the initial stop-loss based on market volatility, helping to protect against adverse price movements while allowing for enough room for trades to develop.
Each market behaves differently across various timeframes, and it is essential to test different parameters and optimizations to find out which trailing stop-loss method gives you the desired results and performance.
-----
What type of break-even and take profit identification methods are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
For Break-Even:
Percentage (%) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain percentage above the entry.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price * (1 + Percentage / 100)
Example:
If the entry price is $100 and the break-even percentage is 5%, the break-even level is $100 * 1.05 = $105.
Risk-to-Reward (RR) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain RR ratio.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price + (Initial Risk * RR Ratio)
Example:
If the entry price is $100, the initial risk is $10, and the RR ratio is 2, the break-even level is $100 + ($10 * 2) = $120.
FRMA Based:
Moves the stop-loss to break-even when the price hits the FRMA level at which the entry was taken.
Calculation:
Break-even level = FRMA level at the entry
Example:
If the FRMA level at entry is $102, the break-even level is set to $102 when the price reaches $102.
For TP1 (Take Profit 1):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed or 50% if the TP2 boolean is enabled.
- Similar to break-even, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP1 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
For TP2 (Take Profit 2):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed.
- As with break-even and TP1, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP2 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
When Both Percentage (%) Based and RR Based Take Profit Levels Are Off:
The script will adjust the take profit level to the higher FRMA band set within user inputs.
Calculation:
Take profit level = Higher FRMA band length/timeframe specified by the user.
This ensures that when neither percentage-based nor risk-to-reward-based take profit methods are enabled, the strategy defaults to using the higher FRMA band as the take profit level, providing a consistent and structured approach to profit-taking.
For TP1 and TP2, it's specifying the price levels at which the position is partially or fully closed based on the chosen method (percentage or RR) above the entry price.
These calculations are crucial for managing risk and optimizing profitability in the strategy.
⍺: BE/TP type (%/RR) | Σ: how many RR/% above the current price
-----
What's the ADR filter? What does it do? What are the underlying calculations?
The Average Day Range (ADR) measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
The period of the ADR filter used in this strategy is tied to the same period you've used for your initial stop-loss.
Users can define the minimum ADR they want to be met before the script looks for entry conditions.
ADR Bias Filter:
- Compares the current bar ADR with the ADR (Defined by user):
- If the current ADR is higher, it indicates that volatility has increased compared to ADR (DbU).(⬆)
- If the current ADR is lower, it indicates that volatility has decreased compared to ADR (DbU).(⬇)
Calculations:
1. Calculate ADR:
- Average the high prices over the specified period.
- Average the low prices over the same period.
- Find the difference between these average values in %.
2. Current ADR vs. ADR (DbU):
- Calculate the ADR for the current bar.
- Calculate the ADR (DbU).
- Compare the two values to determine if volatility has increased or decreased.
By using the ADR filter, the strategy ensures that trades are only taken in favorable market conditions where volatility meets the user's defined threshold, thus optimizing entry conditions and potentially improving the overall performance of the strategy.
>: Minimum required ADR for entry | %: Current ADR comparison to ADR of 14 days ago.
-----
What's the probability filter? What are the underlying calculations?
The probability filter is designed to enhance trade entries by using buyside liquidity and probability analysis to filter out unfavorable conditions.
This filter helps in identifying optimal entry points where the likelihood of a profitable trade is higher.
Calculations:
1. Understanding Swing highs and Swing Lows
Swing High: A Swing High is formed when there is a high with 2 lower highs to the left and right.
Swing Low: A Swing Low is formed when there is a low with 2 higher lows to the left and right.
2. Understanding the purpose and the underlying calculations behind Buyside, Sellside and Equilibrium levels.
3. Understanding probability calculations
1. Upon the formation of a new range, the script waits for the price to reach and tap into equilibrium or the 50% level. Status: "⏸" - Inactive
2. Once equilibrium is tapped into, the equilibrium status becomes activated and it waits for either liquidity side to be hit. Status: "▶" - Active
3. If the buyside liquidity is hit, the script adds to the count of successful buyside liquidity occurrences. Similarly, if the sellside is tapped, it records successful sellside liquidity occurrences.
5. Finally, the number of successful occurrences for each side is divided by the overall count individually to calculate the range probabilities.
Note: The calculations are performed independently for each directional range. A range is considered bearish if the previous breakout was through a sellside liquidity. Conversely, a range is considered bullish if the most recent breakout was through a buyside liquidity.
Example - BSL > 55%
-----
What's the range length Filter? What are the underlying calculations?
The range length filter identifies the price distance between buyside and sellside liquidity levels in percentage terms. When enabled, the script only looks for entries when the minimum range length is met. This helps ensure that trades are taken in markets with sufficient price movement.
Calculations:
Range Length (%) = ( ( Buyside Level − Sellside Level ) / Current Price ) ×100
Range Bias Identification:
Bullish Bias: The current range price has broken above the previous external swing high.
Bearish Bias: The current range price has broken below the previous external swing low.
Example - Range length filter is enabled | Range must be above 1%
>: Minimum required range length for entry | %: Current range length percentage in a (Bullish/Bearish) range
-----
What's the day filter Filter, what does it do?
The day filter allows users to customize the session time and choose the specific days they want to include in the strategy session. This helps traders tailor their strategies to particular trading sessions or days of the week when they believe the market conditions are more favorable for their trading style.
Customize Session Time:
Users can define the start and end times for the trading session.
This allows the strategy to only consider trades within the specified time window, focusing on periods of higher market activity or preferred trading hours.
Select Days:
Users can select which days of the week to include in the strategy.
This feature is useful for excluding days with historically lower volatility or unfavorable trading conditions (e.g., Mondays or Fridays).
Benefits:
Focus on Optimal Trading Periods:
By customizing session times and days, traders can focus on periods when the market is more likely to present profitable opportunities.
Avoid Unfavorable Conditions:
Excluding specific days or times can help avoid trading during periods of low liquidity or high unpredictability, such as major news events or holidays.
Increased Flexibility: The filter provides increased flexibility, allowing traders to adapt the strategy to their specific needs and preferences.
Example - Day filter | Session Filter
θ: Session time | Exchange time-zone
-----
What tables are available in this script?
Table Type:
- Summary: Provides a general overview, displaying key performance parameters such as Net Profit, Profit Factor, Max Drawdown, Average Trade, Closed Trades and more.
Avg Trade: The sum of money gained or lost by the average trade generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the Net Profit by the overall number of closed trades. An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.
MaxDD: Displays the largest drawdown of losses, i.e., the maximum possible loss that the strategy could have incurred among all of the trades it has made. This value is calculated separately for every bar that the strategy spends with an open position.
Profit Factor: The amount of money a trading strategy made for every unit of money it lost (in the selected currency). This value is calculated by dividing gross profits by gross losses.
Avg RR: This is calculated by dividing the average winning trade by the average losing trade. This field is not a very meaningful value by itself because it does not take into account the ratio of the number of winning vs losing trades, and strategies can have different approaches to profitability. A strategy may trade at every possibility in order to capture many small profits, yet have an average losing trade greater than the average winning trade. The higher this value is, the better, but it should be considered together with the percentage of winning trades and the net profit.
Winrate: The percentage of winning trades generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the number of winning trades by the total number of closed trades generated by a strategy. Percent profitable is not a very reliable measure by itself. A strategy could have many small winning trades, making the percent profitable high with a small average winning trade, or a few big winning trades accounting for a low percent profitable and a big average winning trade. Most mean-reversion successful strategies have a percent profitability of 40-80% but are profitable due to risk management control.
BE Trades: Number of break-even trades, excluding commission/slippage.
Losing Trades: The total number of losing trades generated by the strategy.
Winning Trades: The total number of winning trades generated by the strategy.
Total Trades: Total number of taken traders visible your charts.
Net Profit: The overall profit or loss (in the selected currency) achieved by the trading strategy in the test period. The value is the sum of all values from the Profit column (on the List of Trades tab), taking into account the sign.
- Monthly: Displays performance data on a month-by-month basis, allowing users to analyze performance trends over each month.
- Weekly: Displays performance data on a week-by-week basis, helping users to understand weekly performance variations.
- OFF: Hides the performance table.
Profit Color:
- Allows users to set the color for representing profit in the performance table, helping to quickly distinguish profitable periods.
Loss Color:
- Allows users to set the color for representing loss in the performance table, helping to quickly identify loss-making periods.
These customizable tables provide traders with flexible and detailed performance analysis, aiding in better strategy evaluation and optimization.
-----
User-input styles and customizations:
To facilitate studying historical data, all conditions and rules can be applied to your charts. By plotting background colors on your charts, you'll be able to identify what worked and what didn't in certain market conditions.
Please note that all background colors in the style are disabled by default to enhance visualization.
-----
How to Use This Algobuilder to Create a Profitable Edge and System:
Choose Your Strategy mode:
- Decide whether you are creating an investing strategy or a trading strategy.
Select a Market:
- Choose a one-sided market such as stocks, indices, or cryptocurrencies.
Historical Data:
- Ensure the historical data covers at least 10 years of price action for robust backtesting.
Timeframe Selection:
- Choose the timeframe you are comfortable trading with. It is strongly recommended to use a timeframe above 15 minutes to minimize the impact of commissions/slippage on your profits.
Set Commission and Slippage:
- Properly set the commission and slippage in the strategy properties according to your broker or prop firm specifications.
Parameter Optimization:
- Use trial and error to test different parameters until you find the performance results you are looking for in the summary table or, preferably, through deep backtesting using the strategy tester.
Trade Count:
- Ensure the number of trades is 100 or more; the higher, the better for statistical significance.
Positive Average Trade:
- Make sure the average trade value is above zero.
(An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.)
Performance Metrics:
- Look for a high profit factor, and net profit with minimum drawdown.
- Ideally, aim for a drawdown under 20-30%, depending on your risk tolerance.
Refinement and Optimization:
- Try out different markets and timeframes.
- Continue working on refining your edge using the available filters and components to further optimize your strategy.
Automation:
- Once you’re confident in your strategy, you can use the automation section to connect the algorithm to your broker or prop firm.
- Trade a fully automated and backtested trading strategy, allowing for hands-free execution and management.
-----
What makes this strategy original?
1. Incorporating direct integration of probabilities into the strategy.
2. Utilizing built-in market structure-based moving averages across various timeframes.
4. Offering both investing and trading strategies, facilitating optimization from different perspectives.
5. Automation for efficient execution.
6. Providing a summary table for instant access to key parameters of the strategy.
-----
How to use automation?
For Traders:
1. Ensure the strategy parameters are properly set based on your optimized parameters.
2. Enter your PineConnector License ID in the designated field.
3. Specify the desired risk level.
4. Provide the Metatrader symbol.
5. Check for chart updates to ensure the automation table appears on the top right corner, displaying your License ID, risk, and symbol.
6. Set up an alert with the strategy selected as Condition and the Message as {{strategy.order.alert_message}}.
7. Activate the Webhook URL in the Notifications section, setting it as the official PineConnector webhook address.
8. Double-check all settings on PineConnector to ensure the connection is successful.
9. Create the alert for entry/exit automation.
For Investors:
1. Ensure the strategy parameters are properly set based on your optimized parameters.
2. Choose "Investing" in the user-input settings.
3. Create an alert with a specified name.
4. Customize the notifications tab to receive alerts via email.
5. Buying/selling alerts will be triggered instantly upon entry or exit order execution.
-----
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data.
Built-in components, features, and functionalities of our charting tools are the intellectual property of @Fractalyst Unauthorized use, reproduction, or distribution of these proprietary elements is prohibited.
By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer and agrees to respect our intellectual property rights and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) | FractalystWhat's the purpose of this strategy?
The purpose of dollar cost averaging (DCA) is to grow investments over time using a disciplined, methodical approach used by many top institutions like MicroStrategy and other institutions.
Here's how it functions:
Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA): This technique involves investing a set amount of money regularly, regardless of market conditions. It helps to mitigate the risk of investing a large sum at a peak price by spreading out your investment, thus potentially lowering your average cost per share over time.
Regular Contributions: By adding money to your investments on a pre-determined frequency and dollar amount defined by the user, you take advantage of compounding. The script will remind you to contribute based on your chosen schedule, which can be weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, quarterly, or yearly. This systematic approach ensures that your returns can earn their own returns, much like interest on savings but potentially at a higher rate.
Technical Analysis: The strategy employs a market trend ratio to gauge market sentiment. It calculates the ratio of bullish vs bearish breakouts across various timeframes, assigning this ratio a percentage-based score to determine the directional bias. Once this score exceeds a user-selected percentage, the strategy looks to take buy entries, signaling a favorable time for investment based on current market trends.
Fundamental Analysis: This aspect looks at the health of the economy and companies within it to determine bullish market conditions. Specifically, we consider:
Specifically, it considers:
Interest Rate: High interest rates can affect borrowing costs, potentially slowing down economic growth or making stocks less attractive compared to fixed income.
Inflation Rate: Inflation erodes purchasing power, but moderate inflation can be a sign of a healthy economy. We look for investments that might benefit from or withstand inflation.
GDP Rate: GDP growth indicates the overall health of the economy; we aim to invest in sectors poised to grow with the economy.
Unemployment Rate: Lower unemployment typically signals consumer confidence and spending power, which can boost certain sectors.
By integrating these elements, the strategy aims to:
Reduce Investment Volatility: By spreading out your investments, you're less impacted by short-term market swings.
Enhance Growth Potential: Using both technical and fundamental filters helps in choosing investments that are more likely to appreciate over time.
Manage Risk: The strategy aims to balance the risk of market timing by investing consistently and choosing assets wisely based on both economic data and market conditions.
----
What are Regular Contributions in this strategy?
Regular Contributions involve adding money to your investments on a pre-determined frequency and dollar amount defined by the user. The script will remind you to contribute based on your chosen schedule, which can be weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, quarterly, or yearly. This systematic approach ensures that your returns can earn their own returns, much like interest on savings but potentially at a higher rate.
----
How do regular contributions enhance compounding and reduce timing risk?
Enhances Compounding: Regular contributions leverage the power of compounding, where returns on investments can generate their own returns, potentially leading to exponential growth over time.
Reduces Timing Risk: By investing regularly, the strategy minimizes the risk associated with trying to time the market, spreading out the investment cost over time and potentially reducing the impact of volatility.
Automated Reminders: The script reminds users to make contributions based on their chosen schedule, ensuring consistency and discipline in investment practices, which is crucial for long-term success.
----
How does the strategy integrate technical and fundamental analysis for investors?
A: The strategy combines technical and fundamental analysis in the following manner:
Technical Analysis: It uses a market trend ratio to determine the directional bias by calculating the ratio of bullish vs bearish breakouts. Once this ratio exceeds a user-selected percentage threshold, the strategy signals to take buy entries, optimizing the timing within the given timeframe(s).
Fundamental Analysis: This aspect assesses the broader economic environment to identify sectors or assets that are likely to benefit from current economic conditions. By understanding these fundamentals, the strategy ensures investments are made in assets with strong growth potential.
This integration allows the strategy to select investments that are both technically favorable for entry and fundamentally sound, providing a comprehensive approach to investment decisions in the crypto, stock, and commodities markets.
----
How does the strategy identify market structure? What are the underlying calculations?
Q: How does the strategy identify market structure?
A: The strategy identifies market structure by utilizing an efficient logic with for loops to pinpoint the first swing candle that features a pivot of 2. This marks the beginning of the break of structure, where the market's previous trend or pattern is considered invalidated or changed.
What are the underlying calculations for identifying market structure?
A: The underlying calculations involve:
Identifying Swing Points: The strategy looks for swing highs (marked with blue Xs) and swing lows (marked with red Xs). A swing high is identified when a candle's high is higher than the highs of the candles before and after it. Conversely, a swing low is when a candle's low is lower than the lows of the candles before and after it.
Break of Structure (BOS):
Bullish BOS: This occurs when the price breaks above the swing high level of the previous structure, indicating a potential shift to a bullish trend.
Bearish BOS: This happens when the price breaks below the swing low level of the previous structure, signaling a potential shift to a bearish trend.
Structural Liquidity and Invalidation:
Structural Liquidity: After a break of structure, liquidity levels are updated to the first swing high in a bullish BOS or the first swing low in a bearish BOS.
Structural Invalidation: If the price moves back to the level of the first swing low before the bullish BOS or the first swing high before the bearish BOS, it invalidates the break of structure, suggesting a potential reversal or continuation of the previous trend.
This method provides users with a technical approach to filter market regimes, offering an advantage by minimizing the risk of overfitting to historical data, which is often a concern with traditional indicators like moving averages.
By focusing on identifying pivotal swing points and the subsequent breaks of structure, the strategy maintains a balance between sensitivity to market changes and robustness against historical data anomalies, ensuring a more adaptable and potentially more reliable market analysis tool.
What entry criteria are used in this script?
The script uses two entry models for trading decisions: BreakOut and Fractal.
Underlying Calculations:
Breakout: The script records the most recent swing high by storing it in a variable. When the price closes above this recorded level, and all other predefined conditions are satisfied, the script triggers a breakout entry. This approach is considered conservative because it waits for the price to confirm a breakout above the previous high before entering a trade. As shown in the image, as soon as the price closes above the new candle (first tick), the long entry gets taken. The stop-loss is initially set and then moved to break-even once the price moves in favor of the trade.
Fractal: This method involves identifying a swing low with a period of 2, which means it looks for a low point where the price is lower than the two candles before and after it. Once this pattern is detected, the script executes the trade. This is an aggressive approach since it doesn't wait for further price confirmation. In the image, this is represented by the 'Fractal 2' label where the script identifies and acts on the swing low pattern.
----
How does the script calculate trend score? What are the underlying calculations?
Market Trend Ratio: The script calculates the ratio of bullish to bearish breakouts. This involves:
Counting Bullish Breakouts: A bullish breakout is counted when the price breaks above a recent swing high (as identified in the strategy's market structure analysis).
Counting Bearish Breakouts: A bearish breakout is counted when the price breaks below a recent swing low.
Percentage-Based Score: This ratio is then converted into a percentage-based score:
For example, if there are 10 bullish breakouts and 5 bearish breakouts in a given timeframe, the ratio would be 10:5 or 2:1. This could be translated into a score where 66.67% (10/(10+5) * 100) represents the bullish trend strength.
The score might be calculated as (Number of Bullish Breakouts / Total Breakouts) * 100.
User-Defined Threshold: The strategy uses this score to determine when to take buy entries. If the trend score exceeds a user-defined percentage threshold, it indicates a strong enough bullish trend to justify a buy entry. For instance, if the user sets the threshold at 60%, the script would look for a buy entry when the trend score is above this level.
Timeframe Consideration: The calculations are performed across the timeframes specified by the user, ensuring the trend score reflects the market's behavior over different periods, which could be daily, weekly, or any other relevant timeframe.
This method provides a quantitative measure of market trend strength, helping to make informed decisions based on the balance between bullish and bearish market movements.
What type of stop-loss identification method are used in this strategy?
This strategy employs two types of stop-loss methods: Initial Stop-loss and Trailing Stop-Loss.
Underlying Calculations:
Initial Stop-loss:
ATR Based: The strategy uses the Average True Range (ATR) to set an initial stop-loss, which helps in accounting for market volatility without predicting price direction.
Calculation:
- First, the True Range (TR) is calculated for each period, which is the greatest of:
- Current Period High - Current Period Low
- Absolute Value of Current Period High - Previous Period Close
- Absolute Value of Current Period Low - Previous Period Close
- The ATR is then the moving average of these TR values over a specified period, typically 14 periods by default. This ATR value can be used to set the stop-loss at a distance from the entry price that reflects the current market volatility.
Swing Low Based:
For this method, the stop-loss is set based on the most recent swing low identified in the market structure analysis. This approach uses the lowest point of the recent price action as a reference for setting the stop-loss.
Trailing Stop-Loss:
The strategy uses structural liquidity and structural invalidation levels across multiple timeframes to adjust the stop-loss once the trade is profitable. This method involves:
Detecting Structural Liquidity: After a break of structure, the liquidity levels are updated to the first swing high in a bullish scenario or the first swing low in a bearish scenario. These levels serve as potential areas where the price might find support or resistance, allowing the stop-loss to trail the price movement.
Detecting Structural Invalidation: If the price returns to the level of the first swing low before a bullish break of structure or the first swing high before a bearish break of structure, it suggests the trend might be reversing or invalidating, prompting the adjustment of the stop-loss to lock in profits or minimize losses.
By using these methods, the strategy dynamically adjusts the initial stop-loss based on market volatility, helping to protect against adverse price movements while allowing for enough room for trades to develop. The ATR-based stop-loss adapts to the current market conditions by considering the volatility, ensuring that the stop-loss is not too tight during volatile periods, which could lead to premature exits, nor too loose during calm markets, which might result in larger losses. Similarly, the swing low based stop-loss provides a logical exit point if the market structure changes unfavorably.
Each market behaves differently across various timeframes, and it is essential to test different parameters and optimizations to find out which trailing stop-loss method gives you the desired results and performance. This involves backtesting the strategy with different settings for the ATR period, the distance from the swing low, and how the trailing stop-loss reacts to structural liquidity and invalidation levels.
Through this process, you can tailor the strategy to perform optimally in different market environments, ensuring that the stop-loss mechanism supports the trade's longevity while safeguarding against significant drawdowns.
What type of break-even and take profit identification methods are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
For Break-Even:
Percentage (%) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain percentage above the entry.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price * (1 + Percentage / 100)
Example:
If the entry price is $100 and the break-even percentage is 5%, the break-even level is $100 * 1.05 = $105.
Risk-to-Reward (RR) Based:
Moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price when the price reaches a certain RR ratio.
Calculation:
Break-even level = Entry Price + (Initial Risk * RR Ratio)
For TP
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed.
- Similar to break-even, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP1 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
What's the day filter Filter, what does it do?
The day filter allows users to customize the session time and choose the specific days they want to include in the strategy session. This helps traders tailor their strategies to particular trading sessions or days of the week when they believe the market conditions are more favorable for their trading style.
Customize Session Time:
Users can define the start and end times for the trading session.
This allows the strategy to only consider trades within the specified time window, focusing on periods of higher market activity or preferred trading hours.
Select Days:
Users can select which days of the week to include in the strategy.
This feature is useful for excluding days with historically lower volatility or unfavorable trading conditions (e.g., Mondays or Fridays).
Benefits:
Focus on Optimal Trading Periods:
By customizing session times and days, traders can focus on periods when the market is more likely to present profitable opportunities.
Avoid Unfavorable Conditions:
Excluding specific days or times can help avoid trading during periods of low liquidity or high unpredictability, such as major news events or holidays.
What tables are available in this script?
- Summary: Provides a general overview, displaying key performance parameters such as Net Profit, Profit Factor, Max Drawdown, Average Trade, Closed Trades and more.
Total Commission: Displays the cumulative commissions incurred from all trades executed within the selected backtesting window. This value is derived by summing the commission fees for each trade on your chart.
Average Commission: Represents the average commission per trade, calculated by dividing the Total Commission by the total number of closed trades. This metric is crucial for assessing the impact of trading costs on overall profitability.
Avg Trade: The sum of money gained or lost by the average trade generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the Net Profit by the overall number of closed trades. An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.
MaxDD: Displays the largest drawdown of losses, i.e., the maximum possible loss that the strategy could have incurred among all of the trades it has made. This value is calculated separately for every bar that the strategy spends with an open position.
Profit Factor: The amount of money a trading strategy made for every unit of money it lost (in the selected currency). This value is calculated by dividing gross profits by gross losses.
Avg RR: This is calculated by dividing the average winning trade by the average losing trade. This field is not a very meaningful value by itself because it does not take into account the ratio of the number of winning vs losing trades, and strategies can have different approaches to profitability. A strategy may trade at every possibility in order to capture many small profits, yet have an average losing trade greater than the average winning trade. The higher this value is, the better, but it should be considered together with the percentage of winning trades and the net profit.
Winrate: The percentage of winning trades generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the number of winning trades by the total number of closed trades generated by a strategy. Percent profitable is not a very reliable measure by itself. A strategy could have many small winning trades, making the percent profitable high with a small average winning trade, or a few big winning trades accounting for a low percent profitable and a big average winning trade. Most mean-reversion successful strategies have a percent profitability of 40-80% but are profitable due to risk management control.
BE Trades: Number of break-even trades, excluding commission/slippage.
Losing Trades: The total number of losing trades generated by the strategy.
Winning Trades: The total number of winning trades generated by the strategy.
Total Trades: Total number of taken traders visible your charts.
Net Profit: The overall profit or loss (in the selected currency) achieved by the trading strategy in the test period. The value is the sum of all values from the Profit column (on the List of Trades tab), taking into account the sign.
- Monthly: Displays performance data on a month-by-month basis, allowing users to analyze performance trends over each month and year.
- Weekly: Displays performance data on a week-by-week basis, helping users to understand weekly performance variations.
- UI Table: A user-friendly table that allows users to view and save the selected strategy parameters from user inputs. This table enables easy access to key settings and configurations, providing a straightforward solution for saving strategy parameters by simply taking a screenshot with Alt + S or ⌥ + S.
User-input styles and customizations:
Please note that all background colors in the style are disabled by default to enhance visualization.
How to Use This Strategy to Create a Profitable Edge and Systems?
Choose Your Strategy mode:
- Decide whether you are creating an investing strategy or a trading strategy.
Select a Market:
- Choose a one-sided market such as stocks, indices, or cryptocurrencies.
Historical Data:
- Ensure the historical data covers at least 10 years of price action for robust backtesting.
Timeframe Selection:
- Choose the timeframe you are comfortable trading with. It is strongly recommended to use a timeframe above 15 minutes to minimize the impact of commissions/slippage on your profits.
Set Commission and Slippage:
- Properly set the commission and slippage in the strategy properties according to your broker/prop firm specifications.
Parameter Optimization:
- Use trial and error to test different parameters until you find the performance results you are looking for in the summary table or, preferably, through deep backtesting using the strategy tester.
Trade Count:
- Ensure the number of trades is 200 or more; the higher, the better for statistical significance.
Positive Average Trade:
- Make sure the average trade is above zero.
(An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.)
Performance Metrics:
- Look for a high profit factor, and net profit with minimum drawdown.
- Ideally, aim for a drawdown under 20-30%, depending on your risk tolerance.
Refinement and Optimization:
- Try out different markets and timeframes.
- Continue working on refining your edge using the available filters and components to further optimize your strategy.
What makes this strategy original?
Incorporation of Fundamental Analysis:
This strategy integrates fundamental analysis by considering key economic indicators such as interest rates, inflation, GDP growth, and unemployment rates. These fundamentals help in assessing the broader economic health, which in turn influences sector performance and market trends. By understanding these economic conditions, the strategy can identify sectors or assets that are likely to thrive, ensuring investments are made in environments conducive to growth. This approach allows for a more informed investment decision, aligning technical entries with fundamentally strong market conditions, thus potentially enhancing the strategy's effectiveness over time.
Technical Analysis Without Classical Methods:
The strategy's technical analysis diverges from traditional methods like moving averages by focusing on market structure through a trend score system.
Instead of using lagging indicators, it employs a real-time analysis of market trends by calculating the ratio of bullish to bearish breakouts. This provides several benefits:
Immediate Market Sentiment: The trend score system reacts more dynamically to current market conditions, offering insights into the market's immediate sentiment rather than historical trends, which can often lag behind real-time changes.
Reduced Overfitting: By not relying on moving averages or similar classical indicators, the strategy avoids the common pitfall of overfitting to historical data, which can lead to poor performance in new market conditions. The trend score provides a fresh perspective on market direction, potentially leading to more robust trading signals.
Clear Entry Signals: With the trend score, entry decisions are based on a clear percentage threshold, making the strategy's decision-making process straightforward and less subjective than interpreting moving average crossovers or similar signals.
Regular Contributions and Reminders:
The strategy encourages regular investments through a system of predefined frequency and amount, which could be weekly, bi-weekly, monthly, quarterly, or yearly. This systematic approach:
Enhances Compounding: Regular contributions leverage the power of compounding, where returns on investments can generate their own returns, potentially leading to exponential growth over time.
Reduces Timing Risk: By investing regularly, the strategy minimizes the risk associated with trying to time the market, spreading out the investment cost over time and potentially reducing the impact of volatility.
Automated Reminders: The script reminds users to make contributions based on their chosen schedule, ensuring consistency and discipline in investment practices, which is crucial for long-term success.
Long-Term Wealth Building:
Focused on long-term wealth accumulation, this strategy:
Promotes Patience and Discipline: By emphasizing regular contributions and a disciplined approach to both entry and risk management, it aligns with the principles of long-term investing, discouraging impulsive decisions based on short-term market fluctuations.
Diversification Across Asset Classes: Operating across crypto, stocks, and commodities, the strategy provides diversification, which is a key component of long-term wealth building, reducing risk through varied exposure.
Growth Over Time: The strategy's design to work with the market's natural growth cycles, supported by fundamental analysis, aims for sustainable growth rather than quick profits, aligning with the goals of investors looking to build wealth over decades.
This comprehensive approach, combining fundamental insights, innovative technical analysis, disciplined investment habits, and a focus on long-term growth, offers a unique and potentially effective pathway for investors seeking to build wealth steadily over time.
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data.
Built-in components, features, and functionalities of our charting tools are the intellectual property of @Fractalyst Unauthorized use, reproduction, or distribution of these proprietary elements is prohibited.
- By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer and agrees to respect our intellectual property rights and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
AlgoBuilder [Trend-Following] | FractalystWhat's the strategy's purpose and functionality?
This strategy is designed for both traders and investors looking to rely on and trade based on historical and backtested data using automation. The main goal is to build profitable trend-following strategies that outperform the underlying asset in terms of returns while minimizing drawdown. For example, as for a benchmark, if the S&P 500 (SPX) has achieved an estimated 10% annual return with a maximum drawdown of -57% over the past 20 years, using this strategy with different entry and exit techniques, users can potentially seek ways to achieve a higher Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) while maintaining a lower maximum drawdown.
Although the strategy can be applied to all markets and timeframes, it is most effective on stocks, indices, future markets, cryptocurrencies, and commodities and JPY currency pairs given their trending behaviors.
In trending market conditions, the strategy employs a combination of moving averages and diverse entry models to identify and capitalize on upward market movements. It integrates market structure-based trailing stop-loss mechanisms across different timeframes and provides exit techniques, including percentage-based and risk-reward (RR) based take profit levels.
Additionally, the strategy has also a feature that includes a built-in probability and sentiment function for traders who want to implement probabilities and market sentiment right into their trading strategies.
Performance summary, weekly, and monthly tables enable quick visualization of performance metrics like net profit, maximum drawdown, compound annual growth rate (CAGR), profit factor, average trade, average risk-reward ratio (RR), and more. This aids optimization to meet specific goals and risk tolerance levels effectively.
-----
How does the strategy perform for both investors and traders?
The strategy has two main modes, tailored for different market participants: Traders and Investors.
Trading:
1. Trading (1x):
- Designed for traders looking to capitalize on bullish trending markets.
- Utilizes a percentage risk per trade to manage risk and optimize returns.
- Suitable for active trading with a focus on trend-following and risk management.
- (1x) This mode ensures no stacking of positions, allowing for only one running position or trade at a time.
◓: Mode | %: Risk percentage per trade
2. Trading (2x):
Similar to the 1x mode but allows for two pyramiding entries.
This approach enables traders to increase their position size as the trade moves in their favor, potentially enhancing profits during strong bullish trends.
◓: Mode | %: Risk percentage per trade
3. Investing:
- Geared towards investors who aim to capitalize on bullish trending markets without using leverage while mitigating the asset's maximum drawdown.
- Utilizes 100% of the equity to buy, hold, and manage the asset.
- Focuses on long-term growth and capital appreciation by fully investing in the asset during bullish conditions.
- ◓: Mode | %: Risk not applied (In investing mode, the strategy uses 100% of equity to buy the asset)
-----
What's the purpose of using moving averages in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Using moving averages is a widely-used technique to trade with the trend.
The main purpose of using moving averages in this strategy is to filter out bearish price action and to only take trades when the price is trading ABOVE specified moving averages.
The script uses different types of moving averages with user-adjustable timeframes and periods/lengths, allowing traders to try out different variations to maximize strategy performance and minimize drawdowns.
By applying these calculations, the strategy effectively identifies bullish trends and avoids market conditions that are not conducive to profitable trades.
The MA filter allows traders to choose whether they want a specific moving average above or below another one as their entry condition.
This comparison filter can be turned on (>/<) or off.
For example, you can set the filter so that MA#1 > MA#2, meaning the first moving average must be above the second one before the script looks for entry conditions. This adds an extra layer of trend confirmation, ensuring that trades are only taken in more favorable market conditions.
MA #1: Fast MA | MA #2: Medium MA | MA #3: Slow MA
⍺: MA Period | Σ: MA Timeframe
-----
What entry modes are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
The strategy by default uses two different techniques for the entry criteria with user-adjustable left and right bars: Breakout and Fractal.
1. Breakout Entries :
- The strategy looks for pivot high points with a default period of 3.
- It stores the most recent high level in a variable.
- When the price crosses above this most recent level, the strategy checks if all conditions are met and the bar is closed before taking the buy entry.
◧: Pivot high left bars period | ◨: Pivot high right bars period
2. Fractal Entries :
- The strategy looks for pivot low points with a default period of 3.
- When a pivot low is detected, the strategy checks if all conditions are met and the bar is closed before taking the buy entry.
◧: Pivot low left bars period | ◨: Pivot low right bars period
By utilizing these entry modes, the strategy aims to capitalize on bullish price movements while ensuring that the necessary conditions are met to validate the entry points.
-----
What type of stop-loss identification method are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
Initial Stop-Loss:
1. ATR Based:
The Average True Range (ATR) is a method used in technical analysis to measure volatility. It is not used to indicate the direction of price but to measure volatility, especially volatility caused by price gaps or limit moves.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ATR, the True Range (TR) first needs to be identified. The TR takes into account the most current period high/low range as well as the previous period close.
The True Range is the largest of the following:
- Current Period High minus Current Period Low
- Absolute Value of Current Period High minus Previous Period Close
- Absolute Value of Current Period Low minus Previous Period Close
- The ATR is then calculated as the moving average of the TR over a specified period. (The default period is 14).
Example - ATR (14) * 1.5
⍺: ATR period | Σ: ATR Multiplier
2. ADR Based:
The Average Day Range (ADR) is an indicator that measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
Calculation:
- To calculate the ADR for a particular day:
- Calculate the average of the high prices over a specified number of days.
- Calculate the average of the low prices over the same number of days.
- Find the difference between these average values.
- The default period for calculating the ADR is 14 days. A shorter period may introduce more noise, while a longer period may be slower to react to new market movements.
Example - ADR (14) * 1.5
⍺: ADR period | Σ: ADR Multiplier
Application in Strategy:
- The strategy calculates the current bar's ADR/ATR with a user-defined period.
- It then multiplies the ADR/ATR by a user-defined multiplier to determine the initial stop-loss level.
By using these methods, the strategy dynamically adjusts the initial stop-loss based on market volatility, helping to protect against adverse price movements while allowing for enough room for trades to develop.
Trailing Stop-Loss:
One of the key elements of this strategy is its ability to detec buyside and sellside liquidity levels across multiple timeframes to trail the stop-loss once the trade is in running profits.
By utilizing this approach, the strategy allows enough room for price to run.
There are two built-in trailing stop-loss (SL) options you can choose from while in a trade:
1. External Trailing Stop-Loss:
- Uses sell-side liquidity to trail your stop-loss, allowing price to consolidate before continuation. This method is less aggressive and provides more room for price fluctuations.
Example - External - Wick below the trailing SL - 12H trailing timeframe
⍺: Exit type | Σ: Trailing stop-loss timeframe
2. Internal Trailing Stop-Loss:
- Uses the most recent swing low with a period of 2 to trail your stop-loss. This method is more aggressive compared to the external trailing stop-loss, as it tightens the stop-loss closer to the current price action.
Example - Internal - Close below the trailing SL - 6H trailing timeframe
⍺: Exit type | Σ: Trailing stop-loss timeframe
Each market behaves differently across various timeframes, and it is essential to test different parameters and optimizations to find out which trailing stop-loss method gives you the desired results and performance.
-----
What type of break-even and take profit identification methods are used in this strategy? What are the underlying calculations?
For Break-Even:
- You can choose to set a break-even level at which your initial stop-loss moves to the entry price as soon as it hits, and your trailing stop-loss gets activated (if enabled).
- You can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based break-even, allowing you to set your break-even level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
For TP1 (Take Profit 1):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed or 50% if the TP2 boolean is enabled.
- Similar to break-even, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP1 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
For TP2 (Take Profit 2):
- You can choose to set a take profit level at which your position gets fully closed.
- As with break-even and TP1, you can select either a percentage (%) or risk-to-reward (RR) based take profit level, allowing you to set your TP2 level as a percentage amount above the entry price or based on RR.
The underlying calculations involve determining the price levels at which these actions are triggered. For break-even, it moves the initial stop-loss to the entry price and activate the trailing stop-loss once the break-even level is reached.
For TP1 and TP2, it's specifying the price levels at which the position is partially or fully closed based on the chosen method (percentage or RR) above the entry price.
These calculations are crucial for managing risk and optimizing profitability in the strategy.
⍺: BE/TP type (%/RR) | Σ: how many RR/% above the current price
-----
What's the ADR filter? What does it do? What are the underlying calculations?
The Average Day Range (ADR) measures the volatility of an asset by showing the average movement of the price between the high and the low over the last several days.
The period of the ADR filter used in this strategy is tied to the same period you've used for your initial stop-loss.
Users can define the minimum ADR they want to be met before the script looks for entry conditions.
ADR Bias Filter:
- Compares the current bar ADR with the ADR (Defined by user):
- If the current ADR is higher, it indicates that volatility has increased compared to ADR (DbU).(⬆)
- If the current ADR is lower, it indicates that volatility has decreased compared to ADR (DbU).(⬇)
Calculations:
1. Calculate ADR:
- Average the high prices over the specified period.
- Average the low prices over the same period.
- Find the difference between these average values in %.
2. Current ADR vs. ADR (DbU):
- Calculate the ADR for the current bar.
- Calculate the ADR (DbU).
- Compare the two values to determine if volatility has increased or decreased.
By using the ADR filter, the strategy ensures that trades are only taken in favorable market conditions where volatility meets the user's defined threshold, thus optimizing entry conditions and potentially improving the overall performance of the strategy.
>: Minimum required ADR for entry | %: Current ADR comparison to ADR of 14 days ago.
-----
What's the probability filter? What are the underlying calculations?
The probability filter is designed to enhance trade entries by using buyside liquidity and probability analysis to filter out unfavorable conditions.
This filter helps in identifying optimal entry points where the likelihood of a profitable trade is higher.
Calculations:
1. Understanding Swing highs and Swing Lows
Swing High: A Swing High is formed when there is a high with 2 lower highs to the left and right.
Swing Low: A Swing Low is formed when there is a low with 2 higher lows to the left and right.
2. Understanding the purpose and the underlying calculations behind Buyside, Sellside and Equilibrium levels.
3. Understanding probability calculations
1. Upon the formation of a new range, the script waits for the price to reach and tap into equilibrium or the 50% level. Status: "⏸" - Inactive
2. Once equilibrium is tapped into, the equilibrium status becomes activated and it waits for either liquidity side to be hit. Status: "▶" - Active
3. If the buyside liquidity is hit, the script adds to the count of successful buyside liquidity occurrences. Similarly, if the sellside is tapped, it records successful sellside liquidity occurrences.
5. Finally, the number of successful occurrences for each side is divided by the overall count individually to calculate the range probabilities.
Note: The calculations are performed independently for each directional range. A range is considered bearish if the previous breakout was through a sellside liquidity. Conversely, a range is considered bullish if the most recent breakout was through a buyside liquidity.
Example - BSL > 50%
-----
What's the sentiment Filter? What are the underlying calculations?
Sentiment filter aims to calculate the percentage level of bullish or bearish fluctuations within equally divided price sections, in the latest price range.
Calculations:
This filter calculates the current sentiment by identifying the highest swing high and the lowest swing low, then evenly dividing the distance between them into percentage amounts. If the price is above the 50% mark, it indicates bullishness, whereas if it's below 50%, it suggests bearishness.
Sentiment Bias Identification:
Bullish Bias: The current price is trading above the 50% daily range.
Bearish Bias: The current price is trading below the 50% daily range.
Example - Sentiment Enabled | Bullish degree above 50% | Bullish sentimental bias
>: Minimum required sentiment for entry | %: Current sentimental degree in a (Bullish/Bearish) sentimental bias
-----
What's the range length Filter? What are the underlying calculations?
The range length filter identifies the price distance between buyside and sellside liquidity levels in percentage terms. When enabled, the script only looks for entries when the minimum range length is met. This helps ensure that trades are taken in markets with sufficient price movement.
Calculations:
Range Length (%) = ( ( Buyside Level − Sellside Level ) / Current Price ) ×100
Range Bias Identification:
Bullish Bias: The current range price has broken above the previous external swing high.
Bearish Bias: The current range price has broken below the previous external swing low.
Example - Range length filter is enabled | Range must be above 5% | Price must be in a bearish range
>: Minimum required range length for entry | %: Current range length percentage in a (Bullish/Bearish) range
-----
What's the day filter Filter, what does it do?
The day filter allows users to customize the session time and choose the specific days they want to include in the strategy session. This helps traders tailor their strategies to particular trading sessions or days of the week when they believe the market conditions are more favorable for their trading style.
Customize Session Time:
Users can define the start and end times for the trading session.
This allows the strategy to only consider trades within the specified time window, focusing on periods of higher market activity or preferred trading hours.
Select Days:
Users can select which days of the week to include in the strategy.
This feature is useful for excluding days with historically lower volatility or unfavorable trading conditions (e.g., Mondays or Fridays).
Benefits:
Focus on Optimal Trading Periods:
By customizing session times and days, traders can focus on periods when the market is more likely to present profitable opportunities.
Avoid Unfavorable Conditions:
Excluding specific days or times can help avoid trading during periods of low liquidity or high unpredictability, such as major news events or holidays.
Increased Flexibility: The filter provides increased flexibility, allowing traders to adapt the strategy to their specific needs and preferences.
Example - Day filter | Session Filter
θ: Session time | Exchange time-zone
-----
What tables are available in this script?
Table Type:
- Summary: Provides a general overview, displaying key performance parameters such as Net Profit, Profit Factor, Max Drawdown, Average Trade, Closed Trades, Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR), MAR and more.
CAGR: It calculates the 'Compound Annual Growth Rate' first and last taken trades on your chart. The CAGR is a notional, annualized growth rate that assumes all profits are reinvested. It only takes into account the prices of the two end points — not drawdowns, so it does not calculate risk. It can be used as a yardstick to compare the performance of two strategies. Since it annualizes values, it requires a minimum 4H timeframe to display the CAGR value. annualizing returns over smaller periods of times doesn't produce very meaningful figures.
MAR: Measure of return adjusted for risk: CAGR divided by Max Drawdown. Indicates how comfortable the system might be to trade. Higher than 0.5 is ideal, 1.0 and above is very good, and anything above 3.0 should be considered suspicious and you need to make sure the total number of trades are high enough by running a Deep Backtest in strategy tester. (available for TradingView Premium users.)
Avg Trade: The sum of money gained or lost by the average trade generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the Net Profit by the overall number of closed trades. An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.
MaxDD: Displays the largest drawdown of losses, i.e., the maximum possible loss that the strategy could have incurred among all of the trades it has made. This value is calculated separately for every bar that the strategy spends with an open position.
Profit Factor: The amount of money a trading strategy made for every unit of money it lost (in the selected currency). This value is calculated by dividing gross profits by gross losses.
Avg RR: This is calculated by dividing the average winning trade by the average losing trade. This field is not a very meaningful value by itself because it does not take into account the ratio of the number of winning vs losing trades, and strategies can have different approaches to profitability. A strategy may trade at every possibility in order to capture many small profits, yet have an average losing trade greater than the average winning trade. The higher this value is, the better, but it should be considered together with the percentage of winning trades and the net profit.
Winrate: The percentage of winning trades generated by a strategy. Calculated by dividing the number of winning trades by the total number of closed trades generated by a strategy. Percent profitable is not a very reliable measure by itself. A strategy could have many small winning trades, making the percent profitable high with a small average winning trade, or a few big winning trades accounting for a low percent profitable and a big average winning trade. Most trend-following successful strategies have a percent profitability of 15-40% but are profitable due to risk management control.
BE Trades: Number of break-even trades, excluding commission/slippage.
Losing Trades: The total number of losing trades generated by the strategy.
Winning Trades: The total number of winning trades generated by the strategy.
Total Trades: Total number of taken traders visible your charts.
Net Profit: The overall profit or loss (in the selected currency) achieved by the trading strategy in the test period. The value is the sum of all values from the Profit column (on the List of Trades tab), taking into account the sign.
- Monthly: Displays performance data on a month-by-month basis, allowing users to analyze performance trends over each month.
- Weekly: Displays performance data on a week-by-week basis, helping users to understand weekly performance variations.
- OFF: Hides the performance table.
Labels:
- OFF: Hides labels in the performance table.
- PnL: Shows the profit and loss of each trade individually, providing detailed insights into the performance of each trade.
- Range: Shows the range length and Average Day Range (ADR), offering additional context about market conditions during each trade.
Profit Color:
- Allows users to set the color for representing profit in the performance table, helping to quickly distinguish profitable periods.
Loss Color:
- Allows users to set the color for representing loss in the performance table, helping to quickly identify loss-making periods.
These customizable tables provide traders with flexible and detailed performance analysis, aiding in better strategy evaluation and optimization.
-----
User-input styles and customizations:
To facilitate studying historical data, all conditions and rules can be applied to your charts. By plotting background colors on your charts, you'll be able to identify what worked and what didn't in certain market conditions.
Please note that all background colors in the style are disabled by default to enhance visualization.
-----
How to Use This Algobuilder to Create a Profitable Edge and System:
Choose Your Strategy mode:
- Decide whether you are creating an investing strategy or a trading strategy.
Select a Market:
- Choose a one-sided market such as stocks, indices, or cryptocurrencies.
Historical Data:
- Ensure the historical data covers at least 10 years of price action for robust backtesting.
Timeframe Selection:
- Choose the timeframe you are comfortable trading with. It is strongly recommended to use a timeframe above 15 minutes to minimize the impact of commissions on your profits.
Set Commission and Slippage:
- Properly set the commission and slippage in the strategy properties according to your broker or prop firm specifications.
Parameter Optimization:
- Use trial and error to test different parameters until you find the performance results you are looking for in the summary table or, preferably, through deep backtesting using the strategy tester.
Trade Count:
- Ensure the number of trades is 100 or more; the higher, the better for statistical significance.
Positive Average Trade:
- Make sure the average trade value is above zero.
(An important value since it must be large enough to cover the commission and slippage costs of trading the strategy and still bring a profit.)
Performance Metrics:
- Look for a high profit factor, MAR (Mar Ratio), CAGR (Compound Annual Growth Rate), and net profit with minimum drawdown. Ideally, aim for a drawdown under 20-30%, depending on your risk tolerance.
Refinement and Optimization:
- Try out different markets and timeframes.
- Continue working on refining your edge using the available filters and components to further optimize your strategy.
Automation:
- Once you’re confident in your strategy, you can use the automation section to connect the algorithm to your broker or prop firm.
- Trade a fully automated and backtested trading strategy, allowing for hands-free execution and management.
-----
What makes this strategy original?
1. Incorporating direct integration of probabilities into the strategy.
2. Leveraging market sentiment to construct a profitable approach.
3. Utilizing built-in market structure-based trailing stop-loss mechanisms across various timeframes.
4. Offering both investing and trading strategies, facilitating optimization from different perspectives.
5. Automation for efficient execution.
6. Providing a summary table for instant access to key parameters of the strategy.
-----
How to use automation?
For Traders:
1. Ensure the strategy parameters are properly set based on your optimized parameters.
2. Enter your PineConnector License ID in the designated field.
3. Specify the desired risk level.
4. Provide the Metatrader symbol.
5. Check for chart updates to ensure the automation table appears on the top right corner, displaying your License ID, risk, and symbol.
6. Set up an alert with the strategy selected as Condition and the Message as {{strategy.order.alert_message}}.
7. Activate the Webhook URL in the Notifications section, setting it as the official PineConnector webhook address.
8. Double-check all settings on PineConnector to ensure the connection is successful.
9. Create the alert for entry/exit automation.
For Investors:
1. Ensure the strategy parameters are properly set based on your optimized parameters.
2. Choose "Investing" in the user-input settings.
3. Create an alert with a specified name.
4. Customize the notifications tab to receive alerts via email.
5. Buying/selling alerts will be triggered instantly upon entry or exit order execution.
----
Strategy Properties
This script backtest is done on 4H COINBASE:BTCUSD , using the following backtesting properties:
Balance: $5000
Order Size: 10% of the equity
Risk % per trade: 1%
Commission: 0.04% (Default commission percentage according to TradingView competitions rules)
Slippage: 75 ticks
Pyramiding: 2
-----
Terms and Conditions | Disclaimer
Our charting tools are provided for informational and educational purposes only and should not be construed as financial, investment, or trading advice. They are not intended to forecast market movements or offer specific recommendations. Users should understand that past performance does not guarantee future results and should not base financial decisions solely on historical data.
Built-in components, features, and functionalities of our charting tools are the intellectual property of @Fractalyst Unauthorized use, reproduction, or distribution of these proprietary elements is prohibited.
By continuing to use our charting tools, the user acknowledges and accepts the Terms and Conditions outlined in this legal disclaimer and agrees to respect our intellectual property rights and comply with all applicable laws and regulations.
Supertrend Advance Pullback StrategyHandbook for the Supertrend Advance Strategy
1. Introduction
Purpose of the Handbook:
The main purpose of this handbook is to serve as a comprehensive guide for traders and investors who are looking to explore and harness the potential of the Supertrend Advance Strategy. In the rapidly changing financial market, having the right tools and strategies at one's disposal is crucial. Whether you're a beginner hoping to dive into the world of trading or a seasoned investor aiming to optimize and diversify your portfolio, this handbook offers the insights and methodologies you need. By the end of this guide, readers should have a clear understanding of how the Supertrend Advance Strategy works, its benefits, potential pitfalls, and practical application in various trading scenarios.
Overview of the Supertrend Advance Pullback Strategy:
At its core, the Supertrend Advance Strategy is an evolution of the popular Supertrend Indicator. Designed to generate buy and sell signals in trending markets, the Supertrend Indicator has been a favorite tool for many traders around the world. The Advance Strategy, however, builds upon this foundation by introducing enhanced mechanisms, filters, and methodologies to increase precision and reduce false signals.
1. Basic Concept:
The Supertrend Advance Strategy relies on a combination of price action and volatility to determine the potential trend direction. By assessing the average true range (ATR) in conjunction with specific price points, this strategy aims to highlight the potential starting and ending points of market trends.
2. Methodology:
Unlike the traditional Supertrend Indicator, which primarily focuses on closing prices and ATR, the Advance Strategy integrates other critical market variables, such as volume, momentum oscillators, and perhaps even fundamental data, to validate its signals. This multidimensional approach ensures that the generated signals are more reliable and are less prone to market noise.
3. Benefits:
One of the main benefits of the Supertrend Advance Strategy is its ability to filter out false breakouts and minor price fluctuations, which can often lead to premature exits or entries in the market. By waiting for a confluence of factors to align, traders using this advanced strategy can increase their chances of entering or exiting trades at optimal points.
4. Practical Applications:
The Supertrend Advance Strategy can be applied across various timeframes, from intraday trading to swing trading and even long-term investment scenarios. Furthermore, its flexible nature allows it to be tailored to different asset classes, be it stocks, commodities, forex, or cryptocurrencies.
In the subsequent sections of this handbook, we will delve deeper into the intricacies of this strategy, offering step-by-step guidelines on its application, case studies, and tips for maximizing its efficacy in the volatile world of trading.
As you journey through this handbook, we encourage you to approach the Supertrend Advance Strategy with an open mind, testing and tweaking it as per your personal trading style and risk appetite. The ultimate goal is not just to provide you with a new tool but to empower you with a holistic strategy that can enhance your trading endeavors.
2. Getting Started
Navigating the financial markets can be a daunting task without the right tools. This section is dedicated to helping you set up the Supertrend Advance Strategy on one of the most popular charting platforms, TradingView. By following the steps below, you'll be able to integrate this strategy into your charts and start leveraging its insights in no time.
Setting up on TradingView:
TradingView is a web-based platform that offers a wide range of charting tools, social networking, and market data. Before you can apply the Supertrend Advance Strategy, you'll first need a TradingView account. If you haven't set one up yet, here's how:
1. Account Creation:
• Visit TradingView's official website.
• Click on the "Join for free" or "Sign up" button.
• Follow the registration process, providing the necessary details and setting up your login credentials.
2. Navigating the Dashboard:
• Once logged in, you'll be taken to your dashboard. Here, you'll see a variety of tools, including watchlists, alerts, and the main charting window.
• To begin charting, type in the name or ticker of the asset you're interested in the search bar at the top.
3. Configuring Chart Settings:
• Before integrating the Supertrend Advance Strategy, familiarize yourself with the chart settings. This can be accessed by clicking the 'gear' icon on the top right of the chart window.
• Adjust the chart type, time intervals, and other display settings to your preference.
Integrating the Strategy into a Chart:
Now that you're set up on TradingView, it's time to integrate the Supertrend Advance Strategy.
1. Accessing the Pine Script Editor:
• Located at the top-center of your screen, you'll find the "Pine Editor" tab. Click on it.
• This is where custom strategies and indicators are scripted or imported.
2. Loading the Supertrend Advance Strategy Script:
• Depending on whether you have the script or need to find it, there are two paths:
• If you have the script: Copy the Supertrend Advance Strategy script, and then paste it into the Pine Editor.
• If searching for the script: Click on the “Indicators” icon (looks like a flame) at the top of your screen, and then type “Supertrend Advance Strategy” in the search bar. If available, it will show up in the list. Simply click to add it to your chart.
3. Applying the Strategy:
• After pasting or selecting the Supertrend Advance Strategy in the Pine Editor, click on the “Add to Chart” button located at the top of the editor. This will overlay the strategy onto your main chart window.
4. Configuring Strategy Settings:
• Once the strategy is on your chart, you'll notice a small settings ('gear') icon next to its name in the top-left of the chart window. Click on this to access settings.
• Here, you can adjust various parameters of the Supertrend Advance Strategy to better fit your trading style or the specific asset you're analyzing.
5. Interpreting Signals:
• With the strategy applied, you'll now see buy/sell signals represented on your chart. Take time to familiarize yourself with how these look and behave over various timeframes and market conditions.
3. Strategy Overview
What is the Supertrend Advance Strategy?
The Supertrend Advance Strategy is a refined version of the classic Supertrend Indicator, which was developed to aid traders in spotting market trends. The strategy utilizes a combination of data points, including average true range (ATR) and price momentum, to generate buy and sell signals.
In essence, the Supertrend Advance Strategy can be visualized as a line that moves with the price. When the price is above the Supertrend line, it indicates an uptrend and suggests a potential buy position. Conversely, when the price is below the Supertrend line, it hints at a downtrend, suggesting a potential selling point.
Strategy Goals and Objectives:
1. Trend Identification: At the core of the Supertrend Advance Strategy is the goal to efficiently and consistently identify prevailing market trends. By recognizing these trends, traders can position themselves to capitalize on price movements in their favor.
2. Reducing Noise: Financial markets are often inundated with 'noise' - short-term price fluctuations that can mislead traders. The Supertrend Advance Strategy aims to filter out this noise, allowing for clearer decision-making.
3. Enhancing Risk Management: With clear buy and sell signals, traders can set more precise stop-loss and take-profit points. This leads to better risk management and potentially improved profitability.
4. Versatility: While primarily used for trend identification, the strategy can be integrated with other technical tools and indicators to create a comprehensive trading system.
Type of Assets/Markets to Apply the Strategy:
1. Equities: The Supertrend Advance Strategy is highly popular among stock traders. Its ability to capture long-term trends makes it particularly useful for those trading individual stocks or equity indices.
2. Forex: Given the 24-hour nature of the Forex market and its propensity for trends, the Supertrend Advance Strategy is a valuable tool for currency traders.
3. Commodities: Whether it's gold, oil, or agricultural products, commodities often move in extended trends. The strategy can help in identifying and capitalizing on these movements.
4. Cryptocurrencies: The volatile nature of cryptocurrencies means they can have pronounced trends. The Supertrend Advance Strategy can aid crypto traders in navigating these often tumultuous waters.
5. Futures & Options: Traders and investors in derivative markets can utilize the strategy to make more informed decisions about contract entries and exits.
It's important to note that while the Supertrend Advance Strategy can be applied across various assets and markets, its effectiveness might vary based on market conditions, timeframe, and the specific characteristics of the asset in question. As always, it's recommended to use the strategy in conjunction with other analytical tools and to backtest its effectiveness in specific scenarios before committing to trades.
4. Input Settings
Understanding and correctly configuring input settings is crucial for optimizing the Supertrend Advance Strategy for any specific market or asset. These settings, when tweaked correctly, can drastically impact the strategy's performance.
Grouping Inputs:
Before diving into individual input settings, it's important to group similar inputs. Grouping can simplify the user interface, making it easier to adjust settings related to a specific function or indicator.
Strategy Choice:
This input allows traders to select from various strategies that incorporate the Supertrend indicator. Options might include "Supertrend with RSI," "Supertrend with MACD," etc. By choosing a strategy, the associated input settings for that strategy become available.
Supertrend Settings:
1. Multiplier: Typically, a default value of 3 is used. This multiplier is used in the ATR calculation. Increasing it makes the Supertrend line further from prices, while decreasing it brings the line closer.
2. Period: The number of bars used in the ATR calculation. A common default is 7.
EMA Settings (Exponential Moving Average):
1. Period: Defines the number of previous bars used to calculate the EMA. Common periods are 9, 21, 50, and 200.
2. Source: Allows traders to choose which price (Open, Close, High, Low) to use in the EMA calculation.
RSI Settings (Relative Strength Index):
1. Length: Determines how many periods are used for RSI calculation. The standard setting is 14.
2. Overbought Level: The threshold at which the asset is considered overbought, typically set at 70.
3. Oversold Level: The threshold at which the asset is considered oversold, often at 30.
MACD Settings (Moving Average Convergence Divergence):
1. Short Period: The shorter EMA, usually set to 12.
2. Long Period: The longer EMA, commonly set to 26.
3. Signal Period: Defines the EMA of the MACD line, typically set at 9.
CCI Settings (Commodity Channel Index):
1. Period: The number of bars used in the CCI calculation, often set to 20.
2. Overbought Level: Typically set at +100, denoting overbought conditions.
3. Oversold Level: Usually set at -100, indicating oversold conditions.
SL/TP Settings (Stop Loss/Take Profit):
1. SL Multiplier: Defines the multiplier for the average true range (ATR) to set the stop loss.
2. TP Multiplier: Defines the multiplier for the average true range (ATR) to set the take profit.
Filtering Conditions:
This section allows traders to set conditions to filter out certain signals. For example, one might only want to take buy signals when the RSI is below 30, ensuring they buy during oversold conditions.
Trade Direction and Backtest Period:
1. Trade Direction: Allows traders to specify whether they want to take long trades, short trades, or both.
2. Backtest Period: Specifies the time range for backtesting the strategy. Traders can choose from options like 'Last 6 months,' 'Last 1 year,' etc.
It's essential to remember that while default settings are provided for many of these tools, optimal settings can vary based on the market, timeframe, and trading style. Always backtest new settings on historical data to gauge their potential efficacy.
5. Understanding Strategy Conditions
Developing an understanding of the conditions set within a trading strategy is essential for traders to maximize its potential. Here, we delve deep into the logic behind these conditions, using the Supertrend Advance Strategy as our focal point.
Basic Logic Behind Conditions:
Every strategy is built around a set of conditions that provide buy or sell signals. The conditions are based on mathematical or statistical methods and are rooted in the study of historical price data. The fundamental idea is to recognize patterns or behaviors that have been profitable in the past and might be profitable in the future.
Buy and Sell Conditions:
1. Buy Conditions: Usually formulated around bullish signals or indicators suggesting upward price momentum.
2. Sell Conditions: Centered on bearish signals or indicators indicating downward price momentum.
Simple Strategy:
The simple strategy could involve using just the Supertrend indicator. Here:
• Buy: When price closes above the Supertrend line.
• Sell: When price closes below the Supertrend line.
Pullback Strategy:
This strategy capitalizes on price retracements:
• Buy: When the price retraces to the Supertrend line after a bullish signal and is supported by another bullish indicator.
• Sell: When the price retraces to the Supertrend line after a bearish signal and is confirmed by another bearish indicator.
Indicators Used:
EMA (Exponential Moving Average):
• Logic: EMA gives more weight to recent prices, making it more responsive to current price movements. A shorter-period EMA crossing above a longer-period EMA can be a bullish sign, while the opposite is bearish.
RSI (Relative Strength Index):
• Logic: RSI measures the magnitude of recent price changes to analyze overbought or oversold conditions. Values above 70 are typically considered overbought, and values below 30 are considered oversold.
MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence):
• Logic: MACD assesses the relationship between two EMAs of a security’s price. The MACD line crossing above the signal line can be a bullish signal, while crossing below can be bearish.
CCI (Commodity Channel Index):
• Logic: CCI compares a security's average price change with its average price variation. A CCI value above +100 may mean the price is overbought, while below -100 might signify an oversold condition.
And others...
As the strategy expands or contracts, more indicators might be added or removed. The crucial point is to understand the core logic behind each, ensuring they align with the strategy's objectives.
Logic Behind Each Indicator:
1. EMA: Emphasizes recent price movements; provides dynamic support and resistance levels.
2. RSI: Indicates overbought and oversold conditions based on recent price changes.
3. MACD: Showcases momentum and direction of a trend by comparing two EMAs.
4. CCI: Measures the difference between a security's price change and its average price change.
Understanding strategy conditions is not just about knowing when to buy or sell but also about comprehending the underlying market dynamics that those conditions represent. As you familiarize yourself with each condition and indicator, you'll be better prepared to adapt and evolve with the ever-changing financial markets.
6. Trade Execution and Management
Trade execution and management are crucial aspects of any trading strategy. Efficient execution can significantly impact profitability, while effective management can preserve capital during adverse market conditions. In this section, we'll explore the nuances of position entry, exit strategies, and various Stop Loss (SL) and Take Profit (TP) methodologies within the Supertrend Advance Strategy.
Position Entry:
Effective trade entry revolves around:
1. Timing: Enter at a point where the risk-reward ratio is favorable. This often corresponds to confirmatory signals from multiple indicators.
2. Volume Analysis: Ensure there's adequate volume to support the movement. Volume can validate the strength of a signal.
3. Confirmation: Use multiple indicators or chart patterns to confirm the entry point. For instance, a buy signal from the Supertrend indicator can be confirmed with a bullish MACD crossover.
Position Exit Strategies:
A successful exit strategy will lock in profits and minimize losses. Here are some strategies:
1. Fixed Time Exit: Exiting after a predetermined period.
2. Percentage-based Profit Target: Exiting after a certain percentage gain.
3. Indicator-based Exit: Exiting when an indicator gives an opposing signal.
Percentage-based SL/TP:
• Stop Loss (SL): Set a fixed percentage below the entry price to limit potential losses.
• Example: A 2% SL on an entry at $100 would trigger a sell at $98.
• Take Profit (TP): Set a fixed percentage above the entry price to lock in gains.
• Example: A 5% TP on an entry at $100 would trigger a sell at $105.
Supertrend-based SL/TP:
• Stop Loss (SL): Position the SL at the Supertrend line. If the price breaches this line, it could indicate a trend reversal.
• Take Profit (TP): One could set the TP at a point where the Supertrend line flattens or turns, indicating a possible slowdown in momentum.
Swing high/low-based SL/TP:
• Stop Loss (SL): For a long position, set the SL just below the recent swing low. For a short position, set it just above the recent swing high.
• Take Profit (TP): For a long position, set the TP near a recent swing high or resistance. For a short position, near a swing low or support.
And other methods...
1. Trailing Stop Loss: This dynamic SL adjusts with the price movement, locking in profits as the trade moves in your favor.
2. Multiple Take Profits: Divide the position into segments and set multiple TP levels, securing profits in stages.
3. Opposite Signal Exit: Exit when another reliable indicator gives an opposite signal.
Trade execution and management are as much an art as they are a science. They require a blend of analytical skill, discipline, and intuition. Regularly reviewing and refining your strategies, especially in light of changing market conditions, is crucial to maintaining consistent trading performance.
7. Visual Representations
Visual tools are essential for traders, as they simplify complex data into an easily interpretable format. Properly analyzing and understanding the plots on a chart can provide actionable insights and a more intuitive grasp of market conditions. In this section, we’ll delve into various visual representations used in the Supertrend Advance Strategy and their significance.
Understanding Plots on the Chart:
Charts are the primary visual aids for traders. The arrangement of data points, lines, and colors on them tell a story about the market's past, present, and potential future moves.
1. Data Points: These represent individual price actions over a specific timeframe. For instance, a daily chart will have data points showing the opening, closing, high, and low prices for each day.
2. Colors: Used to indicate the nature of price movement. Commonly, green is used for bullish (upward) moves and red for bearish (downward) moves.
Trend Lines:
Trend lines are straight lines drawn on a chart that connect a series of price points. Their significance:
1. Uptrend Line: Drawn along the lows, representing support. A break below might indicate a trend reversal.
2. Downtrend Line: Drawn along the highs, indicating resistance. A break above might suggest the start of a bullish trend.
Filled Areas:
These represent a range between two values on a chart, usually shaded or colored. For instance:
1. Bollinger Bands: The area between the upper and lower band is filled, giving a visual representation of volatility.
2. Volume Profile: Can show a filled area representing the amount of trading activity at different price levels.
Stop Loss and Take Profit Lines:
These are horizontal lines representing pre-determined exit points for trades.
1. Stop Loss Line: Indicates the level at which a trade will be automatically closed to limit losses. Positioned according to the trader's risk tolerance.
2. Take Profit Line: Denotes the target level to lock in profits. Set according to potential resistance (for long trades) or support (for short trades) or other technical factors.
Trailing Stop Lines:
A trailing stop is a dynamic form of stop loss that moves with the price. On a chart:
1. For Long Trades: Starts below the entry price and moves up with the price but remains static if the price falls, ensuring profits are locked in.
2. For Short Trades: Starts above the entry price and moves down with the price but remains static if the price rises.
Visual representations offer traders a clear, organized view of market dynamics. Familiarity with these tools ensures that traders can quickly and accurately interpret chart data, leading to more informed decision-making. Always ensure that the visual aids used resonate with your trading style and strategy for the best results.
8. Backtesting
Backtesting is a fundamental process in strategy development, enabling traders to evaluate the efficacy of their strategy using historical data. It provides a snapshot of how the strategy would have performed in past market conditions, offering insights into its potential strengths and vulnerabilities. In this section, we'll explore the intricacies of setting up and analyzing backtest results and the caveats one must be aware of.
Setting Up Backtest Period:
1. Duration: Determine the timeframe for the backtest. It should be long enough to capture various market conditions (bullish, bearish, sideways). For instance, if you're testing a daily strategy, consider a period of several years.
2. Data Quality: Ensure the data source is reliable, offering high-resolution and clean data. This is vital to get accurate backtest results.
3. Segmentation: Instead of a continuous period, sometimes it's helpful to backtest over distinct market phases, like a particular bear or bull market, to see how the strategy holds up in different environments.
Analyzing Backtest Results:
1. Performance Metrics: Examine metrics like the total return, annualized return, maximum drawdown, Sharpe ratio, and others to gauge the strategy's efficiency.
2. Win Rate: It's the ratio of winning trades to total trades. A high win rate doesn't always signify a good strategy; it should be evaluated in conjunction with other metrics.
3. Risk/Reward: Understand the average profit versus the average loss per trade. A strategy might have a low win rate but still be profitable if the average gain far exceeds the average loss.
4. Drawdown Analysis: Review the periods of losses the strategy could incur and how long it takes, on average, to recover.
9. Tips and Best Practices
Successful trading requires more than just knowing how a strategy works. It necessitates an understanding of when to apply it, how to adjust it to varying market conditions, and the wisdom to recognize and avoid common pitfalls. This section offers insightful tips and best practices to enhance the application of the Supertrend Advance Strategy.
When to Use the Strategy:
1. Market Conditions: Ideally, employ the Supertrend Advance Strategy during trending market conditions. This strategy thrives when there are clear upward or downward trends. It might be less effective during consolidative or sideways markets.
2. News Events: Be cautious around significant news events, as they can cause extreme volatility. It might be wise to avoid trading immediately before and after high-impact news.
3. Liquidity: Ensure you are trading in assets/markets with sufficient liquidity. High liquidity ensures that the price movements are more reflective of genuine market sentiment and not due to thin volume.
Adjusting Settings for Different Markets/Timeframes:
1. Markets: Each market (stocks, forex, commodities) has its own characteristics. It's essential to adjust the strategy's parameters to align with the market's volatility and liquidity.
2. Timeframes: Shorter timeframes (like 1-minute or 5-minute charts) tend to have more noise. You might need to adjust the settings to filter out false signals. Conversely, for longer timeframes (like daily or weekly charts), you might need to be more responsive to genuine trend changes.
3. Customization: Regularly review and tweak the strategy's settings. Periodic adjustments can ensure the strategy remains optimized for the current market conditions.
10. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
Given the complexities and nuances of the Supertrend Advance Strategy, it's only natural for traders, both new and seasoned, to have questions. This section addresses some of the most commonly asked questions regarding the strategy.
1. What exactly is the Supertrend Advance Strategy?
The Supertrend Advance Strategy is an evolved version of the traditional Supertrend indicator. It's designed to provide clearer buy and sell signals by incorporating additional indicators like EMA, RSI, MACD, CCI, etc. The strategy aims to capitalize on market trends while minimizing false signals.
2. Can I use the Supertrend Advance Strategy for all asset types?
Yes, the strategy can be applied to various asset types like stocks, forex, commodities, and cryptocurrencies. However, it's crucial to adjust the settings accordingly to suit the specific characteristics and volatility of each asset type.
3. Is this strategy suitable for day trading?
Absolutely! The Supertrend Advance Strategy can be adjusted to suit various timeframes, making it versatile for both day trading and long-term trading. Remember to fine-tune the settings to align with the timeframe you're trading on.
4. How do I deal with false signals?
No strategy is immune to false signals. However, by combining the Supertrend with other indicators and adhering to strict risk management protocols, you can minimize the impact of false signals. Always use stop-loss orders and consider filtering trades with additional confirmation signals.
5. Do I need any prior trading experience to use this strategy?
While the Supertrend Advance Strategy is designed to be user-friendly, having a foundational understanding of trading and market analysis can greatly enhance your ability to employ the strategy effectively. If you're a beginner, consider pairing the strategy with further education and practice on demo accounts.
6. How often should I review and adjust the strategy settings?
There's no one-size-fits-all answer. Some traders adjust settings weekly, while others might do it monthly. The key is to remain responsive to changing market conditions. Regular backtesting can give insights into potential required adjustments.
7. Can the Supertrend Advance Strategy be automated?
Yes, many traders use algorithmic trading platforms to automate their strategies, including the Supertrend Advance Strategy. However, always monitor automated systems regularly to ensure they're operating as intended.
8. Are there any markets or conditions where the strategy shouldn't be used?
The strategy might generate more false signals in markets that are consolidative or range-bound. During significant news events or times of unexpected high volatility, it's advisable to tread with caution or stay out of the market.
9. How important is backtesting with this strategy?
Backtesting is crucial as it allows traders to understand how the strategy would have performed in the past, offering insights into potential profitability and areas of improvement. Always backtest any new setting or tweak before applying it to live trades.
10. What if the strategy isn't working for me?
No strategy guarantees consistent profits. If it's not working for you, consider reviewing your settings, seeking expert advice, or complementing the Supertrend Advance Strategy with other analysis methods. Remember, continuous learning and adaptation are the keys to trading success.
Other comments
Value of combining several indicators in this script and how they work together
Diversification of Signals: Just as diversifying an investment portfolio can reduce risk, using multiple indicators can offer varied perspectives on potential price movements. Each indicator can capture a different facet of the market, ensuring that traders are not overly reliant on a single data point.
Confirmation & Reduced False Signals: A common challenge with many indicators is the potential for false signals. By requiring confirmation from multiple indicators before acting, the chances of acting on a false signal can be significantly reduced.
Flexibility Across Market Conditions: Different indicators might perform better under different market conditions. For example, while moving averages might excel in trending markets, oscillators like RSI might be more useful during sideways or range-bound conditions. A mashup strategy can potentially adapt better to varying market scenarios.
Comprehensive Analysis: With multiple indicators, traders can gauge trend strength, momentum, volatility, and potential market reversals all at once, providing a holistic view of the market.
How do the different indicators in the Supertrend Advance Strategy work together?
Supertrend: This is primarily a trend-following indicator. It provides traders with buy and sell signals based on the volatility of the price. When combined with other indicators, it can filter out noise and give more weight to strong, confirmed trends.
EMA (Exponential Moving Average): EMA gives more weight to recent price data. It can be used to identify the direction and strength of a trend. When the price is above the EMA, it's generally considered bullish, and vice versa.
RSI (Relative Strength Index): An oscillator that measures the magnitude of recent price changes to evaluate overbought or oversold conditions. By cross-referencing with other indicators like EMA or MACD, traders can spot potential reversals or confirmations of a trend.
MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence): This indicator identifies changes in the strength, direction, momentum, and duration of a trend in a stock's price. When the MACD line crosses above the signal line, it can be a bullish sign, and when it crosses below, it can be bearish. Pairing MACD with Supertrend can provide dual confirmation of a trend.
CCI (Commodity Channel Index): Initially developed for commodities, CCI can indicate overbought or oversold conditions. It can be used in conjunction with other indicators to determine entry and exit points.
In essence, the synergy of these indicators provides a balanced, comprehensive approach to trading. Each indicator offers its unique lens into market conditions, and when they align, it can be a powerful indication of a trading opportunity. This combination not only reduces the potential drawbacks of each individual indicator but leverages their strengths, aiming for more consistent and informed trading decisions.
Backtesting and Default Settings
• This indicator has been optimized to be applied for 1 hour-charts. However, the underlying principles of this strategy are supply and demand in the financial markets and the strategy can be applied to all timeframes. Daytraders can use the 1min- or 5min charts, swing-traders can use the daily charts.
• This strategy has been designed to identify the most promising, highest probability entries and trades for each stock or other financial security.
• The combination of the qualifiers results in a highly selective strategy which only considers the most promising swing-trading entries. As a result, you will normally only find a low number of trades for each stock or other financial security per year in case you apply this strategy for the daily charts. Shorter timeframes will result in a higher number of trades / year.
• Consequently, traders need to apply this strategy for a full watchlist rather than just one financial security.
• Default properties: RSI on (length 14, RSI buy level 50, sell level 50), EMA, RSI, MACD on, type of strategy pullback, SL/TP type: ATR (length 10, factor 3), trade direction both, quantity 5, take profit swing hl 5.1, highest / lowest lookback 2, enable ATR trail (ATR length 10, SL ATR multiplier 1.4, TP multiplier 2.1, lookback = 4, trade direction = both).
Liquidity Trading Algorithm (LTA)
The Liquidity Trading Algorithm is an algorithm designed to provide trade signals based on
liquidity conditions in the market. The underlying algorithm is based on the Liquidity
Dependent Price Movement (LDPM) metric and the Liquidity Dependent Price Stability (LDPS)
algorithm.
Together, LDPM and LDPS demonstrate statistically significant forecasting capabilities for price-
action on equities, cryptocurrencies, and futures. LTA takes these liquidity measurements and
translates them into actionable insights by way of entering or exiting a position based
on the future outlooks, as measured by the current liquidity status.
The benefit of LTA is that it can incorporate these powerful liquidity measurements into
actionable insights with several features designed to help you tailor LTA's behavior and
measurements to your desired vantage point. These customizable features come by the way of determining LTA's assessment style, and additional monitoring systems for avoiding bear and bull traps, along with various other quality of life features, discussed in more detail below.
First, a few quick facts:
- LTA is compatible on a wide array of instruments, including Equities, Futures, Cryptocurrencies, and Forex.
- LTA is compatible on most intervals in so long as the data can be calculated appropriately,
(be sure to do a backtest on timescales less than 1-minue to ensure the data can be computed).
- LTA only measures liquidity at the end of the interval of the chart chosen, and does not respond to conditions during the candle interval, unless specified (such as with `Stops`).
- LTA is interval-dependent, this means it will measure and behave differently on different
intervals as the underlying algorithms are dependent on the interval chosen.
- LTA can utilize fractional share sizing for cryptocurrencies.
- LTA can be restricted to either bullish or bearish indications.
- Additional Monitoring Systems are available for additional risk mitigation.
In short, LTA is a widely applicable, unique algorithm designed to translate liquidity measurements into liquidity insights.
Before getting more into the details, here is a quick list of the main features and settings
available for customization:
- Backtesting Start Date: Manual selection of the start date for the algorithm during backtesting.
- Assessment Style: adjust how LDPM and LDPS measure and respond to changes in liquidity.
- Impose Wait: force LTA to wait before entering or exiting a position to ensure conditions have remained conducive.
- Trade Direction Allowance: Restrict LTA to only long or only short, if desired.
- Position Sizing Method: determine how LTA calculates position sizing.
- Fractional Share Sizing: allow LTA to calculate fractional share sizes for cryptocurrencies
- Max Size Limit: Impose a maximum size on LTA's positions.
- Initial Capital: Indicate how much capital LTA should stat with.
- Portfolio Allotment: Indicate to LTA how much (in percentages) of the available balance should be considered when calculating position size.
- Enact Additional Monitoring Systems: Indicate if LTA should impose additional safety criteria when monitoring liquidity.
- Configure Take Profit, Stop-Loss, Trailing Stop Loss
- Display Information tables on the current position, overall strategy performance, along
with a text output showing LTA's processes.
- Real-time text output and updates on LTA's inner workings.
Let's get into some more of the details.
LTA's Assessment Style
LTA's assessment style determines how LTA collects and responds to changing data. In traditional terms, this is akin to (but not quite exactly the same as) the sensitivity versus specificity spectrum, whereby on one end (the sensitive end), an algorithm responds to changes in data in a reactive manner (which tends to lower its specificity, or how often it is correct in its indications), and on the other end, the opposite one, the algorithm foresakes quick changes for longevity of outlook.
While this is in part true, it is not a full view of the underlying mechanisms that changing the assessment style augments. A better analogy would be that the sensitive end of the spectrum (`Aggressive`) is in a state such that the algorithm wants to changing its outlooks, and as such, with changes in data, the algorithm has to be convinced as to why that is not a good idea to change outlooks, whereas the the more specific states (`Conservative`, `Diamond`) must be convinced that their view is no longer valid and that it needs to be changed.
This means the `Aggressive` and the `Diamond` settings fundamentally differ not just in their
data collection, but also in the data processing such that the `Aggressive` decision tree has to
be convinced that the data is the same (as its defualt is that it has changed),
and the `Diamond` decision tree has to be convinced that the data is not the same, and as such, the outlook need changed.
From there, the algorithm cooks through the data and determines to what the outlook should be changed to, given the current state of liquidity.
`Balanced` lies in the middle of this balance, attempting to balance being open to new ideas while not removing the wisdom of the past, as it were.
On a scale of most `sensitive` to most `specific`, it is as follows: `Aggressive`, `Balanced`,
`Conservative`, `Diamond`.
Functionally, these different modes can help in different liquidity environments, as certain
environments are more conducive to an eager approach (such as found near `Aggressive`) or are more conducive to a more conservative approach, where sudden changes in liquidity are known to be short-lived and unremarkable (such as many previously identified bull or bear traps).
For instance, on low interval views, it can often-times be beneficial to keep the algorithm towards the `Sensitive` end, since on the lower-timeframes, the crosswinds can change quite dramatically; whereas on the longer intervals, it may be useful to maintain a more `Specific` algorithm (such as found near `Diamond` mode) setting since longer intervals typically lend themselves to longer time-horizons, which themselves typically lend themselves to "weathering the storm", as it were.
LTA's Assessment Style is also supported by the Additional Monitoring Systems which works
to add sensitivity without sacrificing specificity by enacting a separate monitoring system, as described below.
Additional Monitoring Systems
The Additional Monitoring System (AMS) attempts to add more context to any changes in liquidity conditions as measured, such that LTA as a whole will have an expanded view into any rapidly changing liquidity conditions before these changes manifest in the traditional data streams. The ideal is that this allows for early exits or early entrances to positions "a head of time".
The traditional use of this system is to indicate when liquidity is suggestive of the end of a particular run (be it a bear run or a bull run), so an early exit can be initiated (and thus,
downside averted) even before the data officially showcase such changes. In such cases (when AMS becomes activated), the algorithm will signal to exit any open positions, and will restrict the opening of any new positions.
When a position is exited because of AMS, it is denoted as an `Early Exit` and if a position is prevented from being entered, the text output will display `AM prevented entry...` to indicate that conditions are not meeting AMS' additional standards.
The algorithm will wait to make any actions while `AMS` is `active` and will only enter into a new position once `AMS` has been `deactivated` and overall liquidity conditions are appropriate.
Functionally, the benefits of AMS translate to:
- Toggeling AMS on will typically see a net reduction in overall profitability, but
- AMS will typically (almost always) reduce max drawdown,
an increases in max runup, and increase return-over-maxdrawdown, and
- AMS can provide benefit for equities that experience a lot of "traps" by navigating early
entrance and early exits.
So in short, AMS is way of adding an additional level of liquidity monitoring that attempts to
exit positions if conditions look to be deteriorating, and to enter conditions if they look to be
improving. The cost of this additional monitoring, however, is a greater number of trades indicated, and a lower overall profitability.
Impose Wait
Note: `Impose Wait` will not force Take Profit, Stop Loss, or Trailing Stop Loss to
wait.
LTA can be indicated to `wait` before entering or exiting a position if desired. This means that if conditions change, whereas without a `wait` imposed, the algorithm would immediately indicate this change via a signal to alter the strategy's position, with a `wait` imposed, the algorithm will `wait` the indicated number of bars, and then re-check conditions before proceeding.
If, while waiting, conditions change to a state that is no longer compatible with the "order-in-
waiting", then the order-in-waiting is removed, and the counts reset (i.e.: conditions must remain favorable to the intended positional change throughout the wait period).
Since LTA works at the end-of-intervals, there is an inherently "built-in" wait of 1 bar when
switching directly from long to short (i.e.: if a full switch is indicated, then it is indicated as
conditions change -> exit new position -> wait until -> check conditions ->
enter new position as indicated). Thus, to impose a wait of `1 bar` would be to effectively have a total of two candles' ends prior to the entrance of the new position).
There are two main styles of `Impose Wait` that you can utilize:
- `Wait` : this mode will cause LTA to `wait` when both entering and exiting a position (in so long as it is not an exit signaled via a Take Profit, Stop Loss or Trailing Stop Loss).
- `Exit-Wait` : This mode will >not< cause LTA to `wait` if conditions require the closing of a position, but will force LTA to wait before entering into a position.
Position:
In addition to the availability to restrict LTA to either a long-only or short-only strategy, LTA
also comprises additional flexibility when deciding on how it should navigate the markets with
regards to sizing. Notably, this flexibility benefits several aspects of LTA's existence, namely the ability to determine the `Sizing Method`, or if `Fractional Share Sizing` should be employed, and more, as discussed below.
Position Sizing Method
There are two main ways LTA can determine the size of a position. Either via the `Fixed-Share` choice, or the `Fixed-Percentage` choice.
- `Fixed-Share` will use the amount indicated in the `Max Sizing Limit` field as the position size, always.
Note: With `Fixed-Share` sizing, LTA will >not< check if the balance is sufficient
prior to signaling an entrance.
- `Fixed-Percentage` will use the percentage amount indicated in the `Portfolio Allotment` field as the percentage of available funds to use when calculating the position size. Additionally, with the `Fixed-Percentage` choice, you can set the `Max Sizing Limit` if desired, which will ensure that no position will be entered greater than the amount indicated in the field.
Fractional Share Sizing
If the underlying instrument supports it (typically only cryptocurrencies), share sizing can be
fractionalized. If this is done, the resulting positin size is rounded to `4 digits`. This means any
position with a size less than `0.00005` will be rounded to `0.0000`
Note: Ensure that the underlying instrument supports fractional share sizing prior
to initiating.
Max Sizing Limit
As discussed above, the `Max Sizing Limit` will determine:
- The position size for every position, if `Sizing Method : Fixed-Share` is utilized, or
- The maximum allowed size, regardless of available capital, if `Sizing Method : Fixed-Percentage` is utilized.
Note: There is an internal maximum of 100,000 units.
Initial Capital
Note: There are 2 `Initial Capital` settings; one in LTA's settings and one in the
`Properties` tab. Ensure these two are the same when doing backtesting.
The initial capital field will be used to determine the starting balanace of the strategy, and
is used to calculate the internal data reporting (the data tables).
Portfolio Allotment
You can specify how much of the total available balance should be used when calculating the share size. The default is 100%.
Stops
Note: Stops over-ride `AMS` and `Impose Wait`, and are not restricted to only the
end-of-candle and will occur instantaneously upon their activation. Neither `AMS` nor `Impose Wait` can over-ride a signal from a `Take-Profit`, `Stop-Loss`, or a `Trailing-Stop Loss`.
LTA enhouses three stops that can be configured, a `Take-Profit`, a `Stop-Loss` and a `Trailing-Stop Loss`. The configurations can be set in the settings in percent terms. These exit signals will always over-ride AMS or any other restrictions on position exit.
Their configuration is rather standard; set the percentages you want the signal to be sent at and so it will be done.
Some quick notes on the `Trailing-Stop Loss`:
- The activation percentage must be reached (in profits) prior to the `Traililng-Stop Loss`
from activating the downside protection. For example, if the `Activation Percentage` is 10%, then unless the position reaches (at any point) a 10% profit, then it will not signal any exits on the downside, should it occur.
- The downside price-point is continuously updated and is calculated from the maximum profit reached in the given position and the loss percentage placed in the appropriate field.
Data Tables and Data Output
LTA provides real-time data output through a variety of mechanisms:
- `Position Table`
The `Position Table` displays information about the current position, including:
> Position Duration : how long the position has been open for.
> Indicates if the side is Long or Short, depending on if it is long or short.
> Entry Price: the price the position was entered at.
> Current Price (% Dif): the current price of the underlying and the %-difference between the entry price and the current price.
> Max Profit ($/%): the maximum profit reached in $ and % terms.
> Current PnL ($/%) : the current PnL for the open position.
- `Performance Table`
The `Performance Table` displays information regarding the overall performance of the algorithm since its `Start Date`. These data include:
> Initial Equity ($): The initial equity the algorithm started with.
> Current Equity ($): The current total equity of the account (including open positions)
> Net Profits ($|%) : The overall net profit in $ and % terms.
> Long / Short Trade Counts: The respective trade counts for the positions entered.
> Total Closed Trades: The running sum of the number of trades closed.
> Profitability: The calculation of the number of profitable trades over the total number of
trades.
> Avg. Profit / Trade: The calculation of the average profit per trade in both $ and % terms.
> Avg. Loss / Trade: The calculation of the average loss per trade in both $ and % terms.
> Max Run-Up: The maximum run-up the algorithm has seen in both $ and % terms.
> Max Drawdown: The maximum draw-down the algorithm has seen in both $ and % terms.
> Return-Over-Max-Drawdown: the ratio of the maximum drawdown against the current net profits.
- `Text Output`
LTA will output, if desired, signals to the text output field every time it analysis or performs and action. These messages can include information such as:
"
08:00:00 >> AM Protocol activated ... exiting position ...
08:00:00 >> Exit Order Created for qty: 2, profit: 380 (4.34%)
...
09:30:00 >> Checking conditions ...
09:30:00 >> AM protocol prevented entry ... waiting ...
"
This way, you can keep an eye out on what is happening "under the hood", as it were.
LTA will produce a message at the end of its assessment at the end of each candle interval, as well as when a position is exited due to a `Stop` or due to `AMS` being activated.
Additionally, the `Text Output` includes a initial message, but for space-constraints, this
can be toggled off with the `Blank Text Output` option within LTA's configurations.
For additional information, please refer to the Author's Instructions below.
Dskyz (DAFE) Adaptive Regime - Quant Machine ProDskyz (DAFE) Adaptive Regime - Quant Machine Pro:
Buckle up for the Dskyz (DAFE) Adaptive Regime - Quant Machine Pro, is a strategy that’s your ultimate edge for conquering futures markets like ES, MES, NQ, and MNQ. This isn’t just another script—it’s a quant-grade powerhouse, crafted with precision to adapt to market regimes, deliver multi-factor signals, and protect your capital with futures-tuned risk management. With its shimmering DAFE visuals, dual dashboards, and glowing watermark, it turns your charts into a cyberpunk command center, making trading as thrilling as it is profitable.
Unlike generic scripts clogging up the space, the Adaptive Regime is a DAFE original, built from the ground up to tackle the chaos of futures trading. It identifies market regimes (Trending, Range, Volatile, Quiet) using ADX, Bollinger Bands, and HTF indicators, then fires trades based on a weighted scoring system that blends candlestick patterns, RSI, MACD, and more. Add in dynamic stops, trailing exits, and a 5% drawdown circuit breaker, and you’ve got a system that’s as safe as it is aggressive. Whether you’re a newbie or a prop desk pro, this strat’s your ticket to outsmarting the markets. Let’s break down every detail and see why it’s a must-have.
Why Traders Need This Strategy
Futures markets are a gauntlet—fast moves, volatility spikes (like the April 28, 2025 NQ 1k-point drop), and institutional traps that punish the unprepared. Meanwhile, platforms are flooded with low-effort scripts that recycle old ideas with zero innovation. The Adaptive Regime stands tall, offering:
Adaptive Intelligence: Detects market regimes (Trending, Range, Volatile, Quiet) to optimize signals, unlike one-size-fits-all scripts.
Multi-Factor Precision: Combines candlestick patterns, MA trends, RSI, MACD, volume, and HTF confirmation for high-probability trades.
Futures-Optimized Risk: Calculates position sizes based on $ risk (default: $300), with ATR or fixed stops/TPs tailored for ES/MES.
Bulletproof Safety: 5% daily drawdown circuit breaker and trailing stops keep your account intact, even in chaos.
DAFE Visual Mastery: Pulsing Bollinger Band fills, dynamic SL/TP lines, and dual dashboards (metrics + position) make signals crystal-clear and charts a work of art.
Original Craftsmanship: A DAFE creation, built with community passion, not a rehashed clone of generic code.
Traders need this because it’s a complete, adaptive system that blends quant smarts, user-friendly design, and DAFE flair. It’s your edge to trade with confidence, cut through market noise, and leave the copycats in the dust.
Strategy Components
1. Market Regime Detection
The strategy’s brain is its ability to classify market conditions into five regimes, ensuring signals match the environment.
How It Works:
Trending (Regime 1): ADX > 20, fast/slow EMA spread > 0.3x ATR, HTF RSI > 50 or MACD bullish (htf_trend_bull/bear).
Range (Regime 2): ADX < 25, price range < 3% of close, no HTF trend.
Volatile (Regime 3): BB width > 1.5x avg, ATR > 1.2x avg, HTF RSI overbought/oversold.
Quiet (Regime 4): BB width < 0.8x avg, ATR < 0.9x avg.
Other (Regime 5): Default for unclear conditions.
Indicators: ADX (14), BB width (20), ATR (14, 50-bar SMA), HTF RSI (14, daily default), HTF MACD (12,26,9).
Why It’s Brilliant:
Regime detection adapts signals to market context, boosting win rates in trending or volatile conditions.
HTF RSI/MACD add a big-picture filter, rare in basic scripts.
Visualized via gradient background (green for Trending, orange for Range, red for Volatile, gray for Quiet, navy for Other).
2. Multi-Factor Signal Scoring
Entries are driven by a weighted scoring system that combines candlestick patterns, trend, momentum, and volume for robust signals.
Candlestick Patterns:
Bullish: Engulfing (0.5), hammer (0.4 in Range, 0.2 else), morning star (0.2), piercing (0.2), double bottom (0.3 in Volatile, 0.15 else). Must be near support (low ≤ 1.01x 20-bar low) with volume spike (>1.5x 20-bar avg).
Bearish: Engulfing (0.5), shooting star (0.4 in Range, 0.2 else), evening star (0.2), dark cloud (0.2), double top (0.3 in Volatile, 0.15 else). Must be near resistance (high ≥ 0.99x 20-bar high) with volume spike.
Logic: Patterns are weighted higher in specific regimes (e.g., hammer in Range, double bottom in Volatile).
Additional Factors:
Trend: Fast EMA (20) > slow EMA (50) + 0.5x ATR (trend_bull, +0.2); opposite for trend_bear.
RSI: RSI (14) < 30 (rsi_bull, +0.15); > 70 (rsi_bear, +0.15).
MACD: MACD line > signal (12,26,9, macd_bull, +0.15); opposite for macd_bear.
Volume: ATR > 1.2x 50-bar avg (vol_expansion, +0.1).
HTF Confirmation: HTF RSI < 70 and MACD bullish (htf_bull_confirm, +0.2); RSI > 30 and MACD bearish (htf_bear_confirm, +0.2).
Scoring:
bull_score = sum of bullish factors; bear_score = sum of bearish. Entry requires score ≥ 1.0.
Example: Bullish engulfing (0.5) + trend_bull (0.2) + rsi_bull (0.15) + htf_bull_confirm (0.2) = 1.05, triggers long.
Why It’s Brilliant:
Multi-factor scoring ensures signals are confirmed by multiple market dynamics, reducing false positives.
Regime-specific weights make patterns more relevant (e.g., hammers shine in Range markets).
HTF confirmation aligns with the big picture, a quant edge over simplistic scripts.
3. Futures-Tuned Risk Management
The risk system is built for futures, calculating position sizes based on $ risk and offering flexible stops/TPs.
Position Sizing:
Logic: Risk per trade (default: $300) ÷ (stop distance in points * point value) = contracts, capped at max_contracts (default: 5). Point value = tick value (e.g., $12.5 for ES) * ticks per point (4) * contract multiplier (1 for ES, 0.1 for MES).
Example: $300 risk, 8-point stop, ES ($50/point) → 0.75 contracts, rounded to 1.
Impact: Precise sizing prevents over-leverage, critical for micro contracts like MES.
Stops and Take-Profits:
Fixed: Default stop = 8 points, TP = 16 points (2:1 reward/risk).
ATR-Based: Stop = 1.5x ATR (default), TP = 3x ATR, enabled via use_atr_for_stops.
Logic: Stops set at swing low/high ± stop distance; TPs at 2x stop distance from entry.
Impact: ATR stops adapt to volatility, while fixed stops suit stable markets.
Trailing Stops:
Logic: Activates at 50% of TP distance. Trails at close ± 1.5x ATR (atr_multiplier). Longs: max(trail_stop_long, close - ATR * 1.5); shorts: min(trail_stop_short, close + ATR * 1.5).
Impact: Locks in profits during trends, a game-changer in volatile sessions.
Circuit Breaker:
Logic: Pauses trading if daily drawdown > 5% (daily_drawdown = (max_equity - equity) / max_equity).
Impact: Protects capital during black swan events (e.g., April 27, 2025 ES slippage).
Why It’s Brilliant:
Futures-specific inputs (tick value, multiplier) make it plug-and-play for ES/MES.
Trailing stops and circuit breaker add pro-level safety, rare in off-the-shelf scripts.
Flexible stops (ATR or fixed) suit different trading styles.
4. Trade Entry and Exit Logic
Entries and exits are precise, driven by bull_score/bear_score and protected by drawdown checks.
Entry Conditions:
Long: bull_score ≥ 1.0, no position (position_size <= 0), drawdown < 5% (not pause_trading). Calculates contracts, sets stop at swing low - stop points, TP at 2x stop distance.
Short: bear_score ≥ 1.0, position_size >= 0, drawdown < 5%. Stop at swing high + stop points, TP at 2x stop distance.
Logic: Tracks entry_regime for PNL arrays. Closes opposite positions before entering.
Exit Conditions:
Stop-Loss/Take-Profit: Hits stop or TP (strategy.exit).
Trailing Stop: Activates at 50% TP, trails by ATR * 1.5.
Emergency Exit: Closes if price breaches stop (close < long_stop_price or close > short_stop_price).
Reset: Clears stop/TP prices when flat (position_size = 0).
Why It’s Brilliant:
Score-based entries ensure multi-factor confirmation, filtering out weak signals.
Trailing stops maximize profits in trends, unlike static exits in basic scripts.
Emergency exits add an extra safety layer, critical for futures volatility.
5. DAFE Visuals
The visuals are pure DAFE magic, blending function with cyberpunk flair to make signals intuitive and charts stunning.
Shimmering Bollinger Band Fill:
Display: BB basis (20, white), upper/lower (green/red, 45% transparent). Fill pulses (30–50 alpha) by regime, with glow (60–95 alpha) near bands (close ≥ 0.995x upper or ≤ 1.005x lower).
Purpose: Highlights volatility and key levels with a futuristic glow.
Visuals make complex regimes and signals instantly clear, even for newbies.
Pulsing effects and regime-specific colors add a DAFE signature, setting it apart from generic scripts.
BB glow emphasizes tradeable levels, enhancing decision-making.
Chart Background (Regime Heatmap):
Green — Trending Market: Strong, sustained price movement in one direction. The market is in a trend phase—momentum follows through.
Orange — Range-Bound: Market is consolidating or moving sideways, with no clear up/down trend. Great for mean reversion setups.
Red — Volatile Regime: High volatility, heightened risk, and larger/faster price swings—trade with caution.
Gray — Quiet/Low Volatility: Market is calm and inactive, with small moves—often poor conditions for most strategies.
Navy — Other/Neutral: Regime is uncertain or mixed; signals may be less reliable.
Bollinger Bands Glow (Dynamic Fill):
Neon Red Glow — Warning!: Price is near or breaking above the upper band; momentum is overstretched, watch for overbought conditions or reversals.
Bright Green Glow — Opportunity!: Price is near or breaking below the lower band; market could be oversold, prime for bounce or reversal.
Trend Green Fill — Trending Regime: Fills between bands with green when the market is trending, showing clear momentum.
Gold/Yellow Fill — Range Regime: Fills with gold/aqua in range conditions, showing the market is sideways/oscillating.
Magenta/Red Fill — Volatility Spike: Fills with vivid magenta/red during highly volatile regimes.
Blue Fill — Neutral/Quiet: A soft blue glow for other or uncertain market states.
Moving Averages:
Display: Blue fast EMA (20), red slow EMA (50), 2px.
Purpose: Shows trend direction, with trend_dir requiring ATR-scaled spread.
Dynamic SL/TP Lines:
Display: Pulsing colors (red SL, green TP for Trending; yellow/orange for Range, etc.), 3px, with pulse_alpha for shimmer.
Purpose: Tracks stops/TPs in real-time, color-coded by regime.
6. Dual Dashboards
Two dashboards deliver real-time insights, making the strat a quant command center.
Bottom-Left Metrics Dashboard (2x13):
Metrics: Mode (Active/Paused), trend (Bullish/Bearish/Neutral), ATR, ATR avg, volume spike (YES/NO), RSI (value + Oversold/Overbought/Neutral), HTF RSI, HTF trend, last signal (Buy/Sell/None), regime, bull score.
Display: Black (29% transparent), purple title, color-coded (green for bullish, red for bearish).
Purpose: Consolidates market context and signal strength.
Top-Right Position Dashboard (2x7):
Metrics: Regime, position side (Long/Short/None), position PNL ($), SL, TP, daily PNL ($).
Display: Black (29% transparent), purple title, color-coded (lime for Long, red for Short).
Purpose: Tracks live trades and profitability.
Why It’s Brilliant:
Dual dashboards cover market context and trade status, a rare feature.
Color-coding and concise metrics guide beginners (e.g., green “Buy” = go).
Real-time PNL and SL/TP visibility empower disciplined trading.
7. Performance Tracking
Logic: Arrays (regime_pnl_long/short, regime_win/loss_long/short) track PNL and win/loss by regime (1–5). Updated on trade close (barstate.isconfirmed).
Purpose: Prepares for future adaptive thresholds (e.g., adjust bull_score min based on regime performance).
Why It’s Brilliant: Lays the groundwork for self-optimizing logic, a quant edge over static scripts.
Key Features
Regime-Adaptive: Optimizes signals for Trending, Range, Volatile, Quiet markets.
Futures-Optimized: Precise sizing for ES/MES with tick-based risk inputs.
Multi-Factor Signals: Candlestick patterns, RSI, MACD, and HTF confirmation for robust entries.
Dynamic Exits: ATR/fixed stops, 2:1 TPs, and trailing stops maximize profits.
Safe and Smart: 5% drawdown breaker and emergency exits protect capital.
DAFE Visuals: Shimmering BB fill, pulsing SL/TP, and dual dashboards.
Backtest-Ready: Fixed qty and tick calc for accurate historical testing.
How to Use
Add to Chart: Load on a 5min ES/MES chart in TradingView.
Configure Inputs: Set instrument (ES/MES), tick value ($12.5/$1.25), multiplier (1/0.1), risk ($300 default). Enable ATR stops for volatility.
Monitor Dashboards: Bottom-left for regime/signals, top-right for position/PNL.
Backtest: Run in strategy tester to compare regimes.
Live Trade: Connect to Tradovate or similar. Watch for slippage (e.g., April 27, 2025 ES issues).
Replay Test: Try April 28, 2025 NQ drop to see regime shifts and stops.
Disclaimer
Trading futures involves significant risk of loss and is not suitable for all investors. Past performance does not guarantee future results. Backtest results may differ from live trading due to slippage, fees, or market conditions. Use this strategy at your own risk, and consult a financial advisor before trading. Dskyz (DAFE) Trading Systems is not responsible for any losses incurred.
Backtesting:
Frame: 2023-09-20 - 2025-04-29
Slippage: 3
Fee Typical Range (per side, per contract)
CME Exchange $1.14 – $1.20
Clearing $0.10 – $0.30
NFA Regulatory $0.02
Firm/Broker Commis. $0.25 – $0.80 (retail prop)
TOTAL $1.60 – $2.30 per side
Round Turn: (enter+exit) = $3.20 – $4.60 per contract
Final Notes
The Dskyz (DAFE) Adaptive Regime - Quant Machine Pro is more than a strategy—it’s a revolution. Crafted with DAFE’s signature precision, it rises above generic scripts with adaptive regimes, quant-grade signals, and visuals that make trading a thrill. Whether you’re scalping MES or swinging ES, this system empowers you to navigate markets with confidence and style. Join the DAFE crew, light up your charts, and let’s dominate the futures game!
(This publishing will most likely be taken down do to some miscellaneous rule about properly displaying charting symbols, or whatever. Once I've identified what part of the publishing they want to pick on, I'll adjust and repost.)
Use it with discipline. Use it with clarity. Trade smarter.
**I will continue to release incredible strategies and indicators until I turn this into a brand or until someone offers me a contract.
Created by Dskyz, powered by DAFE Trading Systems. Trade smart, trade bold.
Machine Learning: Donchian DCA Grid Strategy [YinYangAlgorithms]This strategy uses a Machine Learning approach on the Donchian Channels with a DCA and Grid purchase/sell Strategy. Not only that, but it uses a custom Bollinger calculation to determine its Basis which is used as a mild sell location. This strategy is a pure DCA strategy in the sense that no shorts are used and theoretically it can be used in webhooks on most exchanges as it’s only using Spot Orders. The idea behind this strategy is we utilize both the Highest Highs and Lowest Lows within a Machine Learning standpoint to create Buy and Sell zones. We then fraction these zones off into pieces to create Grids. This allows us to ‘micro’ purchase as it enters these zones and likewise ‘micro’ sell as it goes up into the upper (sell) zones.
You have the option to set how many grids are used, by default we use 100 with max 1000. These grids can be ‘stacked’ together if a single bar is to go through multiple at the same time. For instance, if a bar goes through 30 grids in one bar, it will have a buy/sell power of 30x. Stacking Grid Buy and (sometimes) Sells is a very crucial part of this strategy that allows it to purchase multitudes during crashes and capitalize on sales during massive pumps.
With the grids, you’ll notice there is a middle line within the upper and lower part that makes the grid. As a Purchase Type within our Settings this is identified as ‘Middle of Zone Purchase Amount In USDT’. The middle of the grid may act as the strongest grid location (aside from maybe the bottom). Therefore there is a specific purchase amount for this Grid location.
This DCA Strategy also features two other purchase methods. Most importantly is its ‘Purchase More’ type. Essentially it will attempt to purchase when the Highest High or Lowest Low moves outside of the Outer band. For instance, the Lowest Low becomes Lower or the Higher High becomes Higher. When this happens may be a good time to buy as it is featuring a new High or Low over an extended period.
The last but not least Purchase type within this Strategy is what we call a ‘Strong Buy’. The reason for this is its verified by the following:
The outer bounds have been pushed (what causes a ‘Purchase More’)
The Price has crossed over the EMA 21
It has been verified through MACD, RSI or MACD Historical (Delta) using Regular and Hidden Divergence (Note, only 1 of these verifications is required and it can be any).
By default we don’t have Purchase Amount for ‘Strong Buy’ set, but that doesn’t mean it can’t be viable, it simply means we have only seen a few pairs where it actually proved more profitable allocating money there rather than just increasing the purchase amount for ‘Purchase More’ or ‘Grids’.
Now that you understand where we BUY, we should discuss when we SELL.
This Strategy features 3 crucial sell locations, and we will discuss each individually as they are very important.
1. ‘Sell Some At’: Here there are 4 different options, by default its set to ‘Both’ but you can change it around if you want. Your options are:
‘Both’ - You will sell some at both locations. The amount sold is the % used at ‘Sell Some %’.
‘Basis Line’ - You will sell some when the price crosses over the Basis Line. The amount sold is the % used at ‘Sell Some %’.
‘Percent’ - You will sell some when the Close is >= X% between the Lower Inner and Upper Inner Zone.
‘None’ - This simply means don’t ever Sell Some.
2. Sell Grids. Sell Grids are exactly like purchase grids and feature the same amount of grids. You also have the ability to ‘Stack Grid Sells’, which basically means if a bar moves multiple grids, it will stack the amount % wise you will sell, rather than just selling the default amount. Sell Grids use a DCA logic but for selling, which we deem may help adjust risk/reward ratio for selling, especially if there is slow but consistent bullish movement. It causes these grids to constantly push up and therefore when the close is greater than them, accrue more profit.
3. Take Profit. Take profit occurs when the close first goes above the Take Profit location (Teal Line) and then Closes below it. When Take Profit occurs, ALL POSITIONS WILL BE SOLD. What may happen is the price enters the Sell Grid, doesn’t go all the way to the top ‘Exiting it’ and then crashes back down and closes below the Take Profit. Take Profit is a strong location which generally represents a strong profit location, and that a strong momentum has changed which may cause the price to revert back to the buy grid zone.
Keep in mind, if you have (by default) ‘Only Sell If Profit’ toggled, all sell locations will only create sell orders when it is profitable to do so. Just cause it may be a good time to sell, doesn’t mean based on your DCA it is. In our opinion, only selling when it is profitable to do so is a key part of the DCA purchase strategy.
You likewise have the ability to ‘Only Buy If Lower than DCA’, which is likewise by default. These two help keep the Yin and Yang by balancing each other out where you’re only purchasing and selling when it makes logical sense too, even if that involves ignoring a signal and waiting for a better opportunity.
Tutorial:
Like most of our Strategies, we try to capitalize on lower Time Frames, generally the 15 minutes so we may find optimal entry and exit locations while still maintaining a strong correlation to trend patterns.
First off, let’s discuss examples of how this Strategy works prior to applying Machine Learning (enabled by default).
In this example above we have disabled the showing of ‘Potential Buy and Sell Signals’ so as to declutter the example. In here you can see where actual trades had gone through for both buying and selling and get an idea of how the strategy works. We also have disabled Machine Learning for this example so you can see the hard lines created by the Donchian Channel. You can also see how the Basis line ‘white line’ may act as a good location to ‘Sell Some’ and that it moves quite irregularly compared to the Donchian Channel. This is due to the fact that it is based on two custom Bollinger Bands to create the basis line.
Here we zoomed out even further and moved back a bit to where there were dense clusters of buy and sell orders. Sometimes when the price is rather volatile you’ll see it ‘Ping Pong’ back and forth between the buy and sell zones quite quickly. This may be very good for your trades and profit as a whole, especially if ‘Only Buy If Lower Than DCA’ and ‘Only Sell If Profit’ are both enabled; as these toggles will ensure you are:
Always lowering your Average when buying
Always making profit when selling
By default 8% commission is added to the Strategy as well, to simulate the cost effects of if these trades were taking place on an actual exchange.
In this example we also turned on the visuals for our ‘Purchase More’ (orange line) and ‘Take Profit’ (teal line) locations. These are crucial locations. The Purchase More makes purchases when the bottom of the grid has been moved (may dictate strong price movement has occurred and may be potential for correction). Our Take Profit may help secure profit when a momentum change is happening and all of the Sell Grids weren’t able to be used.
In the example above we’ve enabled Buy and Sell Signals so that you can see where the Take Profit and Purchase More signals have occurred. The white circle demonstrates that not all of the Position Size was sold within the Sell Grids, and therefore it was ALL CLOSED when the price closed below the Take Profit Line (Teal).
Then, when the bottom of the Donchian Channel was pushed further down due to the close (within the yellow circle), a Purchase More Signal was triggered.
When the close keeps pushing the bottom of the Buy Grid lower, it can cause multiple Purchase More Signals to occur. This is normal and also a crucial part of this strategy to help lower your DCA. Please note, the Purchase More won’t trigger a Buy if the Close is greater than the DCA and you have ‘Only Purchase If Lower Than DCA’ activated.
By turning on Machine Learning (default settings) the Buy and Sell Grid Zones are smoothed out more. It may cause it to look quite a bit different. Machine Learning although it looks much worse, may help increase the profit this Strategy can produce. Previous results DO NOT mean future results, but in this example, prior to turning on Machine Learning it had produced 37% Profit in ~5 months and with Machine Learning activated it is now up to 57% Profit in ~5 months.
Machine Learning causes the Strategy to focus less on Grids and more on Purchase More when it comes to getting its entries. However, if you likewise attempt to focus on Purchase More within non Machine Learning, the locations are different and therefore the results may not be as profitable.
PLEASE NOTE:
By default this strategy uses 1,000,000 as its initial capital. The amount it purchases in its Settings is relevant to this Initial capital. Considering this is a DCA Strategy, we only want to ‘Micro’ Buy and ‘Micro’ Sell whenever conditions are met.
Therefore, if you increase the Initial Capital, you’ll likewise want to increase the Purchase Amounts within the Settings and Vice Versa. For instance, if you wish to set the Initial Capital to 10,000, you should likewise can the amounts in the Settings to 1% of what they are to account for this.
We may change the Purchase Amounts to be based on %’s in a later update if it is requested.
We will conclude this Tutorial here, hopefully you can see how a DCA Grid Purchase Model applied to Machine Learning Donchian Channels may be useful for making strategic purchases in low and high zones.
Settings:
Display Data:
Show Potential Buy Locations: These locations are where 'Potentially' orders can be placed. Placement of orders is dependant on if you have 'Only Buy If Lower Than DCA' toggled and the Price is lower than DCA. It also is effected by if you actually have any money left to purchase with; you can't buy if you have no money left!
Show Potential Sell Locations: These locations are where 'Potentially' orders will be sold. If 'Only Sell If Profit' is toggled, the sell will only happen if you'll make profit from it!
Show Grid Locations: Displaying won't affect your trades but it can be useful to see where trades will be placed, as well as which have gone through and which are left to be purchased. Max 100 Grids, but visuals will only be shown if its 20 or less.
Purchase Settings:
Only Buy if its lower than DCA: Generally speaking, we want to lower our Average, and therefore it makes sense to only buy when the close is lower than our current DCA and a Purchase Condition is met.
Compound Purchases: Compounding Purchases means reinvesting profit back into your trades right away. It drastically increases profits, but it also increases risk too. It will adjust your Purchase Amounts for the Purchase Type you have set at the same % rate of strategy initial_capital to the amounts you have set.
Adjust Purchase Amount Ratio to Maintain Risk level: By adjusting purchase levels we generally help maintain a safe risk level. Basically we generally want to reserve X amount of % for each purchase type being used and relocate money when there is too much in one type. This helps balance out purchase amounts and ensure the types selected have a correct ratio to ensure they can place the right amount of orders.
Stack Grid Buys: Stacking Buy Grids is when the Close crosses multiple Buy Grids within the same bar. Should we still only purchase the value of 1 Buy Grid OR stack the grid buys based on how many buy grids it went through.
Purchase Type: Where do you want to make Purchases? We recommend lowering your risk by combining All purchase types, but you may also customize your trading strategy however you wish.
Strong Buy Purchase Amount In USDT: How much do you want to purchase when the 'Strong Buy' signal appears? This signal only occurs after it has at least entered the Buy Zone and there have been other verifications saying it's now a good time to buy. Our Strong Buy Signal is a very strong indicator that a large price movement towards the Sell Zone will likely occur. It almost always results in it leaving the Buy Zone and usually will go to at least the White Basis line where you can 'Sell Some'.
Buy More Purchase Amount In USDT: How much should you purchase when the 'Purchase More' signal appears? This 'Purchase More' signal occurs when the lowest level of the Buy Zone moves lower. This is a great time to buy as you're buying the dip and generally there is a correction that will allow you to 'Sell Some' for some profit.
Amount of Grid Buy and Sells: How many Grid Purchases do you want to make? We recommend having it at the max of 10, as it will essentially get you a better Average Purchase Price, but you may adjust it to whatever you wish. This amount also only matters if your Purchase Type above incorporates Grid Purchases. Max 100 Grids, but visuals will only be shown if it's 20 or less.
Each Grid Purchase Amount In USDT: How much should you purchase after closing under a grid location? Keep in mind, if you have 10 grids and it goes through each, it will be this amount * 10. Grid purchasing is a great way to get a good entry, lower risk and also lower your average.
Middle Of Zone Purchase Amount In USDT: The Middle Of Zone is the strongest grid location within the Buy Zone. This is why we have a unique Purchase Amount for this Grid specifically. Please note you need to have 'Middle of Zone is a Grid' enabled for this Purchase Amount to be used.
Sell:
Only Sell if its Profit: There is a chance that during a dump, all your grid buys when through, and a few Purchase More Signals have appeared. You likely got a good entry. A Strong Buy may also appear before it starts to pump to the Sell Zone. The issue that may occur is your Average Purchase Price is greater than the 'Sell Some' price and/or the Grids in the Sell Zone and/or the Strong Sell Signal. When this happens, you can either take a loss and sell it, or you can hold on to it and wait for more purchase signals to therefore lower your average more so you can take profit at the next sell location. Please backtest this yourself within our YinYang Purchase Strategy on the pair and timeframe you are wanting to trade on. Please also note, that previous results will not always reflect future results. Please assess the risk yourself. Don't trade what you can't afford to lose. Sometimes it is better to strategically take a loss and continue on making profit than to stay in a bad trade for a long period of time.
Stack Grid Sells: Stacking Sell Grids is when the Close crosses multiple Sell Grids within the same bar. Should we still only sell the value of 1 Sell Grid OR stack the grid sells based on how many sell grids it went through.
Stop Loss Type: This is when the Close has pushed the Bottom of the Buy Grid More. Do we Stop Loss or Purchase More?? By default we recommend you stay true to the DCA part of this strategy by Purchasing More, but this is up to you.
Sell Some At: Where if selected should we 'Sell Some', this may be an important way to sell a little bit at a good time before the price may correct. Also, we don't want to sell too much incase it doesn't correct though, so its a 'Sell Some' location. Basis Line refers to our Moving Basis Line created from 2 Bollinger Bands and Percent refers to a Percent difference between the Lower Inner and Upper Inner bands.
Sell Some At Percent Amount: This refers to how much % between the Lower Inner and Upper Inner bands we should well at if we chose to 'Sell Some'.
Sell Some Min %: This refers to the Minimum amount between the Lower Inner band and Close that qualifies a 'Sell Some'. This acts as a failsafe so we don't 'Sell Some' for too little.
Sell % At Strong Sell Signal: How much do we sell at the 'Strong Sell' Signal? It may act as a strong location to sell, but likewise Grid Sells could be better.
Grid and Donchian Settings:
Donchian Channel Length: How far back are we looking back to determine our Donchian Channel.
Extra Outer Buy Width %: How much extra should we push the Outer Buy (Low) Width by?
Extra Inner Buy Width %: How much extra should we push the Inner Buy (Low) Width by?
Extra Inner Sell Width %: How much extra should we push the Inner Sell (High) Width by?
Extra Outer Sell Width %: How much extra should we push the Outer Sell (High) Width by?
Machine Learning:
Rationalized Source Type: Donchians usually use High/Low. What Source is our Rationalized Source using?
Machine Learning Type: Are we using a Simple ML Average, KNN Mean Average, KNN Exponential Average or None?
Machine Learning Length: How far back is our Machine Learning going to keep data for.
k-Nearest Neighbour (KNN) Length: How many k-Nearest Neighbours will we account for?
Fast ML Data Length: What is our Fast ML Length?? This is used with our Slow Length to create our KNN Distance.
Slow ML Data Length: What is our Slow ML Length?? This is used with our Fast Length to create our KNN Distance.
If you have any questions, comments, ideas or concerns please don't hesitate to contact us.
HAPPY TRADING!
DCA-Integrated Trend Continuation StrategyIntroducing the DCA-Integrated Trend Continuation Strategy 💼💰
The DCA-Integrated Trend Continuation Strategy represents a robust trading methodology that harnesses the potential of trend continuation opportunities while seamlessly incorporating the principles of Dollar Cost Averaging (DCA) as a risk management and backup mechanism. This strategy harmoniously blends these two concepts to potentially amplify profitability and optimize risk control across diverse market conditions.
This strategy is well-suited for both trending and ranging markets. During trending markets, it aims to capture and ride the momentum of the trend while optimizing entry points. In ranging markets or pullbacks, the DCA feature comes into play, allowing users to accumulate more assets at potentially lower prices and potentially increase profits when the market resumes its upward trend. This cohesive approach not only enhances the overall effectiveness of the strategy but also fosters a more resilient and adaptable trading approach in ever-changing market dynamics.
💎 How it Works:
▶️ The strategy incorporates a customizable entry signal based on candlestick patterns, enabling the identification of potential trend continuation opportunities. By focusing on consecutive bullish candles, it detects the presence of bullish momentum, indicating an optimal time to enter a long position.
To refine the precision of the signals, traders can set a specific percentage threshold for the closing price of the candle, ensuring it is above a certain percentage of its body. This condition verifies strong bullish momentum and confirms significant upward movement within the candle, thereby increasing the reliability of the signal.
In addition, the strategy offers further confirmation by examining the relationship between the closing price of the signal candle and its previous candles. If the closing price of the signal candle is higher than its preceding candles, it provides an additional layer of assurance before entering a position. This approach is particularly effective in detecting sharp movements and capturing significant price shifts, as it focuses on identifying instances where the closing price shows clear strength and outperforms the previous candle's price action. By prioritizing such occurrences, the strategy aims to capture robust trends and capitalize on notable market movements.
▶️ During market downturns, the strategy incorporates intelligent management of price drops, offering flexibility through fixed or customizable price drop percentages. This unique feature allows for additional entries at specified drop percentages, enabling traders to accumulate positions at more favorable prices.
By strategically adjusting the custom price drop percentages, you can optimize your entry points to potentially maximize profitability. Utilizing lower percentages for initial entries takes advantage of price fluctuations, potentially yielding higher returns. On the other hand, employing higher percentages for final entries adopts a more cautious approach during significant market downturns, emphasizing enhanced risk management. This adaptive approach ensures that the strategy effectively navigates challenging market conditions while seeking to optimize overall performance.
▶️ To enhance performance and mitigate risks, the strategy integrates average purchase price management. This feature dynamically adjusts the average buy price percentage decrease after each price drop, expediting the achievement of the target point even in challenging market conditions. By reducing recovery times and ensuring investment safety, this strategy optimizes outcomes for traders.
▶️ Risk management is at the core of this strategy, prioritizing the protection of capital. It incorporates an account balance validation mechanism that conducts automatic checks prior to each entry, ensuring alignment with available funds. This essential feature provides real-time insights into the affordability of price drops and the number of entries, enabling traders to make informed decisions and maintain optimal risk control.
▶️ Furthermore, the strategy offers take profit options, allowing traders to secure gains by setting fixed percentage profits from the average buy price or using a trailing target. Stop loss protection is also available, enabling traders to set a fixed percentage from the average purchase price to limit potential losses and preserve capital.
▶️ This strategy is fully compatible with third-party trading bots, allowing for easy connectivity to popular trading platforms. By leveraging the TradingView webhook functionality, you can effortlessly link the strategy to your preferred bot and receive accurate signals for position entry and exit. The strategy provides all the necessary alert message fields, ensuring a smooth and user-friendly trading experience. With this integration, you can automate the execution of trades, saving time and effort while enjoying the benefits of this powerful strategy.
🚀 How to Use:
To effectively utilize the DCA-Integrated Trend Continuation Strategy, follow these steps:
1. Choose your preferred DCA Mode - whether by quantity or by value - to determine how you want to size your positions.
2. Customize the entry conditions of the strategy to align with your trading preferences. Specify the number of consecutive bullish candles, set a desired percentage threshold for the close of the signal candle relative to its body, and determine the number of previous candles to compare with.
3. Adjust the pyramiding parameter to suit your risk tolerance and desired returns. Whether you prefer a more conservative approach with fewer pyramids or a more aggressive stance with multiple pyramids, this strategy offers flexibility.
4. Personalize the price drop percentages based on your risk appetite and trading strategy. Choose between fixed or custom percentages to optimize your entries in different market scenarios.
5. Configure the average purchase price management settings to control the percentage decrease in the average buy price after each price drop, ensuring it aligns with your risk tolerance and strategy.
6. Utilize the account balance validation feature to ensure the strategy's actions align with your available funds, enhancing risk management and preventing overexposure.
7. Set take profit options to secure your gains and implement stop loss protection to limit potential losses, providing an additional layer of risk management.
8. Use the date and time filtering feature to define the duration during which the strategy operates, allowing for specific backtesting periods or integration with a trading bot.
9. For automated trading, take advantage of the compatibility with third-party trading bots to seamlessly integrate the strategy with popular trading platforms.
By following these steps, traders can harness the power of the DCA-Integrated Trend Continuation Strategy to potentially maximize profitability and optimize their trading outcomes in both trending and ranging markets.
⚙️ User Settings:
To ensure the backtest result is representative of real-world trading conditions, particularly in the highly volatile Crypto market, the default strategy parameters have been carefully selected to produce realistic results with a conservative approach. However, you have the flexibility to customize these settings based on your risk tolerance and strategy preferences, whether you're focusing on short-term or long-term trading, allowing you to potentially achieve higher profits. The backtesting was conducted using the BTCUSDT pair in 15-minute timeframe on the Binance exchange. Users can configure the following options:
General Settings:
- Initial Capital (Default: $10,000)
- Currency (Default: USDT)
- Commission (Default: 0.1%)
- Slippage (Default: 5 ticks)
Order Size Management:
- DCA Mode (Default: Quantity)
- Order Size in Quantity (Default: 0.01)
- Order Size in Value (Default: $300)
Strategy's Entry Conditions:
- Number of Consecutive Bullish Candles (Default: 3)
- Close Over Candle Body % (Default: 50% - Disabled)
- Close Over Previous Candles Lookback (Default: 14 - Disabled)
- Pyramiding Number (Default: 30)
Price Drop Management:
- Enable Price Drop Calculations (Default: Enabled)
- Enable Current Balance Check (Default: Enabled)
- Price Drop Percentage Type (Default: Custom)
- Average Price Move Down Percentage % (Default: 50%)
- Fixed Price Drop Percentage % (Default: 0.5%)
- Custom Price Drop Percentage % (Defaults: 0.5, 0.5, 0.5, 1, 3, 5, 5, 10, 10, 10)
TP/SL:
- Take Profit % (Default: 3%)
- Stop Loss % (Default: 100%)
- Enable Trailing Target (Default: Enabled)
- Trailing Offset % (Default: 0.1%)
Backtest Table (Default: Enabled)
Date & Time:
- Date Range Filtering (Default: Disabled)
- Start Time
- End Time
Alert Message:
- Alert Message for Enter Long
- Alert Message for Exit Long
By providing these customizable settings, the strategy allows you to tailor it to your specific needs, enhancing the adaptability and effectiveness of your trading approach.
🔐 Source Code Protection:
The source code of the DCA-Integrated Trend Continuation Strategy is designed to be robust, reliable, and highly efficient. Its original and innovative implementation merits protecting the source code and limiting access, ensuring the exclusivity of this strategy. By safeguarding the code, the integrity and uniqueness of the strategy are preserved, giving users a competitive edge in their trading activities.
Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Pro|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4hInvestment Strategy (Quantitative Trading)
| 🛑 | Watch "LIVE" and 'COPY' this strategy in real time:
🔗 Link: www.tradingview.com
Hello, welcome, feel free 🌹💐
Since the stone age to the most technological age, one thing has not changed, that which continues impress human beings the most, is the other human being!
Deep down, it's all very simple or very complicated, depends on how you look at it.
I believe that everyone was born to do something very well in life.
But few are those who have, let's use the word 'luck' .
Few are those who have the 'luck' to discover this thing.
That is why few are happy and successful in their jobs and professions.
Thank God I had this 'luck' , and discovered what I was born to do well.
And I was born to program. 👨💻
📋 Summary : Project Titan
0️⃣ : 🦄 Project Titan
1️⃣ : ⚖️ Quantitative THEMIS
2️⃣ : 🏛️ Titan Community
3️⃣ : 👨💻 Who am I ❔
4️⃣ : ❓ What is Statistical/Probabilistic Trading ❓
5️⃣ : ❓ How Statistical/Probabilistic Trading works ❓
6️⃣ : ❓ Why use a Statistical/Probabilistic system ❓
7️⃣ : ❓ Why the human brain is not prepared to do Trading ❓
8️⃣ : ❓ What is Backtest ❓
9️⃣ : ❓ How to build a Consistent system ❓
🔟 : ❓ What is a Quantitative Trading system ❓
1️⃣1️⃣ : ❓ How to build a Quantitative Trading system ❓
1️⃣2️⃣ : ❓ How to Exploit Market Anomalies ❓
1️⃣3️⃣ : ❓ What Defines a Robust, Profitable and Consistent System ❓
1️⃣4️⃣ : 🔧 Fixed Technical
1️⃣5️⃣ : ❌ Fixed Outputs : 🎯 TP(%) & 🛑SL(%)
1️⃣6️⃣ : ⚠️ Risk Profile
1️⃣7️⃣ : ⭕ Moving Exits : (Indicators)
1️⃣8️⃣ : 💸 Initial Capital
1️⃣9️⃣ : ⚙️ Entry Options
2️⃣0️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Third-Party Services'
2️⃣1️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Exchanges
2️⃣2️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Messaging Services'
2️⃣3️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : '🧲🤖Copy-Trading'
2️⃣4️⃣ : ❔ Why be a Titan Pro 👽❔
2️⃣5️⃣ : ❔ Why be a Titan Aff 🛸❔
2️⃣6️⃣ : 📋 Summary : ⚖️ Strategy: Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Pro|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4h
2️⃣7️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : 🆑 Conservative
2️⃣8️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : Ⓜ️ Moderate
2️⃣9️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : 🅰 Aggressive
3️⃣0️⃣ : 🛠️ Roadmap
3️⃣1️⃣ : 🧻 Notes ❕
3️⃣2️⃣ : 🚨 Disclaimer ❕❗
3️⃣3️⃣ : ♻️ ® No Repaint
3️⃣4️⃣ : 🔒 Copyright ©️
3️⃣5️⃣ : 👏 Acknowledgments
3️⃣6️⃣ : 👮 House Rules : 📺 TradingView
3️⃣7️⃣ : 🏛️ Become a Titan Pro member 👽
3️⃣8️⃣ : 🏛️ Be a member Titan Aff 🛸
0️⃣ : 🦄 Project Titan
This is the first real, 100% automated Quantitative Strategy made available to the public and the pinescript community for TradingView.
You will be able to automate all signals of this strategy for your broker , centralized or decentralized and also for messaging services : Discord, Telegram or Twitter .
This is the first strategy of a larger project, in 2023, I will provide a total of 6 100% automated 'Quantitative' strategies to the pinescript community for TradingView.
The future strategies to be shared here will also be unique , never before seen, real 'Quantitative' bots with real, validated results in real operation.
Just like the 'Quantitative THEMIS' strategy, it will be something out of the loop throughout the pinescript/tradingview community, truly unique tools for building mutual wealth consistently and continuously for our community.
1️⃣ : ⚖️ Quantitative THEMIS : Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Pro|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4h
This is a truly unique and out of the curve strategy for BTC /USD .
A truly real strategy, with real, validated results and in real operation.
A unique tool for building mutual wealth, consistently and continuously for the members of the Titan community.
Initially we will operate on a monthly, quarterly, annual or biennial subscription service.
Our goal here is to build a great community, in exchange for an extremely fair value for the use of our truly unique tools, which bring and will bring real results to our community members.
With this business model it will be possible to provide all Titan users and community members with the purest and highest degree of sophistication in the market with pinescript for tradingview, providing unique and truly profitable strategies.
My goal here is to offer the best to our members!
The best 'pinescript' tradingview service in the world!
We are the only Start-Up in the world that will decentralize real and full access to truly real 'quantitative' tools that bring and will bring real results for mutual and ongoing wealth building for our community.
2️⃣ : 🏛️ Titan Community : 👽 Pro 🔁 Aff 🛸
Become a Titan Pro 👽
To get access to the strategy: "Quantitative THEMIS" , and future Titan strategies in a 100% automated way, along with all tutorials for automation.
Pro Plans: 30 Days, 90 Days, 12 Months, 24 Months.
👽 Pro 🅼 Monthly
👽 Pro 🆀 Quarterly
👽 Pro🅰 Annual
👽 Pro👾Two Years
You will have access to a truly unique system that is out of the curve .
A 100% real, 100% automated, tested, validated, profitable, and in real operation strategy.
Become a Titan Affiliate 🛸
By becoming a Titan Affiliate 🛸, you will automatically receive 50% of the value of each new subscription you refer .
You will receive 50% for any of the above plans that you refer .
This way we will encourage our community to grow in a fair and healthy way, because we know what we have in our hands and what we deliver real value to our users.
We are at the highest level of sophistication in the market, the consistency here and the results here speak for themselves.
So growing our community means growing mutual wealth and raising collective conscience.
Wealth must be created not divided.
And here we are creating mutual wealth on all ends and in all ways.
A non-zero sum system, where everybody wins.
3️⃣ : 👨💻 Who am I ❔
My name is FilipeSoh I am 26 years old, Technical Analyst, Trader, Computer Engineer, pinescript Specialist, with extensive experience in several languages and technologies.
For the last 4 years I have been focusing on developing, editing and creating pinescript indicators and strategies for Tradingview for people and myself.
Full-time passionate workaholic pinescript developer with over 10,000 hours of pinescript development.
• Pinescript expert ▬Tradingview.
• Specialist in Automated Trading
• Specialist in Quantitative Trading.
• Statistical/Probabilistic Trading Specialist - Mark Douglas Scholl.
• Inventor of the 'Classic Forecast' Indicators.
• Inventor of the 'Backtest Table'.
4️⃣ : ❓ What is Statistical/Probabilistic Trading ❓
Statistical/probabilistic trading is the only way to get a positive mathematical expectation regarding the market and consequently that is the only way to make money consistently from it.
I will present below some more details about the Quantitative THEMIS strategy, it is a real strategy, tested, validated and in real operation, 'Skin in the Game' , a consistent way to make money with statistical/probabilistic trading in a 100% automated.
I am a Technical Analyst , I used to be a Discretionary Trader , today I am 100% a Statistical Trader .
I've gotten rich and made a lot of money, and I've also lost a lot with 'leverage'.
That was a few years ago.
The book that changed everything for me was "Trading in The Zone" by Mark Douglas.
That's when I understood that the market is just a game of statistics and probability, like a casino!
It was then that I understood that the human brain is not prepared for trading, because it involves triggers and mental emotions.
And emotions in trading and in making trading decisions do not go well together, not in the long run, because you always have the burden of being wrong with the outcome of that particular position.
But remembering that the market is just a statistical game!
5️⃣ : ❓ How Statistical/Probabilistic Trading works ❓
Let's use a 'coin' as an example:
If we toss a 'coin' up 10 times.
Do you agree that it is impossible for us to know exactly the result of the 'plays' before they actually happen?
As in the example above, would you agree, that we cannot "guess" the outcome of a position before it actually happens?
As much as we cannot "guess" whether the coin will drop heads or tails on each flip.
We can analyze the "backtest" of the 10 moves made with that coin:
If we analyze the 10 moves and count the number of times the coin fell heads or tails in a specific sequence, we then have a percentage of times the coin fell heads or tails, so we have a 'backtest' of those moves.
Then on the next flip we can now assume a point or a favorable position for one side, the side with the highest probability .
In a nutshell, this is more or less how probabilistic statistical trading works.
As Statistical Traders we can never say whether such a Trader/Position we take will be a winner or a loser.
But still we can have a positive and consistent result in a "sequence" of trades, because before we even open a position, backtests have already been performed so we identify an anomaly and build a system that will have a positive statistical advantage in our favor over the market.
The advantage will not be in one trade itself, but in the "sequence" of trades as a whole!
Because our system will work like a casino, having a positive mathematical expectation relative to the players/market.
Design, develop, test models and systems that can take advantage of market anomalies, until they change.
Be the casino! - Mark Douglas
6️⃣ : ❓ Why use a Statistical/Probabilistic system ❓
In recent years I have focused and specialized in developing 100% automated trading systems, essentially for the cryptocurrency market.
I have developed many extremely robust and efficient systems, with positive mathematical expectation towards the market.
These are not complex systems per se , because here we want to avoid 'over-optimization' as much as possible.
As Da Vinci said: "Simplicity is the highest degree of sophistication".
I say this because I have tested, tried and developed hundreds of systems/strategies.
I believe I have programmed more than 10,000 unique indicators/strategies, because this is my passion and purpose in life.
I am passionate about what I do, completely!
I love statistical trading because it is the only way to get consistency in the long run!
This is why I have studied, applied, developed, and specialized in 100% automated cryptocurrency trading systems.
The reason why our systems are extremely "simple" is because, as I mentioned before, in statistical trading we want to exploit the market anomaly to the maximum, that is, this anomaly will change from time to time, usually we can exploit a trading system efficiently for about 6 to 12 months, or for a few years, that is; for fixed 'scalpers' systems.
Because at some point these anomalies will be identified , and from the moment they are identified they will be exploited and will stop being anomalies .
With the system presented here; you can even copy the indicators and input values shared here;
However; what I have to offer you is: it is me , our team , and our community !
That is, we will constantly monitor this system, for life , because our goal here is to create a unique , perpetual , profitable , and consistent system for our community.
Myself , our team and our community will keep this script periodically updated , to ensure the positive mathematical expectation of it.
So we don't mind sharing the current parameters and values , because the real value is also in the future updates that this system will receive from me and our team , guided by our culture and our community of real users !
As we are hosted on 'tradingview', all future updates for this strategy, will be implemented and updated automatically on your tradingview account.
What we want here is: to make sure you get gains from our system, because if you get gains , our ecosystem will grow as a whole in a healthy and scalable way, so we will be generating continuous mutual wealth and raising the collective consciousness .
People Need People: 3️⃣🅿
7️⃣ : ❓ Why the human brain is not prepared to do Trading ❓
Today my greatest skill is to develop statistically profitable and 100% automated strategies for 'pinescript' tradingview.
Note that I said: 'profitable' because in fact statistical trading is the only way to make money in a 'consistent' way from the market.
And consequently have a positive wealth curve every cycle, because we will be based on mathematics, not on feelings and news.
Because the human brain is not prepared to do trading.
Because trading is connected to the decision making of the cerebral cortex.
And the decision making is automatically linked to emotions, and emotions don't match with trading decision making, because in those moments, we can feel the best and also the worst sensations and emotions, and this certainly affects us and makes us commit grotesque mistakes!
That's why the human brain is not prepared to do trading.
If you want to participate in a fully automated, profitable and consistent trading system; be a Titan Pro 👽
I believe we are walking an extremely enriching path here, not only in terms of financial returns for our community, but also in terms of knowledge about probabilistic and automated statistical trading.
You will have access to an extremely robust system, which was built upon very strong concepts and foundations, and upon the world's main asset in a few years: Bitcoin .
We are the tip of the best that exists in the cryptocurrency market when it comes to probabilistic and automated statistical trading.
Result is result! Me being dressed or naked.
This is just the beginning!
But there is a way to consistently make money from the market.
Being the Casino! - Mark Douglas
8️⃣ : ❓ What is Backtest ❓
Imagine the market as a purely random system, but even in 'randomness' there are patterns.
So now imagine the market and statistical trading as follows:
Repeating the above 'coin' example, let's think of it as follows:
If we toss a coin up 10 times again.
It is impossible to know which flips will have heads or tails, correct?
But if we analyze these 10 tosses, then we will have a mathematical statistic of the past result, for example, 70 % of the tosses fell 'heads'.
That is:
7 moves fell on "heads" .
3 moves fell on "tails" .
So based on these conditions and on the generic backtest presented here, we could adopt " heads " as our system of moves, to have a statistical and probabilistic advantage in relation to the next move to be performed.
That is, if you define a system, based on backtests , that has a robust positive mathematical expectation in relation to the market you will have a profitable system.
For every move you make you will have a positive statistical advantage in your favor over the market before you even make the move.
Like a casino in relation to all its players!
The casino does not have an advantage over one specific player, but over all players, because it has a positive mathematical expectation about all the moves that night.
The casino will always have a positive statistical advantage over its players.
Note that there will always be real players who will make real, million-dollar bankrolls that night, but this condition is already built into the casino's 'strategy', which has a pre-determined positive statistical advantage of that night as a whole.
Statistical trading is the same thing, as long as you don't understand this you will keep losing money and consistently.
9️⃣ : ❓ How to build a Consistent system ❓
See most traders around the world perform trades believing that that specific position taken will make them filthy rich, because they simply believe faithfully that the position taken will be an undoubted winner, based on a trader's methodology: 'trading a trade' without analyzing the whole context, just using 'empirical' aspects in their system.
But if you think of trading, as a sequence of moves.
You see, 'a sequence' !
When we think statistically, it doesn't matter your result for this , or for the next specific trade , but the final sequence of trades as a whole.
As the market has a random system of results distribution , if your system has a positive statistical advantage in relation to the market, at the end of that sequence you'll have the biggest probability of having a winning bank.
That's how you do real trading!
And with consistency!
Trading is a long term game, but when you change the key you realize that it is a simple game to make money in a consistent way from the market, all you need is patience.
Even more when we are based on Bitcoin, which has its 'Halving' effect where, in theory, we will never lose money in 3 to 4 years intervals, due to its scarcity and the fact that Bitcoin is the 'discovery of digital scarcity' which makes it the digital gold, we believe in this thesis and we follow Satoshi's legacy.
So align Bitcoin with a probabilistic statistical trading system with a positive mathematical expectation of the market and 100% automated with the long term, and all you need is patience, and you will become rich.
In fact Bitcoin by itself is already a path, buy, wait for each halving and your wealth will be maintained.
No inflation, unlike fiat currencies.
This is a complete and extremely robust strategy, with the most current possible and 'not possible' techniques involved and applied here.
Today I am at another level in developing 100% automated 'quantitative' strategies.
I was born for this!
🔟 : ❓ What is a Quantitative Trading system ❓
In addition to having access to a revolutionary strategy you will have access to disruptive 100% multifunctional tables with the ability to perform 'backtests' for better tracking and monitoring of your system on a customized basis.
I would like to emphasize one thing, and that is that you keep this in mind.
Today my greatest skill in 'pinescript' is to build indicators, but mainly strategies, based on statistical and probabilistic trading, with a postive mathematical expectation in relation to the market, in a 100% automated way.
This with the goal of building a consistent and continuous positive equity curve through mathematics using data, converting it into statistical / probabilistic parameters and applying them to a Quantitative model.
Before becoming a Quantitative Trader , I was a Technical Analyst and a Discretionary Trader .
First as a position trader and then as a day trader.
Before becoming a Trader, I trained myself as a Technical Analyst , to masterly understand the shape and workings of the market in theory.
But everything changed when I met 'Mark Douglas' , when I got to know his works, that's when my head exploded 🤯, and I started to understand the market for good!
The market is nothing more than a 'random' system of distributing results.
See that I said: 'random' .
Do yourself a mental exercise.
Is there really such a thing as random ?
I believe not, as far as we know maybe the 'singularity'.
So thinking this way, to translate, the market is nothing more than a game of probability, statistics and pure mathematics.
Like a casino!
What happens is that most traders, whenever they take a position, take it with all the empirical certainty that such position will win or lose, and do not take into consideration the total sequence of results to understand their place in the market.
Understanding your place in the market gives you the ability to create and design systems that can exploit the present market anomaly, and thus make money statistically, consistently, and 100% automated.
Thinking of it this way, it is easy to make money from the market.
There are many ways to make money from the market, but the only consistent way I know of is through 'probabilistic and automated statistical trading'.
1️⃣1️⃣ : ❓ How to build a Quantitative Trading system ❓
There are some fundamental points that must be addressed here in order to understand what makes up a system based on statistics and probability applied to a quantitative model.
When we talk about 'discretionary' trading, it is a trading system based on human decisions after the defined 'empirical' conditions are met.
It is quite another thing to build a fully automated system without any human interference/interaction .
That said:
Building a statistically profitable system is perfectly possible, but this is a high level task , but with possible high rewards and consistent gains.
Here you will find a real "Skin In The Game" strategy.
With all due respect, but the vast majority of traders who post strategies on TradingView do not understand what they are doing.
Most of them do not understand the minimum complexity involved in the main variable for the construction of a real strategy, the mother variable: "strategy".
I say this by my own experience, because I have analyzed practically all the existing publications of TradingView + 200,000 indicators and strategies.
I breathe pinescript, I eat pinescript, I sleep pinescript, I bathe pinescript, I live TradingView.
But the main advantage for the TradingView users, is that all entry and exit orders made by this strategy can be checked and analyzed thoroughly, to validate and prove the veracity of this strategy, because this is a 100% real strategy.
Here there is a huge world of possibilities, but only one way to build a 'pinescript strategy' that will work correctly aligned to the real world with real results .
There are some fundamental points to take into consideration when building a profitable trading system:
The most important of these for me is: 'DrawDown' .
Followed by: 'Hit Rate' .
And only after that we use the parameter: 'Profit'.
See, this is because here, we are dealing with the 'imponderable' , and anything can happen in this scenario.
But there is one thing that makes us sleep peacefully at night, and that is: controlling losses .
That is, in other words: controlling the DrawDown .
The amateur is concerned with 'winning', the professional is concerned with conserving capital.
If we have the losses under control, then we can move on to the other two parameters: hit rate and profit.
See, the second most important factor in building a system is the hit rate.
I say this from my own experience.
I have worked with many systems with a 'low hit rate', but extremely profitable.
For example: systems with hit rates of 40 to 50%.
But as much as statistically and mathematically the profit is rewarding, operating systems with a low hit rate is always very stressful psychologically.
That's why there are two big reasons why when I build an automated trading system, I focus on the high hit rate of the system, they are
1 - To reduce psychological damage as much as possible .
2 - And more important , when we create a system with a 'high hit rate' , there is a huge intrinsic advantage here, that most statistic traders don't take in consideration.
That is: knowing more quickly when the system stops being functional.
The main advantage of a system with a high hit rate is: to identify when the system stops being functional and stop exploiting the market's anomaly.
Look: When we are talking about trading and random distribution of results on the market, do you agree that when we create a trading system, we are focused on exploring some anomaly of that market?
When that anomaly is verified by the market, it will stop being functional with time.
That's why trading systems, 'scalpers', especially for cryptocurrencies, need constant monitoring, quarterly, semi-annually or annually.
Because market movements change from time to time.
Because we go through different cycles from time to time, such as congestion cycles, accumulation , distribution , volatility , uptrends and downtrends .
1️⃣2️⃣ : ❓ How to Exploit Market Anomalies ❓
You see there is a very important point that must be stressed here.
As we are always trying to exploit an 'anomaly' in the market.
So the 'number' of indicators/tools that will integrate the system is of paramount importance.
But most traders do not take this into consideration.
To build a professional, robust, consistent, and profitable system, you don't need to use hundreds of indicators to build your setup.
This will actually make it harder to read when the setup stops working and needs some adjustment.
So focusing on a high hit rate is very important here, this is a fundamental principle that is widely ignored , and with a high hit rate, we can know much more accurately when the system is no longer functional much faster.
As Darwin said: "It is not the strongest or the most intelligent that wins the game of life, it is the most adapted.
So simple systems, as contradictory as it may seem, are more efficient, because they help to identify inflection points in the market much more quickly.
1️⃣3️⃣ : ❓ What Defines a Robust, Profitable and Consistent System ❓
See I have built, hundreds of thousands of indicators and 'pinescript' strategies, hundreds of thousands.
This is an extremely professional, robust and profitable system.
Based on the currency pairs: BTC /USDT
There are many ways and avenues to build a profitable trading setup/system.
And actually this is not a difficult task, taking in consideration, as the main factor here, that our trading and investment plan is for the long term, so consequently we will face scenarios with less noise.
He who is in a hurry eats raw.
As mentioned before.
Defining trends in pinescript is technically a simple task, the hardest task is to determine congestion zones with low volume and volatility, it's in these moments that many false signals are generated, and consequently is where most setups face their maximum DrawDown.
That's why this strategy was strictly and thoroughly planned, built on a very solid foundation, to avoid as much noise as possible, for a positive and consistent equity curve in each market cycle, 'Consistency' is our 'Mantra' around here.
1️⃣4️⃣ : 🔧 Fixed Technical
• Strategy: Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Pro|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4h
• Pair: BTC/USDTP
• Time Frame: 4 hours
• Broker: Binance (Recommended)
For a more conservative scenario, we have built the Quantitative THEMIS for the 4h time frame, with the main focus on consistency.
So we can avoid noise as much as possible!
1️⃣5️⃣ : ❌ Fixed Outputs : 🎯 TP(%) & 🛑SL(%)
In order to build a 'perpetual' system specific to BTC/USDT, it took a lot of testing, and more testing, and a lot of investment and research.
There is one initial and fundamental point that we can address to justify the incredible consistency presented here.
That fundamental point is our exit via Take Profit or Stop Loss percentage (%).
🎯 Take Profit (%)
🛑 Stop Loss (%)
See, today I have been testing some more advanced backtesting models for some cryptocurrency systems.
In which I perform 'backtest of backtest', i.e. we use a set of strategies each focused on a principle, operating individually, but they are part of something unique, i.e. we do 'backtests' of 'backtests' together.
What I mean is that we do a lot of backtesting around here.
I can assure you, that always the best output for a trading system is to set fixed output values!
In other words:
🎯 Take Profit (%)
🛑 Stop Loss (%)
This happens because statistically setting fixed exit structures in the vast majority of times, presents a superior result on the capital/equity curve, throughout history and for the vast majority of setups compared to other exit methods.
This is due to a mathematical principle of simplicity, 'avoiding more noise'.
Thus whenever the Quantitative THEMIS strategy takes a position it has a target and a defined maximum stop percentage.
1️⃣6️⃣ : ⚠️ Risk Profile
The strategy, currently has 3 risk profiles ⚠️ patterns for 'fixed percentage exits': Take Profit (%) and Stop Loss (%) .
They are: ⚠️ Rich's Profiles
✔️🆑 Conservative: 🎯 TP=2.7 % 🛑 SL=2.7 %
❌Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🎯 TP=2.8 % 🛑 SL=2.7 %
❌🅰 Aggressive: 🎯 TP=1.6 % 🛑 SL=6.9 %
You will be able to select and switch between the above options and profiles through the 'input' menu of the strategy by navigating to the "⚠️ Risk Profile" menu.
You can then select, test and apply the Risk Profile above that best suits your risk management, expectations and reality , as well as customize all the 'fixed exit' values through the TP and SL menus below.
1️⃣7️⃣ : ⭕ Moving Exits : (Indicators)
The strategy currently also has 'Moving Exits' based on indicator signals.
These are Moving Exits (Indicators)
📈 LONG : (EXIT)
🧃 (MAO) Short : true
📉 SHORT : (EXIT)
🧃 (MAO) Long: false
You can select and toggle between the above options through the 'input' menu of the strategy by navigating to the "LONG : Exit" and "SHORT : Exit" menu.
1️⃣8️⃣ : 💸 Initial Capital
By default the "Initial Capital" set for entries and backtests of this strategy is: 10000 $
You can set another value for the 'Starting Capital' through the tradingview menu under "properties" , and edit the value of the "Initial Capital" field.
This way you can set and test other 'Entry Values' for your trades, tests and backtests.
1️⃣9️⃣ : ⚙️ Entry Options
By default the 'order size' set for this strategy is 100 % of the 'initial capital' on each new trade.
You can set and test other entry options like : contracts , cash , % of equity
You should make these changes directly in the input menu of the strategy by navigating to the menu "⚙️ Properties : TradingView" below.
⚙️ Properties : (TradingView)
📊 Strategy Type: strategy.position_size != 1
📝💲 % Order Type: % of equity
📝💲 % Order Size: 100
Leverage: 1
So you can define and test other 'Entry Options' for your trades, tests and backtests.
2️⃣0️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Third-Party Services'
It is possible to automate the signals of this strategy for any centralized or decentralized broker, as well as for messaging services: Discord, Telegram and Twitter.
All in an extremely simple and uncomplicated way through the tutorials available in PDF /VIDEO for our Titan Pro 👽 subscriber community.
With our tutorials in PDF and Video it will be possible to automate the signals of this strategy for the chosen service in an extremely simple way with less than 10 steps only.
Tradingview naturally doesn't count with native integration between brokers and tradingview.
But it is possible to use 'third party services' to do the integration and automation between Tradingview and your centralized or decentralized broker.
Here are the standard, available and recommended 'third party services' to automate the signals from the 'Quantitative THEMIS' strategy on the tradingview for your broker:
1) Wundertrading (Recommended):
2) 3commas:
3) Zignaly:
4) Aleeert.com (Recommended):
5) Alertatron:
Note! 'Third party services' cannot perform 'withdrawals' via their key 'API', they can only open positions, so your funds will always be 'safe' in your brokerage firm, being traded via the 'API', when they receive an entry and exit signal from this strategy.
2️⃣1️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Exchanges
You can automate this strategy for any of the brokers below, through your broker's 'API' by connecting it to the 'third party automation services' for tradingview available and mentioned in the menu above:
1) Binance (Recommended)
2) Bitmex
3) Bybit
4) KuCoin
5) Deribit
6) OKX
7) Coinbase
8) Huobi
9) Bitfinex
10) Bitget
11) Bittrex
12) Bitstamp
13) Gate. io
14) Kraken
15) Gemini
16) Ascendex
17) VCCE
2️⃣2️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Messaging Services'
You can also automate and monitor the signals of this strategy much more efficiently by sending them to the following popular messaging services:
1) Discord
2) Telegram
3) Twitter
2️⃣3️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : '🧲🤖Copy-Trading'
It will also be possible to copy/replicate the entries and exits of this strategy to your broker in an extremely simple and agile way, through the available copy-trader services.
This way it will be possible to replicate the signals of this strategy at each entry and exit to your broker through the API connecting it to the integrated copy-trader services available through the tradingview automation services below:
1) Wundetrading:
2) Zignaly:
2️⃣4️⃣ : ❔ Why be a Titan Pro 👽❔
I believe that today I am at another level in 'pinescript' development.
I consider myself today a true unicorn as a pinescript developer, someone unique and very rare.
If you choose another tool or another pinescript service, this tool will be just another one, with no real results.
But if you join our Titan community, you will have access to a unique tool! And you will get real results!
I already earn money consistently with statistical and automated trading and as an expert pinescript developer.
I am here to evolve my skills as much as possible, and one day become a pinescript 'Wizard'.
So excellence, quality and professionalism will always be my north here.
You will never find a developer like me, and who will take so seriously such a revolutionary project as this one. A Maverick! ▬ The man never stops!
Here you will find the highest degree of sophistication and development in the market for 'pinescript'.
You will get the best of me and the best of pinescript possible.
Let me show you how a professional in my field does it.
Become a Titan Pro Member 👽 and get Full Access to this strategy and all the Automation Tutorials.
Be the Titan in your life!
2️⃣5️⃣ : ❔ Why be a Titan Aff 🛸❔
Get financial return for your referrals, Decentralize the World, and raise the collective consciousness.
2️⃣6️⃣ : 📋 Summary : ⚖️ Strategy: Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Pro|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4h
® Titan Investimentos | Quantitative THEMIS ⚖️ | Pro 👽 2.6 | Dev: © FilipeSoh 🧙 | 🤖 100% Automated : Discord, Telegram, Twitter, Wundertrading, 3commas, Zignaly, Aleeert, Alertatron, Uniswap-v3 | BINANCE:BTCUSDTPERP 4h
🛒 Subscribe this strategy ❗️ Be a Titan Member 🏛️
🛒 Titan Pro 👽 🏛️ Titan Pro 👽 Version with ✔️100% Integrated Automation 🤖 and 📚 Automation Tutorials ✔️100% available at: (PDF/VIDEO)
🛒 Titan Affiliate 🛸 🏛️ Titan Affiliate 🛸 (Subscription Sale) 🔥 Receive 50% commission
📋 Summary : QT THEMIS ⚖️
🕵️♂️ Check This Strategy..................................................................0
🦄 ® Titan Investimentos...............................................................1
👨💻 © Developer..........................................................................2
📚 Signal Automation Tutorials : (PDF/VIDEO).......................................3
👨🔧 Revision...............................................................................4
📊 Table : (BACKTEST)..................................................................5
📊 Table : (INFORMATIONS).............................................................6
⚙️ Properties : (TRADINGVIEW)........................................................7
📆 Backtest : (TRADINGVIEW)..........................................................8
⚠️ Risk Profile...........................................................................9
🟢 On 🔴 Off : (LONG/SHORT).......................................................10
📈 LONG : (ENTRY)....................................................................11
📉 SHORT : (ENTRY)...................................................................12
📈 LONG : (EXIT).......................................................................13
📉 SHORT : (EXIT)......................................................................14
🧩 (EI) External Indicator.............................................................15
📡 (QT) Quantitative...................................................................16
🎠 (FF) Forecast......................................................................17
🅱 (BB) Bollinger Bands................................................................18
🧃 (MAP) Moving Average Primary......................................................19
🧃 (MAP) Labels.........................................................................20
🍔 (MAQ) Moving Average Quaternary.................................................21
🍟 (MACD) Moving Average Convergence Divergence...............................22
📣 (VWAP) Volume Weighted Average Price........................................23
🪀 (HL) HILO..........................................................................24
🅾 (OBV) On Balance Volume.........................................................25
🥊 (SAR) Stop and Reverse...........................................................26
🛡️ (DSR) Dynamic Support and Resistance..........................................27
🔊 (VD) Volume Directional..........................................................28
🧰 (RSI) Relative Momentum Index.................................................29
🎯 (TP) Take Profit %..................................................................30
🛑 (SL) Stop Loss %....................................................................31
🤖 Automation Selected...............................................................32
📱💻 Discord............................................................................33
📱💻 Telegram..........................................................................34
📱💻 Twitter...........................................................................35
🤖 Wundertrading......................................................................36
🤖 3commas............................................................................37
🤖 Zignaly...............................................................................38
🤖 Aleeert...............................................................................39
🤖 Alertatron...........................................................................40
🤖 Uniswap-v3..........................................................................41
🧲🤖 Copy-Trading....................................................................42
♻️ ® No Repaint........................................................................43
🔒 Copyright ©️..........................................................................44
🏛️ Be a Titan Member..................................................................45
Nº Active Users..........................................................................46
⏱ Time Left............................................................................47
| 0 | 🕵️♂️ Check This Strategy
🕵️♂️ Version Demo: 🐄 Version with ❌non-integrated automation 🤖 and 📚 Tutorials for automation ❌not available
🕵️♂️ Version Pro: 👽 Version with ✔️100% Integrated Automation 🤖 and 📚 Automation Tutorials ✔️100% available at: (PDF/VIDEO)
| 1 | 🦄 ® Titan Investimentos
Decentralizing the World 🗺
Raising the Collective Conscience 🗺
🦄Site:
🦄TradingView: www.tradingview.com
🦄Discord:
🦄Telegram:
🦄Youtube:
🦄Twitter:
🦄Instagram:
🦄TikTok:
🦄Linkedin:
🦄E-mail:
| 2 | 👨💻 © Developer
🧠 Developer: @FilipeSoh🧙
📺 TradingView: www.tradingview.com
☑️ Linkedin:
✅ Fiverr:
✅ Upwork:
🎥 YouTube:
🐤 Twitter:
🤳 Instagram:
| 3 | 📚 Signal Automation Tutorials : (PDF/VIDEO)
📚 Discord: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Telegram: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Twitter: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Wundertrading: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 3comnas: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Zignaly: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Aleeert: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Alertatron: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Uniswap-v3: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Copy-Trading: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 4 | 👨🔧 Revision
👨🔧 Start Of Operations: 01 Jan 2019 21:00 -0300 💡 Start Of Operations (Skin in the game) : Revision 1.0
👨🔧 Previous Review: 01 Jan 2022 21:00 -0300 💡 Previous Review : Revision 2.0
👨🔧 Current Revision: 01 Jan 2023 21:00 -0300 💡 Current Revision : Revision 2.6
👨🔧 Next Revision: 28 May 2023 21:00 -0300 💡 Next Revision : Revision 2.7
| 5 | 📊 Table : (BACKTEST)
📊 Table: true
🖌️ Style: label.style_label_left
📐 Size: size_small
📏 Line: defval
🎨 Color: #131722
| 6 | 📊 Table : (INFORMATIONS)
📊 Table: false
🖌️ Style: label.style_label_right
📐 Size: size_small
📏 Line: defval
🎨 Color: #131722
| 7 | ⚙️ Properties : (TradingView)
📊 Strategy Type: strategy.position_size != 1
📝💲 % Order Type: % of equity
📝💲 % Order Size: 100 %
🚀 Leverage: 1
| 8 | 📆 Backtest : (TradingView)
🗓️ Mon: true
🗓️ Tue: true
🗓️ Wed: true
🗓️ Thu: true
🗓️ Fri: true
🗓️ Sat: true
🗓️ Sun: true
📆 Range: custom
📆 Start: UTC 31 Oct 2008 00:00
📆 End: UTC 31 Oct 2030 23:45
📆 Session: 0000-0000
📆 UTC: UTC
| 9 | ⚠️ Risk Profile
✔️🆑 Conservative: 🎯 TP=2.7 % 🛑 SL=2.7 %
❌Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🎯 TP=2.8 % 🛑 SL=2.7 %
❌🅰 Aggressive: 🎯 TP=1.6 % 🛑 SL=6.9 %
| 10 | 🟢 On 🔴 Off : (LONG/SHORT)
🟢📈 LONG: true
🟢📉 SHORT: true
| 11 | 📈 LONG : (ENTRY)
📡 (QT) Long: true
🧃 (MAP) Long: false
🅱 (BB) Long: false
🍟 (MACD) Long: false
🅾 (OBV) Long: false
| 12 | 📉 SHORT : (ENTRY)
📡 (QT) Short: true
🧃 (MAP) Short: false
🅱 (BB) Short: false
🍟 (MACD) Short: false
🅾 (OBV) Short: false
| 13 | 📈 LONG : (EXIT)
🧃 (MAP) Short: true
| 14 | 📉 SHORT : (EXIT)
🧃 (MAP) Long: false
| 15 | 🧩 (EI) External Indicator
🧩 (EI) Connect your external indicator/filter: false
🧩 (EI) Connect your indicator here (Study mode only): close
🧩 (EI) Connect your indicator here (Study mode only): close
| 16 | 📡 (QT) Quantitative
📡 (QT) Quantitative: true
📡 (QT) Market: BINANCE:BTCUSDTPERP
📡 (QT) Dice: openai
| 17 | 🎠 (FF) Forecast
🎠 (FF) Include current unclosed current candle: true
🎠 (FF) Forecast Type: flat
🎠 (FF) Nº of candles to use in linear regression: 3
| 18 | 🅱 (BB) Bollinger Bands
🅱 (BB) Bollinger Bands: true
🅱 (BB) Type: EMA
🅱 (BB) Period: 20
🅱 (BB) Source: close
🅱 (BB) Multiplier: 2
🅱 (BB) Linewidth: 0
🅱 (BB) Color: #131722
| 19 | 🧃 (MAP) Moving Average Primary
🧃 (MAP) Moving Average Primary: true
🧃 (MAP) BarColor: false
🧃 (MAP) Background: false
🧃 (MAP) Type: SMA
🧃 (MAP) Source: open
🧃 (MAP) Period: 100
🧃 (MAP) Multiplier: 2.0
🧃 (MAP) Linewidth: 2
🧃 (MAP) Color P: #42bda8
🧃 (MAP) Color N: #801922
| 20 | 🧃 (MAP) Labels
🧃 (MAP) Labels: true
🧃 (MAP) Style BUY ZONE: shape.labelup
🧃 (MAP) Color BUY ZONE: #42bda8
🧃 (MAP) Style SELL ZONE: shape.labeldown
🧃 (MAP) Color SELL ZONE: #801922
| 21 | 🍔 (MAQ) Moving Average Quaternary
🍔 (MAQ) Moving Average Quaternary: true
🍔 (MAQ) BarColor: false
🍔 (MAQ) Background: false
🍔 (MAQ) Type: SMA
🍔 (MAQ) Source: close
🍔 (MAQ) Primary: 14
🍔 (MAQ) Secondary: 22
🍔 (MAQ) Tertiary: 44
🍔 (MAQ) Quaternary: 16
🍔 (MAQ) Linewidth: 0
🍔 (MAQ) Color P: #42bda8
🍔 (MAQ) Color N: #801922
| 22 | 🍟 (MACD) Moving Average Convergence Divergence
🍟 (MACD) Macd Type: EMA
🍟 (MACD) Signal Type: EMA
🍟 (MACD) Source: close
🍟 (MACD) Fast: 12
🍟 (MACD) Slow: 26
🍟 (MACD) Smoothing: 9
| 23 | 📣 (VWAP) Volume Weighted Average Price
📣 (VWAP) Source: close
📣 (VWAP) Period: 340
📣 (VWAP) Momentum A: 84
📣 (VWAP) Momentum B: 150
📣 (VWAP) Average Volume: 1
📣 (VWAP) Multiplier: 1
📣 (VWAP) Diviser: 2
| 24 | 🪀 (HL) HILO
🪀 (HL) Type: SMA
🪀 (HL) Function: Maverick🧙
🪀 (HL) Source H: high
🪀 (HL) Source L: low
🪀 (HL) Period: 20
🪀 (HL) Momentum: 26
🪀 (HL) Diviser: 2
🪀 (HL) Multiplier: 1
| 25 | 🅾 (OBV) On Balance Volume
🅾 (OBV) Type: EMA
🅾 (OBV) Source: close
🅾 (OBV) Period: 16
🅾 (OBV) Diviser: 2
🅾 (OBV) Multiplier: 1
| 26 | 🥊 (SAR) Stop and Reverse
🥊 (SAR) Source: close
🥊 (SAR) High: 1.8
🥊 (SAR) Mid: 1.6
🥊 (SAR) Low: 1.6
🥊 (SAR) Diviser: 2
🥊 (SAR) Multiplier: 1
| 27 | 🛡️ (DSR) Dynamic Support and Resistance
🛡️ (DSR) Source D: close
🛡️ (DSR) Source R: high
🛡️ (DSR) Source S: low
🛡️ (DSR) Momentum R: 0
🛡️ (DSR) Momentum S: 2
🛡️ (DSR) Diviser: 2
🛡️ (DSR) Multiplier: 1
| 28 | 🔊 (VD) Volume Directional
🔊 (VD) Type: SMA
🔊 (VD) Period: 68
🔊 (VD) Momentum: 3.8
🔊 (VD) Diviser: 2
🔊 (VD) Multiplier: 1
| 29 | 🧰 (RSI) Relative Momentum Index
🧰 (RSI) Type UP: EMA
🧰 (RSI) Type DOWN: EMA
🧰 (RSI) Source: close
🧰 (RSI) Period: 29
🧰 (RSI) Smoothing: 22
🧰 (RSI) Momentum R: 64
🧰 (RSI) Momentum S: 142
🧰 (RSI) Diviser: 2
🧰 (RSI) Multiplier: 1
| 30 | 🎯 (TP) Take Profit %
🎯 (TP) Take Profit: false
🎯 (TP) %: 2.2
🎯 (TP) Color: #42bda8
🎯 (TP) Linewidth: 1
| 31 | 🛑 (SL) Stop Loss %
🛑 (SL) Stop Loss: false
🛑 (SL) %: 2.7
🛑 (SL) Color: #801922
🛑 (SL) Linewidth: 1
| 32 | 🤖 Automation : Discord | Telegram | Twitter | Wundertrading | 3commas | Zignaly | Aleeert | Alertatron | Uniswap-v3
🤖 Automation Selected : Discord
| 33 | 🤖 Discord
🔗 Link Discord: discord.com
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Discord ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Discord ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Discord ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Discord ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 34 | 🤖 Telegram
🔗 Link Telegram: telegram.org
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Telegram ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Telegram ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Telegram ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Telegram ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 35 | 🤖 Twitter
🔗 Link Twitter: twitter.com
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Twitter ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Twitter ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Twitter ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Twitter ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 36 | 🤖 Wundertrading : Binance | Bitmex | Bybit | KuCoin | Deribit | OKX | Coinbase | Huobi | Bitfinex | Bitget
🔗 Link Wundertrading: wundertrading.com
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Wundertrading ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Wundertrading ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Wundertrading ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Wundertrading ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 37 | 🤖 3commas : Binance | Bybit | OKX | Bitfinex | Coinbase | Deribit | Bitmex | Bittrex | Bitstamp | Gate.io | Kraken | Gemini | Huobi | KuCoin
🔗 Link 3commas: 3commas.io
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 3commas ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 3commas ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 3commas ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 3commas ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 38 | 🤖 Zignaly : Binance | Ascendex | Bitmex | Kucoin | VCCE
🔗 Link Zignaly: zignaly.com
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
🤖 Type Automation: Profit Sharing
🤖 Type Provider: Webook
🔑 Key: 🔒Titan Pro👽
🤖 pair: BTCUSDTP
🤖 exchange: binance
🤖 exchangeAccountType: futures
🤖 orderType: market
🚀 leverage: 1x
% positionSizePercentage: 100 %
💸 positionSizeQuote: 10000 $
🆔 signalId: @Signal1234
| 39 | 🤖 Aleeert : Binance
🔗 Link Aleeert: aleeert.com
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Aleeert ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Aleeert ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Aleeert ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Aleeert ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 40 | 🤖 Alertatron : Binance | Bybit | Deribit | Bitmex
🔗 Link Alertatron: alertatron.com
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Alertatron ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Alertatron ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Alertatron ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Alertatron ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 41 | 🤖 Uniswap-v3
🔗 Link Alertatron: uniswap.org
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Uniswap-v3 ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Uniswap-v3 ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Uniswap-v3 ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Uniswap-v3 ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 42 | 🧲🤖 Copy-Trading : Zignaly | Wundertrading
🔗 Link 📚 Copy-Trading: 🔒Titan Pro👽
🧲🤖 Copy-Trading ▬ Zignaly: 🔒Titan Pro👽
🧲🤖 Copy-Trading ▬ Wundertrading: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 43 | ♻️ ® Don't Repaint!
♻️ This Strategy does not Repaint!: ® Signs Do not repaint❕
♻️ This is a Real Strategy!: Quality : ® Titan Investimentos
📋️️ Get more information about Repainting here:
| 44 | 🔒 Copyright ©️
🔒 Copyright ©️: Copyright © 2023-2024 All rights reserved, ® Titan Investimentos
🔒 Copyright ©️: ® Titan Investimentos
🔒 Copyright ©️: Unique and Exclusive Strategy. All rights reserved
| 45 | 🏛️ Be a Titan Members
🏛️ Titan Pro 👽 Version with ✔️100% Integrated Automation 🤖 and 📚 Automation Tutorials ✔️100% available at: (PDF/VIDEO)
🏛️ Titan Affiliate 🛸 (Subscription Sale) 🔥 Receive 50% commission
| 46 | ⏱ Time Left
Time Left Titan Demo 🐄: ⏱♾ | ⏱ : ♾ Titan Demo 🐄 Version with ❌non-integrated automation 🤖 and 📚 Tutorials for automation ❌not available
Time Left Titan Pro 👽: 🔒Titan Pro👽 | ⏱ : Pro Plans: 30 Days, 90 Days, 12 Months, 24 Months. (👽 Pro 🅼 Monthly, 👽 Pro 🆀 Quarterly, 👽 Pro🅰 Annual, 👽 Pro👾Two Years)
| 47 | Nº Active Users
Nº Active Subscribers Titan Pro 👽: 5️⃣6️⃣ | 1✔️ 5✔️ 10✔️ 100❌ 1K❌ 10K❌ 50K❌ 100K❌ 1M❌ 10M❌ 100M❌ : ⏱ Active Users is updated every 24 hours (Check on indicator)
Nº Active Affiliates Titan Aff 🛸: 6️⃣ | 1✔️ 5✔️ 10❌ 100❌ 1K❌ 10K❌ 50K❌ 100K❌ 1M❌ 10M❌ 100M❌ : ⏱ Active Users is updated every 24 hours (Check on indicator)
2️⃣7️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : 🆑 Conservative
📊 Exchange: Binance
📊 Pair: BINANCE: BTCUSDTPERP
📊 TimeFrame: 4h
📊 Initial Capital: 10000 $
📊 Order Type: % equity
📊 Size Per Order: 100 %
📊 Commission: 0.03 %
📊 Pyramid: 1
• ⚠️ Risk Profile: 🆑 Conservative: 🎯 TP=2.7 % | 🛑 SL=2.7 %
• 📆All years: 🆑 Conservative: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
📆 Start: September 23, 2019
📆 End: January 11, 2023
📅 Days: 1221
📅 Bars: 7325
Net Profit:
🟢 + 1669.89 %
💲 + 166989.43 USD
Total Close Trades:
⚪️ 369
Percent Profitable:
🟡 64.77 %
Profit Factor:
🟢 2.314
DrawDrown Maximum:
🔴 -24.82 %
💲 -10221.43 USD
Avg Trade:
💲 + 452.55 USD
✔️ Trades Winning: 239
❌ Trades Losing: 130
✔️ Average Gross Win: + 12.31 %
❌ Average Gross Loss: - 9.78 %
✔️ Maximum Consecutive Wins: 9
❌ Maximum Consecutive Losses: 6
% Average Gain Annual: 499.33 %
% Average Gain Monthly: 41.61 %
% Average Gain Weekly: 9.6 %
% Average Gain Day: 1.37 %
💲 Average Gain Annual: 49933 $
💲 Average Gain Monthly: 4161 $
💲 Average Gain Weekly: 960 $
💲 Average Gain Day: 137 $
• 📆 Year: 2020: 🆑 Conservative: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2021: 🆑 Conservative: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2022: 🆑 Conservative: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
2️⃣8️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : Ⓜ️ Moderate
📊 Exchange: Binance
📊 Pair: BINANCE: BTCUSDTPERP
📊 TimeFrame: 4h
📊 Initial Capital: 10000 $
📊 Order Type: % equity
📊 Size Per Order: 100 %
📊 Commission: 0.03 %
📊 Pyramid: 1
• ⚠️ Risk Profile: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🎯 TP=2.8 % | 🛑 SL=2.7 %
• 📆 All years: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
📆 Start: September 23, 2019
📆 End: January 11, 2023
📅 Days: 1221
📅 Bars: 7325
Net Profit:
🟢 + 1472.04 %
💲 + 147199.89 USD
Total Close Trades:
⚪️ 362
Percent Profitable:
🟡 63.26 %
Profit Factor:
🟢 2.192
DrawDrown Maximum:
🔴 -22.69 %
💲 -9269.33 USD
Avg Trade:
💲 + 406.63 USD
✔️ Trades Winning: 229
❌ Trades Losing : 133
✔️ Average Gross Win: + 11.82 %
❌ Average Gross Loss: - 9.29 %
✔️ Maximum Consecutive Wins: 9
❌ Maximum Consecutive Losses: 8
% Average Gain Annual: 440.15 %
% Average Gain Monthly: 36.68 %
% Average Gain Weekly: 8.46 %
% Average Gain Day: 1.21 %
💲 Average Gain Annual: 44015 $
💲 Average Gain Monthly: 3668 $
💲 Average Gain Weekly: 846 $
💲 Average Gain Day: 121 $
• 📆 Year: 2020: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2021: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2022: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
2️⃣9️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : 🅰 Aggressive
📊 Exchange: Binance
📊 Pair: BINANCE: BTCUSDTPERP
📊 TimeFrame: 4h
📊 Initial Capital: 10000 $
📊 Order Type: % equity
📊 Size Per Order: 100 %
📊 Commission: 0.03 %
📊 Pyramid: 1
• ⚠️ Risk Profile: 🅰 Aggressive: 🎯 TP=1.6 % | 🛑 SL=6.9 %
• 📆 All years: 🅰 Aggressive: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
📆 Start: September 23, 2019
📆 End: January 11, 2023
📅 Days: 1221
📅 Bars: 7325
Net Profit:
🟢 + 989.38 %
💲 + 98938.38 USD
Total Close Trades:
⚪️ 380
Percent Profitable:
🟢 84.47 %
Profit Factor:
🟢 2.156
DrawDrown Maximum:
🔴 -17.88 %
💲 -9182.84 USD
Avg Trade:
💲 + 260.36 USD
✔️ Trades Winning: 321
❌ Trades Losing: 59
✔️ Average Gross Win: + 5.75 %
❌ Average Gross Loss: - 14.51 %
✔️ Maximum Consecutive Wins: 21
❌ Maximum Consecutive Losses: 6
% Average Gain Annual: 295.84 %
% Average Gain Monthly: 24.65 %
% Average Gain Weekly: 5.69 %
% Average Gain Day: 0.81 %
💲 Average Gain Annual: 29584 $
💲 Average Gain Monthly: 2465 $
💲 Average Gain Weekly: 569 $
💲 Average Gain Day: 81 $
• 📆 Year: 2020: 🅰 Aggressive: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2021: 🅰 Aggressive: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2022: 🅰 Aggressive: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
3️⃣0️⃣ : 🛠️ Roadmap
🛠️• 14/ 01 /2023 : Titan THEMIS Launch
🛠️• Updates January/2023 :
• 📚 Tutorials for Automation 🤖 already Available : ✔️
• ✔️ Discord
• ✔️ Wundertrading
• ✔️ Zignaly
• 📚 Tutorials for Automation 🤖 In Preparation : ⭕
• ⭕ Telegram
• ⭕ Twitter
• ⭕ 3comnas
• ⭕ Aleeert
• ⭕ Alertatron
• ⭕ Uniswap-v3
• ⭕ Copy-Trading
🛠️• Updates February/2023 :
• 📰 Launch of advertising material for Titan Affiliates 🛸
• 🛍️🎥🖼️📊 (Sales Page/VSL/Videos/Creative/Infographics)
🛠️• 28/05/2023 : Titan THEMIS update ▬ Version 2.7
🛠️• 28/05/2023 : BOT BOB release ▬ Version 1.0
• (Native Titan THEMIS Automation - Through BOT BOB, a bot for automation of signals, indicators and strategies of TradingView, of own code ▬ in validation.
• BOT BOB
Automation/Connection :
• API - For Centralized Brokers.
• Smart Contracts - Wallet Web - For Decentralized Brokers.
• This way users can automate any indicator or strategy of TradingView and Titan in a decentralized, secure and simplified way.
• Without having the need to use 'third party services' for automating TradingView indicators and strategies like the ones available above.
🛠️• 28/05/2023 : Release ▬ Titan Culture Guide 📝
3️⃣1️⃣ : 🧻 Notes ❕
🧻 • Note ❕ The "Demo 🐄" version, ❌does not have 'integrated automation', to automate the signals of this strategy and enjoy a fully automated system, you need to have access to the Pro version with '100% integrated automation' and all the tutorials for automation available. Become a Titan Pro 👽
🧻 • Note ❕ You will also need to be a "Pro User or higher on Tradingview", to be able to use the webhook feature available only for 'paid' profiles on the platform.
With the webhook feature it is possible to send the signals of this strategy to almost anywhere, in our case to centralized or decentralized brokerages, also to popular messaging services such as: Discord, Telegram or Twiter.
3️⃣2️⃣ : 🚨 Disclaimer ❕❗
🚨 • Disclaimer ❕❕ Past positive result and performance of a system does not guarantee its positive result and performance for the future!
🚨 • Disclaimer ❗❗❗ When using this strategy: Titan Investments is totally Exempt from any claim of liability for losses. The responsibility on the management of your funds is solely yours. This is a very high risk/volatility market! Understand your place in the market.
3️⃣3️⃣ : ♻️ ® No Repaint
This Strategy does not Repaint! This is a real strategy!
3️⃣4️⃣ : 🔒 Copyright ©️
Copyright © 2022-2023 All rights reserved, ® Titan Investimentos
3️⃣5️⃣ : 👏 Acknowledgments
I want to start this message in thanks to TradingView and all the Pinescript community for all the 'magic' created here, a unique ecosystem! rich and healthy, a fertile soil, a 'new world' of possibilities, for a complete deepening and improvement of our best personal skills.
I leave here my immense thanks to the whole community: Tradingview, Pinecoders, Wizards and Moderators.
I was not born Rich .
Thanks to TradingView and pinescript and all its transformation.
I could develop myself and the best of me and the best of my skills.
And consequently build wealth and patrimony.
Gratitude.
One more story for the infinite book !
If you were born poor you were born to be rich !
Raising🔼 the level and raising🔼 the ruler! 📏
My work is my 'debauchery'! Do better! 💐🌹
Soul of a first-timer! Creativity Exudes! 🦄
This is the manifestation of God's magic in me. This is the best of me. 🧙
You will copy me, I know. So you owe me. 💋
My mission here is to raise the consciousness and self-esteem of all Titans and Titanids! Welcome! 🧘 🏛️
The only way to accomplish great work is to do what you love ! Before I learned to program I was wasting my life!
Death is the best creation of life .
Now you are the new , but in the not so distant future you will gradually become the old . Here I stay forever!
Playing the game like an Athlete! 🖼️ Enjoy and Enjoy 🍷 🗿
In honor of: BOB ☆
1 name, 3 letters, 3 possibilities, and if read backwards it's the same thing, a palindrome. ☘
Gratitude to the oracles that have enabled me the 'luck' to get this far: Dal&Ni&Fer
3️⃣6️⃣ : 👮 House Rules : 📺 TradingView
House Rules : This publication and strategy follows all TradingView house guidelines and rules:
📺 TradingView House Rules: www.tradingview.com
📺 Script publication rules: www.tradingview.com
📺 Vendor requirements: www.tradingview.com
📺 Links/References rules: www.tradingview.com
3️⃣7️⃣ : 🏛️ Become a Titan Pro member 👽
🟩 Titan Pro 👽 🟩
3️⃣8️⃣ : 🏛️ Be a member Titan Aff 🛸
🟥 Titan Affiliate 🛸 🟥
Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Demo|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4hInvestment Strategy (Quantitative Trading)
| 🛑 | Watch "LIVE" and 'COPY' this strategy in real time:
🔗 Link: www.tradingview.com
Hello, welcome, feel free 🌹💐
Since the stone age to the most technological age, one thing has not changed, that which continues impress human beings the most, is the other human being!
Deep down, it's all very simple or very complicated, depends on how you look at it.
I believe that everyone was born to do something very well in life.
But few are those who have, let's use the word 'luck' .
Few are those who have the 'luck' to discover this thing.
That is why few are happy and successful in their jobs and professions.
Thank God I had this 'luck' , and discovered what I was born to do well.
And I was born to program. 👨💻
📋 Summary : Project Titan
0️⃣ : 🦄 Project Titan
1️⃣ : ⚖️ Quantitative THEMIS
2️⃣ : 🏛️ Titan Community
3️⃣ : 👨💻 Who am I ❔
4️⃣ : ❓ What is Statistical/Probabilistic Trading ❓
5️⃣ : ❓ How Statistical/Probabilistic Trading works ❓
6️⃣ : ❓ Why use a Statistical/Probabilistic system ❓
7️⃣ : ❓ Why the human brain is not prepared to do Trading ❓
8️⃣ : ❓ What is Backtest ❓
9️⃣ : ❓ How to build a Consistent system ❓
🔟 : ❓ What is a Quantitative Trading system ❓
1️⃣1️⃣ : ❓ How to build a Quantitative Trading system ❓
1️⃣2️⃣ : ❓ How to Exploit Market Anomalies ❓
1️⃣3️⃣ : ❓ What Defines a Robust, Profitable and Consistent System ❓
1️⃣4️⃣ : 🔧 Fixed Technical
1️⃣5️⃣ : ❌ Fixed Outputs : 🎯 TP(%) & 🛑SL(%)
1️⃣6️⃣ : ⚠️ Risk Profile
1️⃣7️⃣ : ⭕ Moving Exits : (Indicators)
1️⃣8️⃣ : 💸 Initial Capital
1️⃣9️⃣ : ⚙️ Entry Options
2️⃣0️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Third-Party Services'
2️⃣1️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Exchanges
2️⃣2️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Messaging Services'
2️⃣3️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : '🧲🤖Copy-Trading'
2️⃣4️⃣ : ❔ Why be a Titan Pro 👽❔
2️⃣5️⃣ : ❔ Why be a Titan Aff 🛸❔
2️⃣6️⃣ : 📋 Summary : ⚖️ Strategy: Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Demo|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4h
2️⃣7️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : 🆑 Conservative
2️⃣8️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : Ⓜ️ Moderate
2️⃣9️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : 🅰 Aggressive
3️⃣0️⃣ : 🛠️ Roadmap
3️⃣1️⃣ : 🧻 Notes ❕
3️⃣2️⃣ : 🚨 Disclaimer ❕❗
3️⃣3️⃣ : ♻️ ® No Repaint
3️⃣4️⃣ : 🔒 Copyright ©️
3️⃣5️⃣ : 👏 Acknowledgments
3️⃣6️⃣ : 👮 House Rules : 📺 TradingView
3️⃣7️⃣ : 🏛️ Become a Titan Pro member 👽
3️⃣8️⃣ : 🏛️ Be a member Titan Aff 🛸
0️⃣ : 🦄 Project Titan
This is the first real, 100% automated Quantitative Strategy made available to the public and the pinescript community for TradingView.
You will be able to automate all signals of this strategy for your broker , centralized or decentralized and also for messaging services : Discord, Telegram or Twitter .
This is the first strategy of a larger project, in 2023, I will provide a total of 6 100% automated 'Quantitative' strategies to the pinescript community for TradingView.
The future strategies to be shared here will also be unique , never before seen, real 'Quantitative' bots with real, validated results in real operation.
Just like the 'Quantitative THEMIS' strategy, it will be something out of the loop throughout the pinescript/tradingview community, truly unique tools for building mutual wealth consistently and continuously for our community.
1️⃣ : ⚖️ Quantitative THEMIS : Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Demo|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4h
This is a truly unique and out of the curve strategy for BTC /USD .
A truly real strategy, with real, validated results and in real operation.
A unique tool for building mutual wealth, consistently and continuously for the members of the Titan community.
Initially we will operate on a monthly, quarterly, annual or biennial subscription service.
Our goal here is to build a great community, in exchange for an extremely fair value for the use of our truly unique tools, which bring and will bring real results to our community members.
With this business model it will be possible to provide all Titan users and community members with the purest and highest degree of sophistication in the market with pinescript for tradingview, providing unique and truly profitable strategies.
My goal here is to offer the best to our members!
The best 'pinescript' tradingview service in the world!
We are the only Start-Up in the world that will decentralize real and full access to truly real 'quantitative' tools that bring and will bring real results for mutual and ongoing wealth building for our community.
2️⃣ : 🏛️ Titan Community : 👽 Pro 🔁 Aff 🛸
Become a Titan Pro 👽
To get access to the strategy: "Quantitative THEMIS" , and future Titan strategies in a 100% automated way, along with all tutorials for automation.
Pro Plans: 30 Days, 90 Days, 12 Months, 24 Months.
👽 Pro 🅼 Monthly
👽 Pro 🆀 Quarterly
👽 Pro🅰 Annual
👽 Pro👾Two Years
You will have access to a truly unique system that is out of the curve .
A 100% real, 100% automated, tested, validated, profitable, and in real operation strategy.
Become a Titan Affiliate 🛸
By becoming a Titan Affiliate 🛸, you will automatically receive 50% of the value of each new subscription you refer .
You will receive 50% for any of the above plans that you refer .
This way we will encourage our community to grow in a fair and healthy way, because we know what we have in our hands and what we deliver real value to our users.
We are at the highest level of sophistication in the market, the consistency here and the results here speak for themselves.
So growing our community means growing mutual wealth and raising collective conscience.
Wealth must be created not divided.
And here we are creating mutual wealth on all ends and in all ways.
A non-zero sum system, where everybody wins.
3️⃣ : 👨💻 Who am I ❔
My name is FilipeSoh I am 26 years old, Technical Analyst, Trader, Computer Engineer, pinescript Specialist, with extensive experience in several languages and technologies.
For the last 4 years I have been focusing on developing, editing and creating pinescript indicators and strategies for Tradingview for people and myself.
Full-time passionate workaholic pinescript developer with over 10,000 hours of pinescript development.
• Pinescript expert ▬Tradingview.
• Specialist in Automated Trading
• Specialist in Quantitative Trading.
• Statistical/Probabilistic Trading Specialist - Mark Douglas Scholl.
• Inventor of the 'Classic Forecast' Indicators.
• Inventor of the 'Backtest Table'.
4️⃣ : ❓ What is Statistical/Probabilistic Trading ❓
Statistical/probabilistic trading is the only way to get a positive mathematical expectation regarding the market and consequently that is the only way to make money consistently from it.
I will present below some more details about the Quantitative THEMIS strategy, it is a real strategy, tested, validated and in real operation, 'Skin in the Game' , a consistent way to make money with statistical/probabilistic trading in a 100% automated.
I am a Technical Analyst , I used to be a Discretionary Trader , today I am 100% a Statistical Trader .
I've gotten rich and made a lot of money, and I've also lost a lot with 'leverage'.
That was a few years ago.
The book that changed everything for me was "Trading in The Zone" by Mark Douglas.
That's when I understood that the market is just a game of statistics and probability, like a casino!
It was then that I understood that the human brain is not prepared for trading, because it involves triggers and mental emotions.
And emotions in trading and in making trading decisions do not go well together, not in the long run, because you always have the burden of being wrong with the outcome of that particular position.
But remembering that the market is just a statistical game!
5️⃣ : ❓ How Statistical/Probabilistic Trading works ❓
Let's use a 'coin' as an example:
If we toss a 'coin' up 10 times.
Do you agree that it is impossible for us to know exactly the result of the 'plays' before they actually happen?
As in the example above, would you agree, that we cannot "guess" the outcome of a position before it actually happens?
As much as we cannot "guess" whether the coin will drop heads or tails on each flip.
We can analyze the "backtest" of the 10 moves made with that coin:
If we analyze the 10 moves and count the number of times the coin fell heads or tails in a specific sequence, we then have a percentage of times the coin fell heads or tails, so we have a 'backtest' of those moves.
Then on the next flip we can now assume a point or a favorable position for one side, the side with the highest probability .
In a nutshell, this is more or less how probabilistic statistical trading works.
As Statistical Traders we can never say whether such a Trader/Position we take will be a winner or a loser.
But still we can have a positive and consistent result in a "sequence" of trades, because before we even open a position, backtests have already been performed so we identify an anomaly and build a system that will have a positive statistical advantage in our favor over the market.
The advantage will not be in one trade itself, but in the "sequence" of trades as a whole!
Because our system will work like a casino, having a positive mathematical expectation relative to the players/market.
Design, develop, test models and systems that can take advantage of market anomalies, until they change.
Be the casino! - Mark Douglas
6️⃣ : ❓ Why use a Statistical/Probabilistic system ❓
In recent years I have focused and specialized in developing 100% automated trading systems, essentially for the cryptocurrency market.
I have developed many extremely robust and efficient systems, with positive mathematical expectation towards the market.
These are not complex systems per se , because here we want to avoid 'over-optimization' as much as possible.
As Da Vinci said: "Simplicity is the highest degree of sophistication".
I say this because I have tested, tried and developed hundreds of systems/strategies.
I believe I have programmed more than 10,000 unique indicators/strategies, because this is my passion and purpose in life.
I am passionate about what I do, completely!
I love statistical trading because it is the only way to get consistency in the long run!
This is why I have studied, applied, developed, and specialized in 100% automated cryptocurrency trading systems.
The reason why our systems are extremely "simple" is because, as I mentioned before, in statistical trading we want to exploit the market anomaly to the maximum, that is, this anomaly will change from time to time, usually we can exploit a trading system efficiently for about 6 to 12 months, or for a few years, that is; for fixed 'scalpers' systems.
Because at some point these anomalies will be identified , and from the moment they are identified they will be exploited and will stop being anomalies .
With the system presented here; you can even copy the indicators and input values shared here;
However; what I have to offer you is: it is me , our team , and our community !
That is, we will constantly monitor this system, for life , because our goal here is to create a unique , perpetual , profitable , and consistent system for our community.
Myself , our team and our community will keep this script periodically updated , to ensure the positive mathematical expectation of it.
So we don't mind sharing the current parameters and values , because the real value is also in the future updates that this system will receive from me and our team , guided by our culture and our community of real users !
As we are hosted on 'tradingview', all future updates for this strategy, will be implemented and updated automatically on your tradingview account.
What we want here is: to make sure you get gains from our system, because if you get gains , our ecosystem will grow as a whole in a healthy and scalable way, so we will be generating continuous mutual wealth and raising the collective consciousness .
People Need People: 3️⃣🅿
7️⃣ : ❓ Why the human brain is not prepared to do Trading ❓
Today my greatest skill is to develop statistically profitable and 100% automated strategies for 'pinescript' tradingview.
Note that I said: 'profitable' because in fact statistical trading is the only way to make money in a 'consistent' way from the market.
And consequently have a positive wealth curve every cycle, because we will be based on mathematics, not on feelings and news.
Because the human brain is not prepared to do trading.
Because trading is connected to the decision making of the cerebral cortex.
And the decision making is automatically linked to emotions, and emotions don't match with trading decision making, because in those moments, we can feel the best and also the worst sensations and emotions, and this certainly affects us and makes us commit grotesque mistakes!
That's why the human brain is not prepared to do trading.
If you want to participate in a fully automated, profitable and consistent trading system; be a Titan Pro 👽
I believe we are walking an extremely enriching path here, not only in terms of financial returns for our community, but also in terms of knowledge about probabilistic and automated statistical trading.
You will have access to an extremely robust system, which was built upon very strong concepts and foundations, and upon the world's main asset in a few years: Bitcoin .
We are the tip of the best that exists in the cryptocurrency market when it comes to probabilistic and automated statistical trading.
Result is result! Me being dressed or naked.
This is just the beginning!
But there is a way to consistently make money from the market.
Being the Casino! - Mark Douglas
8️⃣ : ❓ What is Backtest ❓
Imagine the market as a purely random system, but even in 'randomness' there are patterns.
So now imagine the market and statistical trading as follows:
Repeating the above 'coin' example, let's think of it as follows:
If we toss a coin up 10 times again.
It is impossible to know which flips will have heads or tails, correct?
But if we analyze these 10 tosses, then we will have a mathematical statistic of the past result, for example, 70 % of the tosses fell 'heads'.
That is:
7 moves fell on "heads" .
3 moves fell on "tails" .
So based on these conditions and on the generic backtest presented here, we could adopt " heads " as our system of moves, to have a statistical and probabilistic advantage in relation to the next move to be performed.
That is, if you define a system, based on backtests , that has a robust positive mathematical expectation in relation to the market you will have a profitable system.
For every move you make you will have a positive statistical advantage in your favor over the market before you even make the move.
Like a casino in relation to all its players!
The casino does not have an advantage over one specific player, but over all players, because it has a positive mathematical expectation about all the moves that night.
The casino will always have a positive statistical advantage over its players.
Note that there will always be real players who will make real, million-dollar bankrolls that night, but this condition is already built into the casino's 'strategy', which has a pre-determined positive statistical advantage of that night as a whole.
Statistical trading is the same thing, as long as you don't understand this you will keep losing money and consistently.
9️⃣ : ❓ How to build a Consistent system ❓
See most traders around the world perform trades believing that that specific position taken will make them filthy rich, because they simply believe faithfully that the position taken will be an undoubted winner, based on a trader's methodology: 'trading a trade' without analyzing the whole context, just using 'empirical' aspects in their system.
But if you think of trading, as a sequence of moves.
You see, 'a sequence' !
When we think statistically, it doesn't matter your result for this , or for the next specific trade , but the final sequence of trades as a whole.
As the market has a random system of results distribution , if your system has a positive statistical advantage in relation to the market, at the end of that sequence you'll have the biggest probability of having a winning bank.
That's how you do real trading!
And with consistency!
Trading is a long term game, but when you change the key you realize that it is a simple game to make money in a consistent way from the market, all you need is patience.
Even more when we are based on Bitcoin, which has its 'Halving' effect where, in theory, we will never lose money in 3 to 4 years intervals, due to its scarcity and the fact that Bitcoin is the 'discovery of digital scarcity' which makes it the digital gold, we believe in this thesis and we follow Satoshi's legacy.
So align Bitcoin with a probabilistic statistical trading system with a positive mathematical expectation of the market and 100% automated with the long term, and all you need is patience, and you will become rich.
In fact Bitcoin by itself is already a path, buy, wait for each halving and your wealth will be maintained.
No inflation, unlike fiat currencies.
This is a complete and extremely robust strategy, with the most current possible and 'not possible' techniques involved and applied here.
Today I am at another level in developing 100% automated 'quantitative' strategies.
I was born for this!
🔟 : ❓ What is a Quantitative Trading system ❓
In addition to having access to a revolutionary strategy you will have access to disruptive 100% multifunctional tables with the ability to perform 'backtests' for better tracking and monitoring of your system on a customized basis.
I would like to emphasize one thing, and that is that you keep this in mind.
Today my greatest skill in 'pinescript' is to build indicators, but mainly strategies, based on statistical and probabilistic trading, with a postive mathematical expectation in relation to the market, in a 100% automated way.
This with the goal of building a consistent and continuous positive equity curve through mathematics using data, converting it into statistical / probabilistic parameters and applying them to a Quantitative model.
Before becoming a Quantitative Trader , I was a Technical Analyst and a Discretionary Trader .
First as a position trader and then as a day trader.
Before becoming a Trader, I trained myself as a Technical Analyst , to masterly understand the shape and workings of the market in theory.
But everything changed when I met 'Mark Douglas' , when I got to know his works, that's when my head exploded 🤯, and I started to understand the market for good!
The market is nothing more than a 'random' system of distributing results.
See that I said: 'random' .
Do yourself a mental exercise.
Is there really such a thing as random ?
I believe not, as far as we know maybe the 'singularity'.
So thinking this way, to translate, the market is nothing more than a game of probability, statistics and pure mathematics.
Like a casino!
What happens is that most traders, whenever they take a position, take it with all the empirical certainty that such position will win or lose, and do not take into consideration the total sequence of results to understand their place in the market.
Understanding your place in the market gives you the ability to create and design systems that can exploit the present market anomaly, and thus make money statistically, consistently, and 100% automated.
Thinking of it this way, it is easy to make money from the market.
There are many ways to make money from the market, but the only consistent way I know of is through 'probabilistic and automated statistical trading'.
1️⃣1️⃣ : ❓ How to build a Quantitative Trading system ❓
There are some fundamental points that must be addressed here in order to understand what makes up a system based on statistics and probability applied to a quantitative model.
When we talk about 'discretionary' trading, it is a trading system based on human decisions after the defined 'empirical' conditions are met.
It is quite another thing to build a fully automated system without any human interference/interaction .
That said:
Building a statistically profitable system is perfectly possible, but this is a high level task , but with possible high rewards and consistent gains.
Here you will find a real "Skin In The Game" strategy.
With all due respect, but the vast majority of traders who post strategies on TradingView do not understand what they are doing.
Most of them do not understand the minimum complexity involved in the main variable for the construction of a real strategy, the mother variable: "strategy".
I say this by my own experience, because I have analyzed practically all the existing publications of TradingView + 200,000 indicators and strategies.
I breathe pinescript, I eat pinescript, I sleep pinescript, I bathe pinescript, I live TradingView.
But the main advantage for the TradingView users, is that all entry and exit orders made by this strategy can be checked and analyzed thoroughly, to validate and prove the veracity of this strategy, because this is a 100% real strategy.
Here there is a huge world of possibilities, but only one way to build a 'pinescript strategy' that will work correctly aligned to the real world with real results .
There are some fundamental points to take into consideration when building a profitable trading system:
The most important of these for me is: 'DrawDown' .
Followed by: 'Hit Rate' .
And only after that we use the parameter: 'Profit'.
See, this is because here, we are dealing with the 'imponderable' , and anything can happen in this scenario.
But there is one thing that makes us sleep peacefully at night, and that is: controlling losses .
That is, in other words: controlling the DrawDown .
The amateur is concerned with 'winning', the professional is concerned with conserving capital.
If we have the losses under control, then we can move on to the other two parameters: hit rate and profit.
See, the second most important factor in building a system is the hit rate.
I say this from my own experience.
I have worked with many systems with a 'low hit rate', but extremely profitable.
For example: systems with hit rates of 40 to 50%.
But as much as statistically and mathematically the profit is rewarding, operating systems with a low hit rate is always very stressful psychologically.
That's why there are two big reasons why when I build an automated trading system, I focus on the high hit rate of the system, they are
1 - To reduce psychological damage as much as possible .
2 - And more important , when we create a system with a 'high hit rate' , there is a huge intrinsic advantage here, that most statistic traders don't take in consideration.
That is: knowing more quickly when the system stops being functional.
The main advantage of a system with a high hit rate is: to identify when the system stops being functional and stop exploiting the market's anomaly.
Look: When we are talking about trading and random distribution of results on the market, do you agree that when we create a trading system, we are focused on exploring some anomaly of that market?
When that anomaly is verified by the market, it will stop being functional with time.
That's why trading systems, 'scalpers', especially for cryptocurrencies, need constant monitoring, quarterly, semi-annually or annually.
Because market movements change from time to time.
Because we go through different cycles from time to time, such as congestion cycles, accumulation , distribution , volatility , uptrends and downtrends .
1️⃣2️⃣ : ❓ How to Exploit Market Anomalies ❓
You see there is a very important point that must be stressed here.
As we are always trying to exploit an 'anomaly' in the market.
So the 'number' of indicators/tools that will integrate the system is of paramount importance.
But most traders do not take this into consideration.
To build a professional, robust, consistent, and profitable system, you don't need to use hundreds of indicators to build your setup.
This will actually make it harder to read when the setup stops working and needs some adjustment.
So focusing on a high hit rate is very important here, this is a fundamental principle that is widely ignored , and with a high hit rate, we can know much more accurately when the system is no longer functional much faster.
As Darwin said: "It is not the strongest or the most intelligent that wins the game of life, it is the most adapted.
So simple systems, as contradictory as it may seem, are more efficient, because they help to identify inflection points in the market much more quickly.
1️⃣3️⃣ : ❓ What Defines a Robust, Profitable and Consistent System ❓
See I have built, hundreds of thousands of indicators and 'pinescript' strategies, hundreds of thousands.
This is an extremely professional, robust and profitable system.
Based on the currency pairs: BTC /USDT
There are many ways and avenues to build a profitable trading setup/system.
And actually this is not a difficult task, taking in consideration, as the main factor here, that our trading and investment plan is for the long term, so consequently we will face scenarios with less noise.
He who is in a hurry eats raw.
As mentioned before.
Defining trends in pinescript is technically a simple task, the hardest task is to determine congestion zones with low volume and volatility, it's in these moments that many false signals are generated, and consequently is where most setups face their maximum DrawDown.
That's why this strategy was strictly and thoroughly planned, built on a very solid foundation, to avoid as much noise as possible, for a positive and consistent equity curve in each market cycle, 'Consistency' is our 'Mantra' around here.
1️⃣4️⃣ : 🔧 Fixed Technical
• Strategy: Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Demo|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4h
• Pair: BTC/USDTP
• Time Frame: 4 hours
• Broker: Binance (Recommended)
For a more conservative scenario, we have built the Quantitative THEMIS for the 4h time frame, with the main focus on consistency.
So we can avoid noise as much as possible!
1️⃣5️⃣ : ❌ Fixed Outputs : 🎯 TP(%) & 🛑SL(%)
In order to build a 'perpetual' system specific to BTC/USDT, it took a lot of testing, and more testing, and a lot of investment and research.
There is one initial and fundamental point that we can address to justify the incredible consistency presented here.
That fundamental point is our exit via Take Profit or Stop Loss percentage (%).
🎯 Take Profit (%)
🛑 Stop Loss (%)
See, today I have been testing some more advanced backtesting models for some cryptocurrency systems.
In which I perform 'backtest of backtest', i.e. we use a set of strategies each focused on a principle, operating individually, but they are part of something unique, i.e. we do 'backtests' of 'backtests' together.
What I mean is that we do a lot of backtesting around here.
I can assure you, that always the best output for a trading system is to set fixed output values!
In other words:
🎯 Take Profit (%)
🛑 Stop Loss (%)
This happens because statistically setting fixed exit structures in the vast majority of times, presents a superior result on the capital/equity curve, throughout history and for the vast majority of setups compared to other exit methods.
This is due to a mathematical principle of simplicity, 'avoiding more noise'.
Thus whenever the Quantitative THEMIS strategy takes a position it has a target and a defined maximum stop percentage.
1️⃣6️⃣ : ⚠️ Risk Profile
The strategy, currently has 3 risk profiles ⚠️ patterns for 'fixed percentage exits': Take Profit (%) and Stop Loss (%) .
They are: ⚠️ Rich's Profiles
✔️🆑 Conservative: 🎯 TP=2.7 % 🛑 SL=2.7 %
❌Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🎯 TP=2.8 % 🛑 SL=2.7 %
❌🅰 Aggressive: 🎯 TP=1.6 % 🛑 SL=6.9 %
You will be able to select and switch between the above options and profiles through the 'input' menu of the strategy by navigating to the "⚠️ Risk Profile" menu.
You can then select, test and apply the Risk Profile above that best suits your risk management, expectations and reality , as well as customize all the 'fixed exit' values through the TP and SL menus below.
1️⃣7️⃣ : ⭕ Moving Exits : (Indicators)
The strategy currently also has 'Moving Exits' based on indicator signals.
These are Moving Exits (Indicators)
📈 LONG : (EXIT)
🧃 (MAO) Short : true
📉 SHORT : (EXIT)
🧃 (MAO) Long: false
You can select and toggle between the above options through the 'input' menu of the strategy by navigating to the "LONG : Exit" and "SHORT : Exit" menu.
1️⃣8️⃣ : 💸 Initial Capital
By default the "Initial Capital" set for entries and backtests of this strategy is: 10000 $
You can set another value for the 'Starting Capital' through the tradingview menu under "properties" , and edit the value of the "Initial Capital" field.
This way you can set and test other 'Entry Values' for your trades, tests and backtests.
1️⃣9️⃣ : ⚙️ Entry Options
By default the 'order size' set for this strategy is 100 % of the 'initial capital' on each new trade.
You can set and test other entry options like : contracts , cash , % of equity
You should make these changes directly in the input menu of the strategy by navigating to the menu "⚙️ Properties : TradingView" below.
⚙️ Properties : (TradingView)
📊 Strategy Type: strategy.position_size != 1
📝💲 % Order Type: % of equity
📝💲 % Order Size: 100
Leverage: 1
So you can define and test other 'Entry Options' for your trades, tests and backtests.
2️⃣0️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Third-Party Services'
It is possible to automate the signals of this strategy for any centralized or decentralized broker, as well as for messaging services: Discord, Telegram and Twitter.
All in an extremely simple and uncomplicated way through the tutorials available in PDF /VIDEO for our Titan Pro 👽 subscriber community.
With our tutorials in PDF and Video it will be possible to automate the signals of this strategy for the chosen service in an extremely simple way with less than 10 steps only.
Tradingview naturally doesn't count with native integration between brokers and tradingview.
But it is possible to use 'third party services' to do the integration and automation between Tradingview and your centralized or decentralized broker.
Here are the standard, available and recommended 'third party services' to automate the signals from the 'Quantitative THEMIS' strategy on the tradingview for your broker:
1) Wundertrading (Recommended):
2) 3commas:
3) Zignaly:
4) Aleeert.com (Recommended):
5) Alertatron:
Note! 'Third party services' cannot perform 'withdrawals' via their key 'API', they can only open positions, so your funds will always be 'safe' in your brokerage firm, being traded via the 'API', when they receive an entry and exit signal from this strategy.
2️⃣1️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Exchanges
You can automate this strategy for any of the brokers below, through your broker's 'API' by connecting it to the 'third party automation services' for tradingview available and mentioned in the menu above:
1) Binance (Recommended)
2) Bitmex
3) Bybit
4) KuCoin
5) Deribit
6) OKX
7) Coinbase
8) Huobi
9) Bitfinex
10) Bitget
11) Bittrex
12) Bitstamp
13) Gate. io
14) Kraken
15) Gemini
16) Ascendex
17) VCCE
2️⃣2️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : 'Messaging Services'
You can also automate and monitor the signals of this strategy much more efficiently by sending them to the following popular messaging services:
1) Discord
2) Telegram
3) Twitter
2️⃣3️⃣ : ❓ How to Automate this Strategy ❓ : 🤖 Automation : '🧲🤖Copy-Trading'
It will also be possible to copy/replicate the entries and exits of this strategy to your broker in an extremely simple and agile way, through the available copy-trader services.
This way it will be possible to replicate the signals of this strategy at each entry and exit to your broker through the API connecting it to the integrated copy-trader services available through the tradingview automation services below:
1) Wundetrading:
2) Zignaly:
2️⃣4️⃣ : ❔ Why be a Titan Pro 👽❔
I believe that today I am at another level in 'pinescript' development.
I consider myself today a true unicorn as a pinescript developer, someone unique and very rare.
If you choose another tool or another pinescript service, this tool will be just another one, with no real results.
But if you join our Titan community, you will have access to a unique tool! And you will get real results!
I already earn money consistently with statistical and automated trading and as an expert pinescript developer.
I am here to evolve my skills as much as possible, and one day become a pinescript 'Wizard'.
So excellence, quality and professionalism will always be my north here.
You will never find a developer like me, and who will take so seriously such a revolutionary project as this one. A Maverick! ▬ The man never stops!
Here you will find the highest degree of sophistication and development in the market for 'pinescript'.
You will get the best of me and the best of pinescript possible.
Let me show you how a professional in my field does it.
Become a Titan Pro Member 👽 and get Full Access to this strategy and all the Automation Tutorials.
Be the Titan in your life!
2️⃣5️⃣ : ❔ Why be a Titan Aff 🛸❔
Get financial return for your referrals, Decentralize the World, and raise the collective consciousness.
2️⃣6️⃣ : 📋 Summary : ⚖️ Strategy: Titan Investments|Quantitative THEMIS|Demo|BINANCE:BTCUSDTP:4h
® Titan Investimentos | Quantitative THEMIS ⚖️ | Demo 🐄 2.6 | Dev: © FilipeSoh 🧙 | 🤖 100% Automated : Discord, Telegram, Twitter, Wundertrading, 3commas, Zignaly, Aleeert, Alertatron, Uniswap-v3 | BINANCE:BTCUSDTPERP 4h
🛒 Subscribe this strategy ❗️ Be a Titan Member 🏛️
🛒 Titan Pro 👽 🔗 🏛️ Titan Pro 👽 Version with ✔️100% Integrated Automation 🤖 and 📚 Automation Tutorials ✔️100% available at: (PDF/VIDEO)
🛒 Titan Affiliate 🛸 🔗 🏛️ Titan Affiliate 🛸 (Subscription Sale) 🔥 Receive 50% commission
📋 Summary : QT THEMIS ⚖️
🕵️♂️ Check This Strategy..................................................................0
🦄 ® Titan Investimentos...............................................................1
👨💻 © Developer..........................................................................2
📚 Signal Automation Tutorials : (PDF/VIDEO).......................................3
👨🔧 Revision...............................................................................4
📊 Table : (BACKTEST)..................................................................5
📊 Table : (INFORMATIONS).............................................................6
⚙️ Properties : (TRADINGVIEW)........................................................7
📆 Backtest : (TRADINGVIEW)..........................................................8
⚠️ Risk Profile...........................................................................9
🟢 On 🔴 Off : (LONG/SHORT).......................................................10
📈 LONG : (ENTRY)....................................................................11
📉 SHORT : (ENTRY)...................................................................12
📈 LONG : (EXIT).......................................................................13
📉 SHORT : (EXIT)......................................................................14
🧩 (EI) External Indicator.............................................................15
📡 (QT) Quantitative...................................................................16
🎠 (FF) Forecast......................................................................17
🅱 (BB) Bollinger Bands................................................................18
🧃 (MAP) Moving Average Primary......................................................19
🧃 (MAP) Labels.........................................................................20
🍔 (MAQ) Moving Average Quaternary.................................................21
🍟 (MACD) Moving Average Convergence Divergence...............................22
📣 (VWAP) Volume Weighted Average Price........................................23
🪀 (HL) HILO..........................................................................24
🅾 (OBV) On Balance Volume.........................................................25
🥊 (SAR) Stop and Reverse...........................................................26
🛡️ (DSR) Dynamic Support and Resistance..........................................27
🔊 (VD) Volume Directional..........................................................28
🧰 (RSI) Relative Momentum Index.................................................29
🎯 (TP) Take Profit %..................................................................30
🛑 (SL) Stop Loss %....................................................................31
🤖 Automation Selected...............................................................32
📱💻 Discord............................................................................33
📱💻 Telegram..........................................................................34
📱💻 Twitter...........................................................................35
🤖 Wundertrading......................................................................36
🤖 3commas............................................................................37
🤖 Zignaly...............................................................................38
🤖 Aleeert...............................................................................39
🤖 Alertatron...........................................................................40
🤖 Uniswap-v3..........................................................................41
🧲🤖 Copy-Trading....................................................................42
♻️ ® No Repaint........................................................................43
🔒 Copyright ©️..........................................................................44
🏛️ Be a Titan Member..................................................................45
Nº Active Users..........................................................................46
⏱ Time Left............................................................................47
| 0 | 🕵️♂️ Check This Strategy
🕵️♂️ Version Demo: 🐄 Version with ❌non-integrated automation 🤖 and 📚 Tutorials for automation ❌not available
🕵️♂️ Version Pro: 👽 Version with ✔️100% Integrated Automation 🤖 and 📚 Automation Tutorials ✔️100% available at: (PDF/VIDEO)
| 1 | 🦄 ® Titan Investimentos
Decentralizing the World 🗺
Raising the Collective Conscience 🗺
🦄Site:
🦄TradingView: www.tradingview.com
🦄Discord:
🦄Telegram:
🦄Youtube:
🦄Twitter:
🦄Instagram:
🦄TikTok:
🦄Linkedin:
🦄E-mail:
| 2 | 👨💻 © Developer
🧠 Developer: @FilipeSoh🧙
📺 TradingView: www.tradingview.com
☑️ Linkedin:
✅ Fiverr:
✅ Upwork:
🎥 YouTube:
🐤 Twitter:
🤳 Instagram:
| 3 | 📚 Signal Automation Tutorials : (PDF/VIDEO)
📚 Discord: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Telegram: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Twitter: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Wundertrading: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 3comnas: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Zignaly: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Aleeert: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Alertatron: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Uniswap-v3: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📚 Copy-Trading: 🔗 Link: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 4 | 👨🔧 Revision
👨🔧 Start Of Operations: 01 Jan 2019 21:00 -0300 💡 Start Of Operations (Skin in the game) : Revision 1.0
👨🔧 Previous Review: 01 Jan 2022 21:00 -0300 💡 Previous Review : Revision 2.0
👨🔧 Current Revision: 01 Jan 2023 21:00 -0300 💡 Current Revision : Revision 2.6
👨🔧 Next Revision: 28 May 2023 21:00 -0300 💡 Next Revision : Revision 2.7
| 5 | 📊 Table : (BACKTEST)
📊 Table: true
🖌️ Style: label.style_label_left
📐 Size: size_small
📏 Line: defval
🎨 Color: #131722
| 6 | 📊 Table : (INFORMATIONS)
📊 Table: false
🖌️ Style: label.style_label_right
📐 Size: size_small
📏 Line: defval
🎨 Color: #131722
| 7 | ⚙️ Properties : (TradingView)
📊 Strategy Type: strategy.position_size != 1
📝💲 % Order Type: % of equity
📝💲 % Order Size: 100 %
🚀 Leverage: 1
| 8 | 📆 Backtest : (TradingView)
🗓️ Mon: true
🗓️ Tue: true
🗓️ Wed: true
🗓️ Thu: true
🗓️ Fri: true
🗓️ Sat: true
🗓️ Sun: true
📆 Range: custom
📆 Start: UTC 31 Oct 2008 00:00
📆 End: UTC 31 Oct 2030 23:45
📆 Session: 0000-0000
📆 UTC: UTC
| 9 | ⚠️ Risk Profile
✔️🆑 Conservative: 🎯 TP=2.7 % 🛑 SL=2.7 %
❌Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🎯 TP=2.8 % 🛑 SL=2.7 %
❌🅰 Aggressive: 🎯 TP=1.6 % 🛑 SL=6.9 %
| 10 | 🟢 On 🔴 Off : (LONG/SHORT)
🟢📈 LONG: true
🟢📉 SHORT: true
| 11 | 📈 LONG : (ENTRY)
📡 (QT) Long: true
🧃 (MAP) Long: false
🅱 (BB) Long: false
🍟 (MACD) Long: false
🅾 (OBV) Long: false
| 12 | 📉 SHORT : (ENTRY)
📡 (QT) Short: true
🧃 (MAP) Short: false
🅱 (BB) Short: false
🍟 (MACD) Short: false
🅾 (OBV) Short: false
| 13 | 📈 LONG : (EXIT)
🧃 (MAP) Short: true
| 14 | 📉 SHORT : (EXIT)
🧃 (MAP) Long: false
| 15 | 🧩 (EI) External Indicator
🧩 (EI) Connect your external indicator/filter: false
🧩 (EI) Connect your indicator here (Study mode only): close
🧩 (EI) Connect your indicator here (Study mode only): close
| 16 | 📡 (QT) Quantitative
📡 (QT) Quantitative: true
📡 (QT) Market: BINANCE:BTCUSDTPERP
📡 (QT) Dice: openai
| 17 | 🎠 (FF) Forecast
🎠 (FF) Include current unclosed current candle: true
🎠 (FF) Forecast Type: flat
🎠 (FF) Nº of candles to use in linear regression: 3
| 18 | 🅱 (BB) Bollinger Bands
🅱 (BB) Bollinger Bands: true
🅱 (BB) Type: EMA
🅱 (BB) Period: 20
🅱 (BB) Source: close
🅱 (BB) Multiplier: 2
🅱 (BB) Linewidth: 0
🅱 (BB) Color: #131722
| 19 | 🧃 (MAP) Moving Average Primary
🧃 (MAP) Moving Average Primary: true
🧃 (MAP) BarColor: false
🧃 (MAP) Background: false
🧃 (MAP) Type: SMA
🧃 (MAP) Source: open
🧃 (MAP) Period: 100
🧃 (MAP) Multiplier: 2.0
🧃 (MAP) Linewidth: 2
🧃 (MAP) Color P: #42bda8
🧃 (MAP) Color N: #801922
| 20 | 🧃 (MAP) Labels
🧃 (MAP) Labels: true
🧃 (MAP) Style BUY ZONE: shape.labelup
🧃 (MAP) Color BUY ZONE: #42bda8
🧃 (MAP) Style SELL ZONE: shape.labeldown
🧃 (MAP) Color SELL ZONE: #801922
| 21 | 🍔 (MAQ) Moving Average Quaternary
🍔 (MAQ) Moving Average Quaternary: true
🍔 (MAQ) BarColor: false
🍔 (MAQ) Background: false
🍔 (MAQ) Type: SMA
🍔 (MAQ) Source: close
🍔 (MAQ) Primary: 14
🍔 (MAQ) Secondary: 22
🍔 (MAQ) Tertiary: 44
🍔 (MAQ) Quaternary: 16
🍔 (MAQ) Linewidth: 0
🍔 (MAQ) Color P: #42bda8
🍔 (MAQ) Color N: #801922
| 22 | 🍟 (MACD) Moving Average Convergence Divergence
🍟 (MACD) Macd Type: EMA
🍟 (MACD) Signal Type: EMA
🍟 (MACD) Source: close
🍟 (MACD) Fast: 12
🍟 (MACD) Slow: 26
🍟 (MACD) Smoothing: 9
| 23 | 📣 (VWAP) Volume Weighted Average Price
📣 (VWAP) Source: close
📣 (VWAP) Period: 340
📣 (VWAP) Momentum A: 84
📣 (VWAP) Momentum B: 150
📣 (VWAP) Average Volume: 1
📣 (VWAP) Multiplier: 1
📣 (VWAP) Diviser: 2
| 24 | 🪀 (HL) HILO
🪀 (HL) Type: SMA
🪀 (HL) Function: Maverick🧙
🪀 (HL) Source H: high
🪀 (HL) Source L: low
🪀 (HL) Period: 20
🪀 (HL) Momentum: 26
🪀 (HL) Diviser: 2
🪀 (HL) Multiplier: 1
| 25 | 🅾 (OBV) On Balance Volume
🅾 (OBV) Type: EMA
🅾 (OBV) Source: close
🅾 (OBV) Period: 16
🅾 (OBV) Diviser: 2
🅾 (OBV) Multiplier: 1
| 26 | 🥊 (SAR) Stop and Reverse
🥊 (SAR) Source: close
🥊 (SAR) High: 1.8
🥊 (SAR) Mid: 1.6
🥊 (SAR) Low: 1.6
🥊 (SAR) Diviser: 2
🥊 (SAR) Multiplier: 1
| 27 | 🛡️ (DSR) Dynamic Support and Resistance
🛡️ (DSR) Source D: close
🛡️ (DSR) Source R: high
🛡️ (DSR) Source S: low
🛡️ (DSR) Momentum R: 0
🛡️ (DSR) Momentum S: 2
🛡️ (DSR) Diviser: 2
🛡️ (DSR) Multiplier: 1
| 28 | 🔊 (VD) Volume Directional
🔊 (VD) Type: SMA
🔊 (VD) Period: 68
🔊 (VD) Momentum: 3.8
🔊 (VD) Diviser: 2
🔊 (VD) Multiplier: 1
| 29 | 🧰 (RSI) Relative Momentum Index
🧰 (RSI) Type UP: EMA
🧰 (RSI) Type DOWN: EMA
🧰 (RSI) Source: close
🧰 (RSI) Period: 29
🧰 (RSI) Smoothing: 22
🧰 (RSI) Momentum R: 64
🧰 (RSI) Momentum S: 142
🧰 (RSI) Diviser: 2
🧰 (RSI) Multiplier: 1
| 30 | 🎯 (TP) Take Profit %
🎯 (TP) Take Profit: false
🎯 (TP) %: 2.2
🎯 (TP) Color: #42bda8
🎯 (TP) Linewidth: 1
| 31 | 🛑 (SL) Stop Loss %
🛑 (SL) Stop Loss: false
🛑 (SL) %: 2.7
🛑 (SL) Color: #801922
🛑 (SL) Linewidth: 1
| 32 | 🤖 Automation : Discord | Telegram | Twitter | Wundertrading | 3commas | Zignaly | Aleeert | Alertatron | Uniswap-v3
🤖 Automation Selected : Discord
| 33 | 🤖 Discord
🔗 Link Discord:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Discord ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Discord ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Discord ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Discord ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 34 | 🤖 Telegram
🔗 Link Telegram:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Telegram ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Telegram ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Telegram ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Telegram ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 35 | 🤖 Twitter
🔗 Link Twitter:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Twitter ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Twitter ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Twitter ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Twitter ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 36 | 🤖 Wundertrading : Binance | Bitmex | Bybit | KuCoin | Deribit | OKX | Coinbase | Huobi | Bitfinex | Bitget
🔗 Link Wundertrading:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Wundertrading ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Wundertrading ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Wundertrading ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Wundertrading ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 37 | 🤖 3commas : Binance | Bybit | OKX | Bitfinex | Coinbase | Deribit | Bitmex | Bittrex | Bitstamp | Gate.io | Kraken | Gemini | Huobi | KuCoin
🔗 Link 3commas:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 3commas ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 3commas ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 3commas ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 3commas ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 38 | 🤖 Zignaly : Binance | Ascendex | Bitmex | Kucoin | VCCE
🔗 Link Zignaly:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
🤖 Type Automation: Profit Sharing
🤖 Type Provider: Webook
🔑 Key: 🔒Titan Pro👽
🤖 pair: BTCUSDTP
🤖 exchange: binance
🤖 exchangeAccountType: futures
🤖 orderType: market
🚀 leverage: 1x
% positionSizePercentage: 100 %
💸 positionSizeQuote: 10000 $
🆔 signalId: @Signal1234
| 39 | 🤖 Aleeert : Binance
🔗 Link Aleeert:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Aleeert ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Aleeert ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Aleeert ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Aleeert ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 40 | 🤖 Alertatron : Binance | Bybit | Deribit | Bitmex
🔗 Link Alertatron:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Alertatron ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Alertatron ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Alertatron ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Alertatron ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 41 | 🤖 Uniswap-v3
🔗 Link Alertatron:
🔗 Link 📚 Automation: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Uniswap-v3 ▬ Enter Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Uniswap-v3 ▬ Exit Long: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Uniswap-v3 ▬ Enter Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
📱💻 Uniswap-v3 ▬ Exit Short: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 42 | 🧲🤖 Copy-Trading : Zignaly | Wundertrading
🔗 Link 📚 Copy-Trading: 🔒Titan Pro👽
🧲🤖 Copy-Trading ▬ Zignaly: 🔒Titan Pro👽
🧲🤖 Copy-Trading ▬ Wundertrading: 🔒Titan Pro👽
| 43 | ♻️ ® Don't Repaint!
♻️ This Strategy does not Repaint!: ® Signs Do not repaint❕
♻️ This is a Real Strategy!: Quality : ® Titan Investimentos
📋️️ Get more information about Repainting here:
| 44 | 🔒 Copyright ©️
🔒 Copyright ©️: Copyright © 2023-2024 All rights reserved, ® Titan Investimentos
🔒 Copyright ©️: ® Titan Investimentos
🔒 Copyright ©️: Unique and Exclusive Strategy. All rights reserved
| 45 | 🏛️ Be a Titan Members
🏛️ Titan Pro 👽 Version with ✔️100% Integrated Automation 🤖 and 📚 Automation Tutorials ✔️100% available at: (PDF/VIDEO)
🏛️ Titan Affiliate 🛸 (Subscription Sale) 🔥 Receive 50% commission
| 46 | ⏱ Time Left
Time Left Titan Demo 🐄: ⏱♾ | ⏱ : ♾ Titan Demo 🐄 Version with ❌non-integrated automation 🤖 and 📚 Tutorials for automation ❌not available
Time Left Titan Pro 👽: 🔒Titan Pro👽 | ⏱ : Pro Plans: 30 Days, 90 Days, 12 Months, 24 Months. (👽 Pro 🅼 Monthly, 👽 Pro 🆀 Quarterly, 👽 Pro🅰 Annual, 👽 Pro👾Two Years)
| 47 | Nº Active Users
Nº Active Subscribers Titan Pro 👽: 5️⃣6️⃣ | 1✔️ 5✔️ 10✔️ 100❌ 1K❌ 10K❌ 50K❌ 100K❌ 1M❌ 10M❌ 100M❌ : ⏱ Active Users is updated every 24 hours (Check on indicator)
Nº Active Affiliates Titan Aff 🛸: 6️⃣ | 1✔️ 5✔️ 10❌ 100❌ 1K❌ 10K❌ 50K❌ 100K❌ 1M❌ 10M❌ 100M❌ : ⏱ Active Users is updated every 24 hours (Check on indicator)
2️⃣7️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : 🆑 Conservative
📊 Exchange: Binance
📊 Pair: BINANCE: BTCUSDTPERP
📊 TimeFrame: 4h
📊 Initial Capital: 10000 $
📊 Order Type: % equity
📊 Size Per Order: 100 %
📊 Commission: 0.03 %
📊 Pyramid: 1
• ⚠️ Risk Profile: 🆑 Conservative: 🎯 TP=2.7 % | 🛑 SL=2.7 %
• 📆All years: 🆑 Conservative: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
📆 Start: September 23, 2019
📆 End: January 11, 2023
📅 Days: 1221
📅 Bars: 7325
Net Profit:
🟢 + 1669.89 %
💲 + 166989.43 USD
Total Close Trades:
⚪️ 369
Percent Profitable:
🟡 64.77 %
Profit Factor:
🟢 2.314
DrawDrown Maximum:
🔴 -24.82 %
💲 -10221.43 USD
Avg Trade:
💲 + 452.55 USD
✔️ Trades Winning: 239
❌ Trades Losing: 130
✔️ Average Gross Win: + 12.31 %
❌ Average Gross Loss: - 9.78 %
✔️ Maximum Consecutive Wins: 9
❌ Maximum Consecutive Losses: 6
% Average Gain Annual: 499.33 %
% Average Gain Monthly: 41.61 %
% Average Gain Weekly: 9.6 %
% Average Gain Day: 1.37 %
💲 Average Gain Annual: 49933 $
💲 Average Gain Monthly: 4161 $
💲 Average Gain Weekly: 960 $
💲 Average Gain Day: 137 $
• 📆 Year: 2020: 🆑 Conservative: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2021: 🆑 Conservative: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2022: 🆑 Conservative: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
2️⃣8️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : Ⓜ️ Moderate
📊 Exchange: Binance
📊 Pair: BINANCE: BTCUSDTPERP
📊 TimeFrame: 4h
📊 Initial Capital: 10000 $
📊 Order Type: % equity
📊 Size Per Order: 100 %
📊 Commission: 0.03 %
📊 Pyramid: 1
• ⚠️ Risk Profile: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🎯 TP=2.8 % | 🛑 SL=2.7 %
• 📆 All years: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
📆 Start: September 23, 2019
📆 End: January 11, 2023
📅 Days: 1221
📅 Bars: 7325
Net Profit:
🟢 + 1472.04 %
💲 + 147199.89 USD
Total Close Trades:
⚪️ 362
Percent Profitable:
🟡 63.26 %
Profit Factor:
🟢 2.192
DrawDrown Maximum:
🔴 -22.69 %
💲 -9269.33 USD
Avg Trade:
💲 + 406.63 USD
✔️ Trades Winning: 229
❌ Trades Losing : 133
✔️ Average Gross Win: + 11.82 %
❌ Average Gross Loss: - 9.29 %
✔️ Maximum Consecutive Wins: 9
❌ Maximum Consecutive Losses: 8
% Average Gain Annual: 440.15 %
% Average Gain Monthly: 36.68 %
% Average Gain Weekly: 8.46 %
% Average Gain Day: 1.21 %
💲 Average Gain Annual: 44015 $
💲 Average Gain Monthly: 3668 $
💲 Average Gain Weekly: 846 $
💲 Average Gain Day: 121 $
• 📆 Year: 2020: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2021: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2022: Ⓜ️ Moderate: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
2️⃣9️⃣ : 📊 PERFORMANCE : 🅰 Aggressive
📊 Exchange: Binance
📊 Pair: BINANCE: BTCUSDTPERP
📊 TimeFrame: 4h
📊 Initial Capital: 10000 $
📊 Order Type: % equity
📊 Size Per Order: 100 %
📊 Commission: 0.03 %
📊 Pyramid: 1
• ⚠️ Risk Profile: 🅰 Aggressive: 🎯 TP=1.6 % | 🛑 SL=6.9 %
• 📆 All years: 🅰 Aggressive: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
📆 Start: September 23, 2019
📆 End: January 11, 2023
📅 Days: 1221
📅 Bars: 7325
Net Profit:
🟢 + 989.38 %
💲 + 98938.38 USD
Total Close Trades:
⚪️ 380
Percent Profitable:
🟢 84.47 %
Profit Factor:
🟢 2.156
DrawDrown Maximum:
🔴 -17.88 %
💲 -9182.84 USD
Avg Trade:
💲 + 260.36 USD
✔️ Trades Winning: 321
❌ Trades Losing: 59
✔️ Average Gross Win: + 5.75 %
❌ Average Gross Loss: - 14.51 %
✔️ Maximum Consecutive Wins: 21
❌ Maximum Consecutive Losses: 6
% Average Gain Annual: 295.84 %
% Average Gain Monthly: 24.65 %
% Average Gain Weekly: 5.69 %
% Average Gain Day: 0.81 %
💲 Average Gain Annual: 29584 $
💲 Average Gain Monthly: 2465 $
💲 Average Gain Weekly: 569 $
💲 Average Gain Day: 81 $
• 📆 Year: 2020: 🅰 Aggressive: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2021: 🅰 Aggressive: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
• 📆 Year: 2022: 🅰 Aggressive: 🚀 Leverage 1️⃣x
3️⃣0️⃣ : 🛠️ Roadmap
🛠️• 14/ 01 /2023 : Titan THEMIS Launch
🛠️• Updates January/2023 :
• 📚 Tutorials for Automation 🤖 already Available : ✔️
• ✔️ Discord
• ✔️ Wundertrading
• ✔️ Zignaly
• 📚 Tutorials for Automation 🤖 In Preparation : ⭕
• ⭕ Telegram
• ⭕ Twitter
• ⭕ 3comnas
• ⭕ Aleeert
• ⭕ Alertatron
• ⭕ Uniswap-v3
• ⭕ Copy-Trading
🛠️• Updates February/2023 :
• 📰 Launch of advertising material for Titan Affiliates 🛸
• 🛍️🎥🖼️📊 (Sales Page/VSL/Videos/Creative/Infographics)
🛠️• 28/05/2023 : Titan THEMIS update ▬ Version 2.7
🛠️• 28/05/2023 : BOT BOB release ▬ Version 1.0
• (Native Titan THEMIS Automation - Through BOT BOB, a bot for automation of signals, indicators and strategies of TradingView, of own code ▬ in validation.
• BOT BOB
Automation/Connection :
• API - For Centralized Brokers.
• Smart Contracts - Wallet Web - For Decentralized Brokers.
• This way users can automate any indicator or strategy of TradingView and Titan in a decentralized, secure and simplified way.
• Without having the need to use 'third party services' for automating TradingView indicators and strategies like the ones available above.
🛠️• 28/05/2023 : Release ▬ Titan Culture Guide 📝
3️⃣1️⃣ : 🧻 Notes ❕
🧻 • Note ❕ The "Demo 🐄" version, ❌does not have 'integrated automation', to automate the signals of this strategy and enjoy a fully automated system, you need to have access to the Pro version with '100% integrated automation' and all the tutorials for automation available. Become a Titan Pro 👽
🧻 • Note ❕ You will also need to be a "Pro User or higher on Tradingview", to be able to use the webhook feature available only for 'paid' profiles on the platform.
With the webhook feature it is possible to send the signals of this strategy to almost anywhere, in our case to centralized or decentralized brokerages, also to popular messaging services such as: Discord, Telegram or Twiter.
3️⃣2️⃣ : 🚨 Disclaimer ❕❗
🚨 • Disclaimer ❕❕ Past positive result and performance of a system does not guarantee its positive result and performance for the future!
🚨 • Disclaimer ❗❗❗ When using this strategy: Titan Investments is totally Exempt from any claim of liability for losses. The responsibility on the management of your funds is solely yours. This is a very high risk/volatility market! Understand your place in the market.
3️⃣3️⃣ : ♻️ ® No Repaint
This Strategy does not Repaint! This is a real strategy!
3️⃣4️⃣ : 🔒 Copyright ©️
Copyright © 2022-2023 All rights reserved, ® Titan Investimentos
3️⃣5️⃣ : 👏 Acknowledgments
I want to start this message in thanks to TradingView and all the Pinescript community for all the 'magic' created here, a unique ecosystem! rich and healthy, a fertile soil, a 'new world' of possibilities, for a complete deepening and improvement of our best personal skills.
I leave here my immense thanks to the whole community: Tradingview, Pinecoders, Wizards and Moderators.
I was not born Rich .
Thanks to TradingView and pinescript and all its transformation.
I could develop myself and the best of me and the best of my skills.
And consequently build wealth and patrimony.
Gratitude.
One more story for the infinite book !
If you were born poor you were born to be rich !
Raising🔼 the level and raising🔼 the ruler! 📏
My work is my 'debauchery'! Do better! 💐🌹
Soul of a first-timer! Creativity Exudes! 🦄
This is the manifestation of God's magic in me. This is the best of me. 🧙
You will copy me, I know. So you owe me. 💋
My mission here is to raise the consciousness and self-esteem of all Titans and Titanids! Welcome! 🧘 🏛️
The only way to accomplish great work is to do what you love ! Before I learned to program I was wasting my life!
Death is the best creation of life .
Now you are the new , but in the not so distant future you will gradually become the old . Here I stay forever!
Playing the game like an Athlete! 🖼️ Enjoy and Enjoy 🍷 🗿
In honor of: BOB ☆
1 name, 3 letters, 3 possibilities, and if read backwards it's the same thing, a palindrome. ☘
Gratitude to the oracles that have enabled me the 'luck' to get this far: Dal&Ni&Fer
3️⃣6️⃣ : 👮 House Rules : 📺 TradingView
House Rules : This publication and strategy follows all TradingView house guidelines and rules:
📺 TradingView House Rules: www.tradingview.com
📺 Script publication rules: www.tradingview.com
📺 Vendor requirements: www.tradingview.com
📺 Links/References rules: www.tradingview.com
3️⃣7️⃣ : 🏛️ Become a Titan Pro member 👽
🟩 Titan Pro 👽 🟩
3️⃣8️⃣ : 🏛️ Be a member Titan Aff 🛸
🟥 Titan Affiliate 🛸 🟥
Strategy Builder Pro [ChartPrime]ChartPrime Strategy Creator Overview
The ChartPrime Strategy Builder offers traders an innovative, structured approach to building and testing strategies. The Strategy Creator allows users to combine, test, and automate complex strategies with many parameters.
Key Features of the ChartPrime Strategy Builder
1. Customizable Buy and Sell Conditions
The Strategy Creator provides flexibility in establishing entry and exit rules, with separate sections for long and short strategies. Traders can combine multiple conditions in each section to fine-tune when positions are opened or closed. For instance, they might choose to only buy when the indicator signals a buy and the Dynamic Reactor (a low lag filter) indicator shows a bullish trend. Users are able to pick, mix and match the following list of features:
Signal Mode: Select the type of assistive signals you are requiring. Provided are both trend following signals with self optimization using backtest results as well as reversal signals, aiming to provide real time tops and bottoms in markets. Both these signal modes can be fine tuned using the tuning input to refine signals to a trader's liking. ChartPrime Trend Signals leverage audio engineering inspired techniques and low-pass filters in order to achieve and attempt to produce lower lag response times and therefore are designed to have a uniqueness when compared to more classical trend following approaches.
The Dynamic Reactor: provides a simple band passing through the chart. This can provide assistance in support and resistance locations as well as identifying the trend direction expressed via green and red colors. Taking a moving average and applying unique adaptivity calculations gives this plot a unique and fast behavior.
Candlestick structures: analyze candlestick formation putting a spin on classical candlestick patterns and provide the most relevant formations on the chart. These are not classical and are filtered by further analyzing market activity. A trader's classic with a spin.
The Prime Trend Assistant: provides a trend following dynamic support and resistance level. This makes it perfect to use in confluence or as a filter for other supporting indicators. This is an adaptive trend following system designed to handle volatility leveraging filter kernels as opposed to low pass filters.
Money Flow: with further filters applied for early response to money flow changes in the market. This can be a great filter in trends.
Oscillator reversals: are built in leveraging an oscillator focusing on market momentum allowing users to enter based on market shifts and trends along with reversals.
Volume-Inspired Signals: determine overbought and oversold conditions, adding another layer of analysis to the oscillator. These appear as orange labels, providing a simple reading into a possible reversal.
The Volume Matrix: is a volume oscillator that shows whether money is flowing into or out of the market. Green suggests an uptrend with buyers in control, while red indicates a majority of sellers. By incorporating smoothed volume analysis, it distinguishes between bullish and bearish volumes, offering an early indication of potential trend reversals.
The True 7: is a middle-ranking system that evaluates the strength of a move and the overall trend, offering a numeric or visual representation of trend strength. It can also indicate when a trend is starting to reverse, providing leading signals for potential market shifts. Rather than using an oscillator, this offers the unique edge of falling into set categories, making understanding it simple. This can be a great confluence point when designing a strategy.
Take profits: These offer real-time suggestions from our algorithm on when it might be a good time to take profit. Using these as part of a strategy allows for great entries at bottoms and tops of trends.
Using features such as the Dynamic reactor have dual purposes. Traders can use this as both a filter and an entry condition. This allows for true interoperability when using the Strategy Builder. The above conditions are duplicated for short entries too allowing for symmetrical trading systems. By disabling all of the entry conditions on either long or short areas of the settings will create a strategy that only takes a single type of position. For example; a trader that just wants to take longs can disable all short options.
2. Layered Entries
Layered entries, a feature to enhance the uniqueness in the tool. It allows traders to average into positions as the market moves, rather than committing all capital at once. This feature is particularly useful for volatile markets where prices may fluctuate substantially. The Strategy Builder lets users adjust the number of layered entries, which can help in managing risk and optimizing entry points as well as the aggressiveness of the safety orders. With each safety order placed the system will automatically and dynamically scale into positions reducing the average entry price and hence dynamically adjust the potential take profits. Due to the potential complexities of exiting during multiple orders, a smart system is employed to automatically take profits on the layered system aiming to take profits at peaks of trends.
Users are able to override this smart TP system at the bottom of the settings instead targeting percentage profits for both short and long positions.
Entries lowering average buy price
The ability to adjust how quickly the system layers into positions can also be adjusted via the layered entries drop down between fast and slow mode where the slow mode will be more cautious when producing new orders.
3. Flexible Take Profit (TP) and Stop Loss (SL) Options
Traders can set their TP and SL levels according to various parameters, including ATR (Average True Range), risk-reward ratio, trailing stops, or specific price changes. If layered entries are active, an automatic TP method is applied by default, though traders can manually specify TP values if they prefer. This setup allows for precise control over trade exits, tailored to the strategy’s risk profile.
Provided options
The ability to use external take profits and stop losses is also provided. By loading an indicator of your choice the plots will be added to the chart. By navigating to the external sources area of the settings, users can select this plot and use it as part of a wider trading system.
Example: Let’s say a user has entries based on the inbuilt trend signals and wishes to exit whenever the RSI crosses above 70, they can add RSI to the chart, select crossing up and enter the value of 70.
4. Integrated Reinvestment for Compounding Gains
The reinvestment option allows traders to reinvest a portion of their gains into future trades, increasing trade size over time and benefiting from compounding. For example, a user might set 30% of each trade's profit to reinvest, with the remaining 70% allocated for risk management or additional safety orders. This approach can enhance long-term growth while balancing risk.
Generally in trading it can be a good approach to take profits so we suggest a healthy balance. This setting is generally best used for slow steady strategies with the long term aim of accumulating as much of the asset as possible.
5. Leverage and Position Sizing
Users can configure leverage and position sizing to simulate varying risk levels and capital allocations. A dashboard on the interface displays margin requirements based on the selected leverage, allowing traders to estimate trade sizes relative to their available capital. Whenever using leverage especially with layered entries it’s important to keep a close eye on the position sizes to avoid potential liquidations.
6. Pre-Configured Strategies for Immediate Testing
For users seeking a starting point, ChartPrime includes a range of preset strategies. These were developed and backtested by ChartPrime’s team. This allows traders to start with a stable base and adapt it to their own preferences. It is vital to understand that historical performance doesn't guarantee future success, and traders should be mindful of overfitting. These pre-built configurations offer a structured way and base to design strategies off of. These are also subject to changing results as new price action arrives and they become outdated. They serve the purpose of simply being example use cases.
7. In-Depth Specific Backtesting Ranges
The Strategy Builder includes backtesting capabilities, providing a clear view of how different setups would have performed over specified time periods. Traders can select date ranges to target specific market conditions, then review results on TradingView to see how their strategies perform across different market trends.
Example Use Case: Developing a Strategy
Consider a trader who is focused on long positions only and prefers a lower-risk strategy (note these tools can be used for all assets; we are using an undisclosed asset as an example). Using the Strategy Builder, they could:
- Disable short conditions.
- Set long entry rules to trigger when both the ChartPrime oscillator and Quantum Reactor indicators show bullish signals.
- Enable layered entries to improve average entry prices by adding to positions during market dips.
- Run a backtest over a two-year period to see historical performance trends, making adjustments as needed.
The backtest will show where entries and exits would have occurred and how layered entries may have impacted profitability.
8. Iterative design
Strategy builders and creating a strategy is often an iterative process. By experimenting and using logic; a trader can arrive at a more sustainable system. Analyzing the shortcomings of your strategy and iteratively designing and filtering them out is the goal. For example; let’s say a strategy has high drawdown, a user would want to tighten stop losses for example to reduce this and find a balance point between optimizing winning trades and reducing the drawdown. When designing a strategy there are generally tradeoffs and optimizing taking into consideration a wide range of factors is key. This also applies to filtering techniques, entries and exits and every variable in the strategy.
Let’s say a strategy was taking too many long positions in a downtrend and after you’ve analyzed the data, you come to the conclusion this needs to be solved. Filtering these using built in trend following tools can be a great approach and refining with logic is a great approach.
The Strategy Builder also takes into consideration those who seek to automate especially via reinvesting and leverage features.
Considerations
The ChartPrime Strategy Builder aims to help traders build clear, rule-based strategies without excessive complexity. As with all backtesting tools, it's crucial to understand that historical performance doesn't guarantee future success, and traders should be mindful of overfitting. This tool offers a structured way to test strategies against various market conditions, helping traders refine their approaches with data-driven insights. Traders should also ensure they enter the correct fees when designing strategies and ensure usage on standard candle types.
PSE, Practical Strategy EnginePSE, Practical Strategy Engine
A ready-to-use engine that is simple to connect your indicator to, simple to use, and effective at generating alerts for order-filled events during the real-time candle.
Great for
• Evaluating indicators on important metrics without the need to write a strategy script for backtesting.
• Using indicators with built-in risk management.
About The PSE
This engine accepts entry and exit signals from your indicator to provide trade signals for both long and short positions. The PSE was written for trading Funds (e.g. ETF’s), Stocks, Forex, Futures, and Cryptocurrencies. The trades on the chart indicate market, limit, and stop orders. The PSE allows for backtesting of trades along with metrics of performance based on trade-groups with many great features.
Note: A link to a video of how to connect your indicator(s) to the PSE is provided below.
Key Features
Trade-Grp’s
A Trade-Grp makes up one or more trade positions from the first position entering to the last position exiting. Using Trade-Grp’s instead of positions should help you better assess if the metric results fit your trading style.
Below are two (2) examples of a Trade-Grp with three (3) positions.
Metrics
A table of metrics is available if the “Show Metrics Table” checkbox is enabled on the Inputs tab, but metrics always show in the Data Window.
Examples of the Metrics Table are shown below.
• ROI (Return on Investment) and CAGR (Compound Annual Growth Rate) are based on the Avg Invest/Trade-Grp and are adjusted for dividends if the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox is enabled.
• Profit/Risked is based on Trade-Grp’s. Also known as reward/risk, as well as expectancy per amount risked. It determines the effectiveness of your strategy and provides a measure of comparison between your strategies. This is adjusted for dividends if the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox is enabled. In the Data Window the color is green when above the breakeven point of making a profit and red when below the breakeven point. In the Table the color is red if below the breakeven point, otherwise it is the default color. For example, using the 3 metrics tables above:
For every USD risked the profit is 1.709 USD.
For every BTC risked the profit is 0.832 BTC.
For every JPY risked the profit is 0.261 JPY.
• Winning % is based on Trade-Grp’s. In the Data Window the color is green when above the breakeven point of making a profit and red when below the breakeven point. In the Table the color is red if below the breakeven point, otherwise it is the default color.
The breakeven point is a relationship between the Profit/Risked and Winning % to indicate system profitability potential. Another way to assess trading system performance. For example, for a low Winning % a high Profit/Risked is needed for the system to be potentially profitable.
• Profit Factor (PF) is based on Trade-Grp’s. The dividend payment, if any, is not considered in the calculation of a win or loss. The “Include Dividends in Profit Factor” checkbox allows you the option to either include or not include dividends in the calculation of Profit Factor. The default is enabled.
Must enable the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox to include dividends in PF.
Including dividends in PF evaluates the trading strategy with a more overall profitability performance view.
Enable/Disable “Include Dividends in Profit Factor” checkbox also affects the Avg Trade-Grp Loss, and thus Equity Loss from ECL and % Equity Loss from ECL.
• Max Consecutive Losses are based on Trade-Grp’s.
• Nbr of Trade-Grp’s and Nbr of Positions.
These help you to determine if enough trades have occurred to validate your strategy. The Nbr of Positions is the count of positions on the chart. The TV list of trades in the Strategy Tester may indicate more than what is actually shown on the chart. The Data Window includes 'Nbr Strat Tester Trades', which equals the TV listing trades, to help you locate specific trades on the chart.
• Time in Market (%) is based on Trade-Grp’s and date range selected.
• Avg Invest/Trade-Grp will indicate the average amount of money invested in a Trade-Grp. This is adjusted for dividends if the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox is enabled.
• Equivalent Consecutive Losses, labeled as Equiv. Cons. Losses (ECL).
This value is determined by the Winning % and Nbr of Trade-Grp’s. This simulates the more likely case of a series of losses, then a small win, then another series of losses to form an equivalent consecutive losing streak. To lower the value, increase the Winning %.
• Equity Loss from ECL is the equity loss from the equivalent consecutive losses.
• % Equity Loss from ECL is the percent of equity loss from the equivalent consecutive losses.
Risk Management
• Pyramid rules enforce and maintain position sizing designated by you on the Inputs tab (% Equity to Risk, Up/Dwn Gap) & Properties tab (number of pyramids, slippage, and commission).
A pyramid position will not occur unless both its stop covers the last entry price with gap/slippage and commission cost of previous trade is covered. If take profit is enabled, a pyramid position will not occur unless commission cost of the trade is covered when take profit target is reached.
• Position sizing, stop-loss (SL), trailing stop-loss (TSL), and take profit (TP) are used.
• Wash sale prevention for applicable assets is enforced. Wash sale assets include stock and fund (e.g. ETF’s).
• No more than one entry position per candle is enforced .
Other Great Features
• Losing Trade-Grp’s indicated at the exit with label text in the color blue. Used to easily find consecutive losses affecting your strategy’s performance. The dividend payment, if any, is not considered in the calculation of a win or loss.
• Position values can be displayed on the chart. The number format is based on the min tick value, but is limited to 8 decimal places only for display purposes.
• Dividends per share and the amount can be displayed on the chart.
• Hold Days . This is the number of days to hold before allowing the next Trade-Grp. Can be a decimal number. This feature may help those trading on a cash account to avoid any settlement violations when trading the same asset.
• Date Filter. Partition the time when trading is allowed to see if the strategy works well across the date range selected. The metrics should be acceptable across all four (4) time ranges: entire range, 1st half, IQR (inter-quartile range), and 2nd half.
• Price gap amount identification. Used in determining if a pyramid entry may be profitable, and may be used in determining slippage amount to use.
• When TP is enabled, the PSE will only allow a pyramid position if the potential is profitable based on commission and price gap selected.
• Trade-Grp’s shown in background color: green for long positions and red for short positions.
• The PSE will alert you to update your stop-loss as the market changes if your exchange/broker does not allow for trailing stop-loss orders. Enable this option on the Inputs tab with Alert Chg TSL.
• The PSE will alert you if your drawdown exceeds Max % Equity Drawdown set on the Inputs tab.
• The PSE will send an alert to warn you of an expiring GTC order.
Some brokers will indicate the order is GTC, Good 'Till Cancelled, but there really is a time limit on the order and is typically 60-120 days. Therefore, the PSE will alert you if you've been in position for close to 60 days so you can refresh your order. The alert is typically a few days before the 60-day time period.
• For order fill alerts just use a {{placeholder}} in the Message of the alert. Details on how to enter placeholders is explained below.
• Identify same bar enter/exit for first entries and pyramids. This is shown in the Data Window as well. This can help you determine what stop-loss % works best for your trading style.
• Leverage trading information is displayed in the Data Window and applies to Trade-Grps.
Failed PosSize or Margin (%): Shows a zero if the failed-to-trade position size was less than 1 or shows the margin % which failed to meet the margin requirement set in the Properties tab. A flag will show on the bar where a failed-to-trade occurred. This is only applicable to the first position of a Trade-Grp. Position the cursor over the flag for the value to show in the Data Window.
Notional Value: total Trade-Grp position size x latest entry price x point value. The equity must be > notional value x margin requirement for a trade to occur.
Current Margin (%): must be greater than margin requirement set on the Properties tab in order for a trade to occur.
Margin Call Price: when enabled on the Style tab is displayed on both the chart and the Data Window as shown below.
PSE Settings
Pyramids
• Pyramiding requires the Stop Method to be set to either TSL or Both (meaning SL & TSL).
• The maximum number of pyramids is determined by the value entered in the Properties tab.
• Pyramid orders require the enter price to be higher than the previous close for Longs and lower than the previous close for Shorts.
• Pyramids also require the stop with gap/slippage to be higher than the last entry price for Longs, and lower than the last entry price for Shorts. This covers all previous positions and maintains position sizing.
• When take profit, TP, is enabled, the pyramids also require that they will be profitable when opening a position assuming they will reach TP. This is automatically adjusted by you with the Dwn Gap/Up Gap, Slippage, and Commission settings.
Inputs Tab
General Settings
Color Traded Background
Enable to change background color where in a trade. Green for long positions and red for short positions.
Show Losing Trade-Grp
Enable to show if losing Trade-Grp and is indicated by text in blue color. The last position may be at a loss, but if there was profit for the Trade-Grp, then it will not be shown as a loss .
Show Position Values
Enable to show the currency value of each position in gold color.
Include Dividends in Profit
This feature is only applicable if the asset pays dividends and the time frame period of the chart is 1D or less, otherwise ignored. The PSE assumes dividends are taken as cash and not reinvested.
Enable to adjust ROI, CAGR, Profit/Risked, Avg Invest/Trade-Grp, and Equity to include dividend payments. This feature considers if you were in position at least one day prior to the ex-dividend date and had not exited until after the ex-dividend date.
When Show Dividends is enabled it will display the payout in currency/share, as well as the total amount based on the number of shares the position(s) of the Trade-Grp are currently holding.
Include Dividends in Profit Factor
This checkbox allows you the option to either include or not include dividends in the calculation of Profit Factor. Must enable the “Include Dividends in Profit” checkbox to include dividends in PF. The dividend payment, if any, is not considered in the calculation of a win or loss.
Show Metrics Table
Options are font size and table location.
Alert Failed to Trade
Enable for the strategy to alert you when a trade did not happen due to low equity or low order size. Applicable only for the first position of a Trade-Grp.
Trade Direction
Options are 'Longs Only', 'Both', 'Shorts Only'.
Hold Days
This is the number of days to hold before allowing the next Trade-Grp. Applies only to the first trade position of a Trade-Grp. Where a Trade-Grp consists of the first position plus any pyramid positions.
The value entered will be overwritten to >= 31 to prevent wash sale for applicable assets in the event the last Trade-Grp was a loss. Wash sale assets include stock and fund (i.e. ETF’s).
The minimum value is the equivalent of 1 candle and is automatically assigned by the PSE if the entered value is equivalent to less than one candle. To calculate Hold Days in # of candles on the Hour chart divide the chart period by 24 x #candles. On the Minute chart divide the chart period by 60 then by 24 x #candles.
Show Vertical Lines at From Date & To Date
Shows a vertical dotted line at the From Date and To Date for visual inspection of the setting.
Date Filter
When enabled, trades are allowed between the From Date and To Date, i.e., the date range.
When disabled, trades are allowed for all candles.
Partition the time when trading is allowed to see if your indicator settings work well across the date range. Click 1st Half, IQR (inter-quartile range), or 2nd Half buttons to trade a portion of the date range.
Select only one at-a-time to partition the time when trading is allowed.
When 1st Half is enabled only trades for the 1st half of the date range are allowed.
When IQR is enabled only trades for the inter-quartile date range are allowed.
When 2nd Half is enabled only trades for the 2nd half of the date range are allowed.
Position Sizing
The % of Equity to Risk has been separated into two (2) areas: for initial trades and for pyramid trades. This allows for greater ability to maximize profits within your acceptable drawdown. A variation of the Anti-Martingale method from the initial trade if you choose to use it in that manner.
% Equity to Risk for Initial Trades: enter the percent of equity you want to risk per position for the initial trades of each Trade-Grp. For example, for 1% enter 1.
% Equity to Risk for Pyramid Trades: enter the percent of equity you want to risk per position for the pyramid trades of each Trade-Grp. For example, for 2% enter 2.
% Equity for Max Position Size: the position size will not exceed this amount. For example, for 25% enter 25.
Max % Equity Drawdown Warning: an alert will be triggered if the maximum drawdown exceeds this v alue. For example, for 10% enter 10.
Stop Methods
NOTE: The Stop Method must be either Both or TSL in order for the pyramids to work. This feature enforces position sizing.
Stop-loss, SL, and trailing stop-loss, TSL, are other features that enforce risk management.
The trailing stop-loss, TSL, is activated immediately if Stop Method = TSL. If Stop Method = Both, then the TSL is activated when its value is above stop-loss, SL, for Longs and below the SL for Shorts.
The calculated TSL value (shown on the chart by + symbol) of the previous bar is used for the current bar and the plot value is off by default, but you can it turn on via the Style tab. This is available so you can better understand how the TSL value used was calculated from. It is beneficial to show when monitoring the real-time candle.
Alert Chg TSL
When enabled, this feature will alert you to update your stop price if it moves greater than the change amount in %. The amount is the absolute % so will work for both Longs and Shorts. For example, for 1% enter 1 . This is provided since some exchanges/brokers do not offer TSL orders and you must manually adjust as price action plays out.
The alert will also suggest a stop limit price based on the gap selected and explained below.
The alert will occur at the close of the candle at the calculated TSL value of the candle just prior to the real-time candle.
Dwn Gap/Up Gap Input Settings
A price gap is the difference between the closing price of the previous candle and the opening price of the current candle. Dwn Gap and Up Gap are illustrated here.
The values of the Dwn Gap and Up Gap can be seen in the Data Window and are based on the settings of the Date Filter.
The options are “zero gap”, "median gap", "avg gap", "80 pct gap", "90 pct gap". The X pct gap stands for X percentile rank. For example, "80 pct gap" means that 80% of the gaps are less than or equal to the value shown in the Data Window. Select “zero gap” to disable this feature.
If Show Stop Limit is enabled, it will show a dotted-line below or above the current stop price where a stop-limit order should be taken. It is shown based on the gap option selected. Again, the PSE trades market, limit, and stop orders, but a stop-limit may be shown if you wanted to see where one would be set using the Up/Dwn Gap.
Dwn Gap: Affects Short Take Profit, Long Pyramid Entries, and to show the Long Stop Limit.
Up Gap : Affects Long Take Profit, Short Pyramid Entries, and to show the Short Stop Limit.
Fixed Take Profit (TP)
When take profit (TP) is enabled, the PSE will determine if opening a pyramid position will be in profit assuming the TP will be hit while considering commission costs (on Properties tab).
The larger of Up Gap or Slippage value is used with Long positions regarding TP.
The larger of Dwn Gap or Slippage value is used with Short positions regarding TP.
Properties Tab
• Initial Capital: Set as desired.
• Base Currency: Leave as Default. The PSE is designed to use the instrument’s currency, therefore leave as Default.
• Order Size: Leave as default. This setting has been disabled and position sizing is handled on the Inputs tab and is based on % of equity.
• Pyramiding: Set as desired.
• Commission: Set as number %. The PSE is designed to only work with commission as a percent of the position value.
• Verify Price for Limit Orders: Set as desired.
Slippage
Adjust Slippage on the Properties tab to account for a realistic bid-ask spread. You can use one of Dwn/Up Gap values or other guidelines. Again, the Dwn/Up Gap values are based on the Date Filter input settings.
Heed warnings from the TradingView Pine Script™ manual about values entered into the Slippage field.
The Slippage (ticks) have a noticeable influence on entry price and exit price especially at the beginning when the date range includes prices from $0.01 to $100,000.00 like that for BTC-USD INDEX. When this is the case, it is best to use different slippage values when partitioning time with the Date Filter.
To minimize the effects of slippage, yet account for it select ‘median gap’ on the Input Tab and use that value for slippage on the Properties tab.
The slippage value is included in the placeholder {{strategy.order.price}}.
Leverage Trading
The PSE is designed to be used both without leverage (the default) and with leverage.
These two settings apply to Trade-Grps. For example, for 5x leverage enter 20 (1/5x100=20).
Margin for Long Positions: Set as desired. The default is 100%.
Margin for Short Positions: Set as desired. The default is 100%.
This setting on the Inputs tab applies to each trade position within a Trade-Grp.
Max % Equity per Position: Set as desired. The default is 20% and intended for non-leverage trading. For leverage trading set as desired. For example, for 3x leverage enter 300 (3x100=300).
Recalculate After Order Is Filled
The PSE uses the strategy parameter calc_on_order_fills=true to allow for enter/exit on the same bar and generate alerts immediately after an order is filled. This parameter is on the Properties tab and is named ‘Recalculate After order is filled’ and is enabled by default.
Disabling this feature will cause the PSE to not work as intended.
You will see the following Caution! on the TV Strategy Tester
This occurs because the PSE has the strategy parameter calc_on_order_fills = true.
Again, the PSE will only work as intended if this parameter is enabled and set to true.
Therefore, you can close the caution sign and be confident of receiving realistic results.
Recalculate On every tick: Disable.
Fill Orders
• Using bar magnifier: Set as desired.
• On Bar Close: Disable. The PSE will not work as intended if this is enabled.
• Using Standard OHLC: Set as desired.
Using The Alert Message Box From TV Strategy Alert
Set alerts to gain access to all the alerts from PSE. This allows for both order filled alerts, as well as the alert function calls related to refresh GTC orders, drawdown exceeded, update stop-loss order, and Failed to Trade.
Example Message for Manual Trading Alerts
(This is just an example. Consult TV manual for possible placeholders to use.)
{
Alert for {{plot("position_for_alert")}} position. (long = 1; short = -1)
{{exchange}}:{{ticker}} on TF of {{interval}} at Broker Name
{{strategy.order.action}} Equity x Equity_Multiplier USD in shares at price = {{strategy.order.price}},
where Equity_Multiplier = {{strategy.order.contracts}} x {{strategy.order.price}} / {{plot("Equity")}}
or {{strategy.order.action}} {{strategy.order.contracts}} shares at price = {{strategy.order.price}}.
}
Note: Use the Equity x Equity_Multiplier method if you have several accounts with different initial capital.
Example Message for Bot Trading Alerts
(You must consult your specific bot for configuring the alert message. This is just an example.)
{
"action": "{{strategy.order.action}}",
“price”: {{strategy.order.price}}
"amount": {{strategy.order.contracts}},
"botId": "1234"
}
Connecting to the PSE
The diagram below illustrates how to connect indicators to the PSE.
The Aroon and MACD indicators are only used here as an example. Substitute your own indicators and add as many as you like.
Connection Indicator for the PSE
A video of how to connect your indicator(s) to the PSE is below.
The Connection Indicator for the PSE, also called here the connection-indicator.
Below is a description of how to connect your chosen indicators to the connection-indicator. Two (2) indicators were chosen for the example, but you may have one (1) or many indicators.
If you have source code access to your indicators you can paste the code directly into the connection-indicator to eliminate the need to have those indicators on the chart and the additional connection of them to the connection-indicator. Below will assume source code to the indicators are not available.
The MACD and Aroon Oscillator are from TV built standard indicators and are shown here just as an example for inputs (i.e. source) to the connection-indicator. They were configured as follows:
The source code for the connection-indicator is shown below. Substitute your own chosen indicators and add as many as you like to create your connection-indicator that feeds into the PSE. The MACD and Aroon Oscillator were simply chosen as an example. Configure your connection-indicator in the manner shown below.
// This Pine Script™ code is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public License 2.0 at mozilla.org
// This is just an example Indicator to show how to interface with the PSE.
// The indicators used in the example are standard TV built indicators.
//@version=5
indicator(title="Connection Indicator for the PSE", overlay=false, max_lines_count=500, max_labels_count=500, max_boxes_count=500)
// Ind_1 INDICATOR ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
// This is just and example and used MACD histogram as the source.
Filter_Ind_1 = input.bool(false, 'Ind_1', group='Ind_1 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~', tooltip='Click ON to enable the indicator')
input_Ind_1 = input.source(title = "input_Ind_1", defval = close, group='Ind_1 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~')
Entry_Ind_1_Long = Filter_Ind_1 ? input_Ind_1 > 0 ? 1 : 0 : 0
Entry_Ind_1_Short = Filter_Ind_1 ? input_Ind_1 < 0 ? 1 : 0 : 0
Exit_Ind_1_Long = Entry_Ind_1_Short
Exit_Ind_1_Short = Entry_Ind_1_Long
// Ind_2 INDICATOR ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
// This is just an example and used Aroon Oscillator as the source. Included limits to use with the oscillator to determine enter and exit.
Filter_Ind_2 = input.bool(false, "Ind_2", group='Ind_2 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~', tooltip='Click ON to enable the indicator')
Filter_Ind_2_Limit = input.int(35, minval=0, step=5, group='Ind_2 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~')
Filter_Ind_2_UL = Filter_Ind_2_Limit
Filter_Ind_2_LL = -Filter_Ind_2_Limit
up = input.source(title = "input_Ind_2A Up", defval = close, group='Ind_2 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~')
down = input.source(title = "input_Ind_2B Down", defval = close, group='Ind_2 INDICATOR ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~')
oscillator = up - down
Entry_Ind_2_Long = Filter_Ind_2? oscillator > Filter_Ind_2_UL ? 1 : 0 : 0
Entry_Ind_2_Short = Filter_Ind_2? oscillator < Filter_Ind_2_LL ? 1 : 0 : 0
Exit_Ind_2_Long = Entry_Ind_2_Short
Exit_Ind_2_Short = Entry_Ind_2_Long
//#region ~~~~~~~ASSEMBLY OF FILTERS ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~}
// You may have as many indicators as you like. Assemble them in similar fashion as below.
// ——————— Assembly of Entry Filters
Nbr_Entries = input.int(1, minval=1, title='Min Nbr Entries', inline='nbr_in_out', group='Assembly of Indicators')
// Update the assembly based on the number of indicators connected.
EntryLongOK = Entry_Ind_1_Long + Entry_Ind_2_Long >= Nbr_Entries? true: false
EntryShortOK = Entry_Ind_1_Short + Entry_Ind_2_Short >= Nbr_Entries? true: false
entry_signal = EntryLongOK ? 1 : EntryShortOK ? -1 : 0
plot(entry_signal, title="Entry_Signal", color=color.new(color.blue, 0))
// ——————— Assembly of Exit Filters
Nbr_Exits = input.int(1, minval=1, title='Min Nbr of Exits', inline='nbr_in_out', group='Assembly of Indicators', tooltip='Enter the minimum number of entries & exits
required for a signal.')
// Update the assembly based on the number of indicators connected.
ExitLongOK = Exit_Ind_1_Long + Exit_Ind_2_Long >= Nbr_Exits? true: false
ExitShortOK = Exit_Ind_1_Short + Exit_Ind_2_Short >= Nbr_Exits? true: false
exit_signal = ExitLongOK ? 1 : ExitShortOK ? -1 : 0
plot(exit_signal, title="Exit_Signal", color=color.new(color.red, 0))
//#endregion ~~~~~~~END OF ASSEMBLY OF FILTERS ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~}
The input box for the connection-indicator is shown below. The default for input source is “close”. For Input_Ind_1 click the dropdown and select the MACD Histogram. For Input_Ind_2 click the dropdown and select Aroon Up and Aroon Down as shown.
Signal Connection Section of PSE
Below is a description of how to connect your chosen indicators to the PSE from the connection-indicator.
At the PSE Input tab, the Signal Connection Section is where you select the source of the Entry and Exit Signal to the PSE. These are the outputs from connection-indicator.
The default source is “close”. Click the dropdown and select the entry and exit signal to establish a connection as shown below.
RunRox - Backtesting System (SM)RunRox - Backtesting System (SM) is designed for flexible and comprehensive testing of trading strategies, closely integrated with our RunRox - Signals Master indicator. This combination enhances your ability to refine strategies efficiently, providing you with insights to adapt and optimize your trading tactics seamlessly.
The Backtesting System (SM) excels in pinpointing the optimal settings for the RunRox - Signals Master indicator, efficiently highlighting the most effective configurations.
Capabilities of the Backtesting System (SM)
Optimal Settings Determination: Identifies the best configurations for the Signals Master indicator to enhance its effectiveness.
Timeframe-Specific Strategy Testing: Allows strategies to be tested over specific historical time periods to assess their viability.
Customizable Initial Conditions: Enables setting of initial deposit, risk per trade, and commission rates to mirror real-world trading conditions.
Flexible Money Management: Provides options to set take profits and stop losses, optimizing potential returns and risk management.
Intuitive Dashboard: Features a user-friendly dashboard that visually displays all pertinent information, making it easy to analyze and adjust strategies.
Trading Flexibility Across Three Modes:
Dual-Direction Trading: Engage in both buying and selling with this mode. Our dashboard optimizes and identifies the best settings for trading in two directions, streamlining the process to maximize effectiveness for both buy and sell orders.
Buy-Only Mode: Tailored for traders focusing exclusively on purchasing assets. In this mode, our backtester pinpoints the most advantageous sensitivity, speed reaction, and filter settings specifically for buying. Optimal settings in this mode may differ from those used in dual-direction trading, providing a customized approach to single-direction strategies.
Sell-Only Mode: Perfect for strategies primarily based on selling. This setting allows you to discover the ideal configurations for asset sales, which can be particularly useful if you are looking for optimal exit points in long-term transactions or under specific market conditions.
Here's an example of how profits can differ on the same asset when trading using two distinct strategies: exclusively buying or trading in both directions.
Above in the image, you can see how one-directional trading influences the results of backtests on historical data. While this does not guarantee future outcomes, it provides insight into how the strategy's performance can vary with different trading directions.
As you can also see from the image, one-directional trading has affected the optimal combination of settings for Sensitivity, Speed Reaction, and Filters.
Stop Loss and Take Profit
Our backtesting system, as you might have gathered, includes flexible settings for take profits and stop losses. Here are the main features:
Multiple Take Profits: Ability to set from 1 to 4 take profit levels.
Fixed Percentage: Option to assign a fixed percentage for each take profit.
Trade Proportion Fixation: Ability to set a fixed size from the trade for securing profits.
Stop Loss Installation: Option to establish a stop loss.
Break-Even Stop Loss: Ability to move the stop loss to a break-even point upon reaching a specified take profit level.
These settings offer extensive flexibility and can be customized according to your preferences and trading style. They are suitable for both novice and professional traders looking to test their trading strategies on historical data.
As illustrated in the image above, we have implemented money management by setting fixed take profits and stop losses. Utilizing money management has improved indicators such as profit, maximum drawdown, and profit factor, turning even historically unprofitable strategies into profitable ones. Although this does not guarantee future results, it serves as a valuable tool for understanding the effectiveness of money management.
Additionally, as you can see, the optimal settings for Signals Master have been adjusted, highlighting the best configurations for the most favorable outcomes.
Disclaimer:
Historical data is not indicative of future results. All indicators and strategies provided by RunRox are intended for integration with traders' strategies and should be used as tools for analysis rather than standalone solutions. Traders should use their own discretion and understand that all trading involves risk.
Gap Filling Strategy Gaps are market prices structures that appear frequently in the stock market, and can be detected when the opening price is different from the previous closing price, this is why gaps are also called "opening price jumps". While gaps can occur frequently, some of them are more significant than others, and can be observed when looking at a long term chart.
The following strategy is based on the exploitation of significant gaps occurring during a new session, and posses various options that can return a wide variety of results.
Type Of Gaps And Occurence
I'am not a professional when it comes to gaps, but as you know the stock market close for the day, however it is still possible to place orders, your broker will hold them until the market open back. Once the market reopen the broker execute the pending orders, and when many orders where pending the market register really high volume and the price might differ from the precedent close.
Gaps are generally broken down into four types:
Common : Gaps occurring within a certain price range, mostly occurs during ranging markets.
Break Away : Gaps breaking a support and resistance, making a new higher high/lower low.
Runaway : Gaps occurring within a trend, followed by a continuation of the trend.
Exhaustion : Gaps occurring at the end of a trend, followed by a reversal.
As said before, some gaps are more significant than others, the significance of a gap can be determined by comparing the opening price with the previous high/low price and by looking at volume. Significant up gaps will have an opening price greater than the previous high, while significant down gap will have an opening price lower than the previous low with both high volume accompanying them.
After a gap, when the price go back to the point previous to the gap we say that it has been "filled", this characteristic is what will be exploited in this strategy.
Strategy Rules & Logic
In this strategy, the significance of a gap is determined by the position of the opening price relative to the previous high/low and make sure the bar following the gap don't fill it.
When the setting invert is set to false the strategy interpret the detected gaps as being exhaustion gaps, therefore when an up gap occur a short position is opened, when a down gap occur a long position is opened. When invert is set to true gaps are considered to be runaway or break away gaps, therefore the contrary positions are opened. Positions are exited when the gap has been filled, which in the chart is show'n when the price cross the red level who act as either a take profit (invert = false) or as a stop loss (invert = true).
There are various closing conditions available that the user can select from the "close when" setting.
New Session : This option close all previous positions when the market is in a new session.
New Gap : This option close all previous position when a new gap has been detected.
Reverse Position : This option close all previous position when a contrary position to the current one is opened. This option would reduce the number of trades.
Testing On Some Stocks
The analysis will be tested in different tech stocks with a main TF of 15 minutes with no spread and commissions applied. Default settings will be used. We'll be making our first analysis using AMD, who has recently formed a full reverse HS pattern, where the neckline has been crossed by the price. (by the way i have a bad feeling about it, hey ! feeling filling ! Lame jokes!)
Profit: $ -12.22
Trades: 272
Profitability: 65.07 %
We can see negative results, with an heavily decreasing balance. Using invert would return positive results.
We will now test the strategy on NVDA, the company is one of the biggest when it comes to the Gpu market.
Profit: $ -215.54
Trades: 297
Profitability: 60.27 %
Not better, using invert would of course create better results. Like AMD the balance is heavily decreasing.
Finally we will test the strategy on Seagate technology, a company mostly known for their mechanical hard drives.
Profit: $ -4.32
Trades: 261
Profitability: 65.9 %
Here the balance does not appear so heavily decreasing and even managed to reach back the initial balance before going down again.
Summary
A strategy based on gap filling has been briefly introduced and tested with 3 tech stocks. The results show that using invert option might be better. The advantage of this strategy against ones using technical indicators is that this one does not heavily depend on user settings, which make it way more efficient, this a big advantage of patterns based strategies.
Thx to LucF for helping with the "process_orders_on_close" element, since i had to use closing price i had to remove it tho, was afraid results would differ even more from a more realistic backtest. And thx for those who continuously support me, more cool stuff is coming up.
Thx for reading and i hope you'll have learned something new today !
ThePawnAlgoPROThe Pawn algo PRO is an automated strategy that is useful to trade retracements and expansions using any higher timeframe reference.
Why is useful?
This algorithm is helpful to trade with the higher timeframe Bias and to see the HTF manipulations of the highs or lows once the candle open, usually in a normal buy candle will be a manipulation lower to end up higher. In a normal sell candle will be a manipulation higher to close lower. Once the potential direction of the Higher time frame candle is clear the algo will just enter on a trade on the lower timeframe aligned with the higher timeframe trend.
You can select any HTF you want from 1-365Days, 1-12Months or 1-52W ranges. Making this algorithm very flexible to adapt to any trader specialized timeframe.
How it works and how it does it?
It works with a simple but powerful pattern a close above previous candle high means higher prices and a close below previous candle low means lower prices, Close inside previous candle range means price is going to consolidate do some kind of retracement or reversal. The algo plots the candles with different colors to identify each of these states. And it does this in the HTF range plot.
This algo is similar to the previously released Pawn algo with the additional features that is an automated strategy that can take trade using desired risk reward and different entry types and trade management options. When the simple pattern is detected.
Also this version allows to plot the current developing HTF levels meaning the high, low and the 50%, plus the first created FVG(fair value gap introduced by ICT) in the range allowing to easily track any change in the potential direction of the HTF candle.
How to use it?
First select a higher timeframe reference and then select a lower timeframe, to visualize it better is recommended that the LTF is at least 10 times lower. Default HTF is 1 Week and LTF is 60min for trading the weekly expansions intraday.
Then we configure the HTF visualization it can be configure to show different HTF levels the premium/discount, wicks midpoints, previous levels, actual developing range or both. The Shade of the HTF range can be the body or the whole HTF range.
After that we configure the automated entries we can chose between buys only ,sell only entries or both and minimum risk reward to take a trade. Default value is 1.8RR and both entries selected. We can choose the maximum Risk Reward to avoid unrealistic targets default is 10RR. The maximum trades per HTF candle is also possible to select around this section.
Then we got the option to select which type of trade you want to take a trade around the open, the 50% or 75-80% or around the previous High for shorts or Low for longs. And off course the breakout entry that is for taking expansions outside previous HTF range. The picture below showcase an option using only entries on previous candles High or lows and 1Day as a HTF. You can also see the actual and previous HTF levels plotted.
Is important to take into account that these default settings are optimized for the MNQ! the 1W and 1H timeframes, but traders can adjust these settings to their desire timeframes or market and find a profitable configuration adjusting the parameters as they prefer. Initial balance, order size and commissions might be needed to be configured properly depending of the market. The algo provides a dashboard that make it easy to find a profitable configuration. It specifies the total trades, ARR that is an approximate value of the accumulative risk reward assuming all loses are 1R. The profit factor(PF) and percent profitable trades(PP) values are also available plus consecutives take profits and consecutives loses experimented in the simulation.
Finally there is an option to allow the algo to just trade following the direction of the trend if you just want to use it for sentiment or potential trend detection, this will place a trade in the most probable direction using the HTF reference levels, first FVG and LTF price action.
In the picture below you can see it in action in the 1min chart using 1H as HTF. When its trending works pretty well but when is consolidating is better to avoid using this option. Configuration below uses a time filter with the macro times specified by ICT that is also an available filter for taking trades. And the risk reward is set to minimum 2RR.
The cyan dotted line is the stop loss and the blue one above is the take profit level. The algo allows for different ways to exit in this case is using exit on a reversal, but can also be when the take profit is hit, or in a retracement. For the stop loss we can chose to exit on a close, reversal or when price hit the level.
Strategy Results
The results are obtained using 2000usd in the MNQ! 1 contract per trade. Commission are set to 2USD,slippage to 1tick,
The backtesting range is from April 19 2021 to the present date that is march 2025 for a total of 180 trades, this Strategy default settings are designed to take trades on retracements only, in any of the available options meaning around 50% to the extreme HTF high or low following the HTF trend, but can only take 2 trades per HTF candle and the risk reward must be minimum 1.8RR and maximum 8RR. Break even is set when price reaches 2RR and the exit on profit is on a reversal, and for loses when the stop is hit. The HTF range is 1 Week and LTF is 1H. The strategy give decent results, makes around 2 times the money is lost with around 30% profitable. It experiments drawdown when the market makes quick market structure shifts or consolidates for long periods of time. So should be used with caution, remember entries constitute only a small component of a complete winning strategy. Other factors like risk management, position-sizing, trading frequency, trading fees, and many others must also be properly managed to achieve profitability. Past performance doesn’t guarantee future results.
Summary of features
-Take advantage of market fractality select HTF from 1-365Days, 1-12Months or 1-52W ranges
-Easily identify manipulations in the LTF using any HTF key levels, from previous or actual HTF range
-LTF Candles and shaded HTF boxes change color depending of previous candle close and price action
-Plot the first presented FVG of the selected HTF range plus 50% developing range of the HTF
-Configurable automated trades for retracements into the previous close, around 50%,75-80% or using the HTF high or low
-Option to enable automated breakout entries for expansions of the HTF range
-Trend follower algo that automatically place a trade where is likely to expand.
-Time filter to allow only entries around the times you trade or the macro times.
-Risk Reward filter to take the automated trades with visible stop and take profit levels
- Customizable trade management take profit, stop, breakeven level with standard deviations
-Option to exit on a close, retracement or reversal after hitting the take profit level
-Option to exit on a close or reversal after hitting stop loss
-Dashboard with instant statistics about the strategy current settings
Bitcoin CME-Spot Z-Spread - Strategy [presentTrading]This time is a swing trading strategy! It measures the sentiment of the Bitcoin market through the spread of CME Bitcoin Futures and Bitfinex BTCUSD Spot prices. By applying Bollinger Bands to the spread, the strategy seeks to capture mean-reversion opportunities when prices deviate significantly from their historical norms
█ Introduction and How it is Different
The Bitcoin CME-Spot Bollinger Bands Strategy is designed to capture mean-reversion opportunities by exploiting the spread between CME Bitcoin Futures and Bitfinex BTCUSD Spot prices. The strategy uses Bollinger Bands to detect when the spread between these two correlated assets has deviated significantly from its historical norm, signaling potential overbought or oversold conditions.
What sets this strategy apart is its focus on spread trading between futures and spot markets rather than price-based indicators. By applying Bollinger Bands to the spread rather than individual prices, the strategy identifies price inefficiencies across markets, allowing traders to take advantage of the natural reversion to the mean that often occurs in these correlated assets.
BTCUSD 8hr Performance
█ Strategy, How It Works: Detailed Explanation
The strategy relies on Bollinger Bands to assess the volatility and relative deviation of the spread between CME Bitcoin Futures and Bitfinex BTCUSD Spot prices. Bollinger Bands consist of a moving average and two standard deviation bands, which help measure how much the spread deviates from its historical mean.
🔶 Spread Calculation:
The spread is calculated by subtracting the Bitfinex spot price from the CME Bitcoin futures price:
Spread = CME Price - Bitfinex Price
This spread represents the difference between the futures and spot markets, which may widen or narrow based on supply and demand dynamics in each market. By analyzing the spread, the strategy can detect when prices are too far apart (potentially overbought or oversold), indicating a trading opportunity.
🔶 Bollinger Bands Calculation:
The Bollinger Bands for the spread are calculated using a simple moving average (SMA) and the standard deviation of the spread over a defined period.
1. Moving Average (SMA):
The simple moving average of the spread (mu_S) over a specified period P is calculated as:
mu_S = (1/P) * sum(S_i from i=1 to P)
Where S_i represents the spread at time i, and P is the lookback period (default is 200 bars). The moving average provides a baseline for the normal spread behavior.
2. Standard Deviation:
The standard deviation (sigma_S) of the spread is calculated to measure the volatility of the spread:
sigma_S = sqrt((1/P) * sum((S_i - mu_S)^2 from i=1 to P))
3. Upper and Lower Bollinger Bands:
The upper and lower Bollinger Bands are derived by adding and subtracting a multiple of the standard deviation from the moving average. The number of standard deviations is determined by a user-defined parameter k (default is 2.618).
- Upper Band:
Upper Band = mu_S + (k * sigma_S)
- Lower Band:
Lower Band = mu_S - (k * sigma_S)
These bands provide a dynamic range within which the spread typically fluctuates. When the spread moves outside of these bands, it is considered overbought or oversold, potentially offering trading opportunities.
Local view
🔶 Entry Conditions:
- Long Entry: A long position is triggered when the spread crosses below the lower Bollinger Band, indicating that the spread has become oversold and is likely to revert upward.
Spread < Lower Band
- Short Entry: A short position is triggered when the spread crosses above the upper Bollinger Band, indicating that the spread has become overbought and is likely to revert downward.
Spread > Upper Band
🔶 Risk Management and Profit-Taking:
The strategy incorporates multi-step take profits to lock in gains as the trade moves in favor. The position is gradually reduced at predefined profit levels, reducing risk while allowing part of the trade to continue running if the price keeps moving favorably.
Additionally, the strategy uses a hold period exit mechanism. If the trade does not hit any of the take-profit levels within a certain number of bars, the position is closed automatically to avoid excessive exposure to market risks.
█ Trade Direction
The trade direction is based on deviations of the spread from its historical norm:
- Long Trade: The strategy enters a long position when the spread crosses below the lower Bollinger Band, signaling an oversold condition where the spread is expected to narrow.
- Short Trade: The strategy enters a short position when the spread crosses above the upper Bollinger Band, signaling an overbought condition where the spread is expected to widen.
These entries rely on the assumption of mean reversion, where extreme deviations from the average spread are likely to revert over time.
█ Usage
The Bitcoin CME-Spot Bollinger Bands Strategy is ideal for traders looking to capitalize on price inefficiencies between Bitcoin futures and spot markets. It’s especially useful in volatile markets where large deviations between futures and spot prices occur.
- Market Conditions: This strategy is most effective in correlated markets, like CME futures and spot Bitcoin. Traders can adjust the Bollinger Bands period and standard deviation multiplier to suit different volatility regimes.
- Backtesting: Before deployment, backtesting the strategy across different market conditions and timeframes is recommended to ensure robustness. Adjust the take-profit steps and hold periods to reflect the trader’s risk tolerance and market behavior.
█ Default Settings
The default settings provide a balanced approach to spread trading using Bollinger Bands but can be adjusted depending on market conditions or personal trading preferences.
🔶 Bollinger Bands Period (200 bars):
This defines the number of bars used to calculate the moving average and standard deviation for the Bollinger Bands. A longer period smooths out short-term fluctuations and focuses on larger, more significant trends. Adjusting the period affects the responsiveness of the strategy:
- Shorter periods (e.g., 100 bars): Makes the strategy more reactive to short-term market fluctuations, potentially generating more signals but increasing the risk of false positives.
- Longer periods (e.g., 300 bars): Focuses on longer-term trends, reducing the frequency of trades and focusing only on significant deviations.
🔶 Standard Deviation Multiplier (2.618):
The multiplier controls how wide the Bollinger Bands are around the moving average. By default, the bands are set at 2.618 standard deviations away from the average, ensuring that only significant deviations trigger trades.
- Higher multipliers (e.g., 3.0): Require a more extreme deviation to trigger trades, reducing trade frequency but potentially increasing the accuracy of signals.
- Lower multipliers (e.g., 2.0): Make the bands narrower, increasing the number of trade signals but potentially decreasing their reliability.
🔶 Take-Profit Levels:
The strategy has four take-profit levels to gradually lock in profits:
- Level 1 (3%): 25% of the position is closed at a 3% profit.
- Level 2 (8%): 20% of the position is closed at an 8% profit.
- Level 3 (14%): 15% of the position is closed at a 14% profit.
- Level 4 (21%): 10% of the position is closed at a 21% profit.
Adjusting these take-profit levels affects how quickly profits are realized:
- Lower take-profit levels: Capture gains more quickly, reducing risk but potentially cutting off larger profits.
- Higher take-profit levels: Let trades run longer, aiming for bigger gains but increasing the risk of price reversals before profits are locked in.
🔶 Hold Days (20 bars):
The strategy automatically closes the position after 20 bars if none of the take-profit levels are hit. This feature prevents trades from being held indefinitely, especially if market conditions are stagnant. Adjusting this:
- Shorter hold periods: Reduce the duration of exposure, minimizing risks from market changes but potentially closing trades too early.
- Longer hold periods: Allow trades to stay open longer, increasing the chance for mean reversion but also increasing exposure to unfavorable market conditions.
By understanding how these default settings affect the strategy’s performance, traders can optimize the Bitcoin CME-Spot Bollinger Bands Strategy to their preferences, adapting it to different market environments and risk tolerances.
Martingale + Grid DCA Strategy [YinYangAlgorithms]This Strategy focuses on strategically Martingaling when the price has dropped X% from your current Dollar Cost Average (DCA). When it does Martingale, it will create a Purchase Grid around this location to likewise attempt to get you a better DCA. Likewise following the Martingale strategy, it will sell when your Profit has hit your target of X%.
Martingale may be an effective way to lower your DCA. This is due to the fact that if your initial purchase; or in our case, initial Grid, all went through and the price kept going down afterwards, that you may purchase more to help lower your DCA even more. By doing so, you may bring your DCA down and effectively may make it easier and quicker to reach your target profit %.
Grid trading may be an effective way of reducing risk and lowering your DCA as you are spreading your purchases out over multiple different locations. Likewise we offer the ability to ‘Stack Grids’. What this means, is that if a single bar was to go through 20 grids, the purchase amount would be 20x what each grid is valued at. This may help get you a lower DCA as rather than creating 20 purchase orders at each grid location, we create a single purchase order at the lowest grid location, but for 20x the amount.
By combining both Martingale and Grid DCA techniques we attempt to lower your DCA strategically until you have reached your target profit %.
Before we start, we just want to make it known that first off, this Strategy features 8% Commission Fees, you may change this in the Settings to better reflect the Commission Fees of your exchange. On a similar note, due to Commission Fees being one of the number one profit killers in fast swing trade strategies, this strategy doesn’t focus on low trades, but the ideology of it may result in low amounts of trades. Please keep in mind this is not a bad thing. Since it has the ability to ‘Stack Grid Purchases’ it may purchase more for less and result in more profit, less commission fees, and likewise less # of trades.
Tutorial:
In this example above, we have it set so we Martingale twice, and we use 100 grids between the upper and lower level of each martingale; for a total of 200 Grids. This strategy will take total capital (initial capital + net profit) and divide it by the amount of grids. This will result in the $ amount purchased per grid. For instance, say you started with $10,000 and you’ve made $2000 from this Strategy so far, your total capital is $12,000. If you likewise are implementing 200 grids within your Strategy, this will result in $12,000 / 200 = $60 per grid. However, please note, that the further down the grid / martingale is, the more volume it is able to purchase for $60.
The white line within the Strategy represents your DCA. As the Strategy makes purchases, this will continue to get lower as will your Target Profit price (Blue Line). When the Close goes above your Target Profit price, the Strategy will close all open positions and claim the profit. This profit is then reinvested back into the Strategy, which may exponentially help the Strategy become more profitable the longer it runs for.
In the example above, we’ve zoomed in on the first example. In this we want to focus on how the Strategy got back into the trades shortly after it sold. Currently within the Settings we have it set so our entry is when the Lowest with a length of 3 is less than the previous Lowest with a length of 3. This is 100% customizable and there are multiple different entry options you can choose from and customize such as:
EMA 7 Crossover EMA 21
EMA 7 Crossunder EMA 21
RSI 14 Crossover RSI MA 14
RSI 14 Crossunder RSI MA 14
MFI 14 Crossover MFI MA 14
MFI 14 Crossunder MFI MA 14
Lowest of X Length < Previous Lowest of X Length
Highest of X Length > Previous Highest of X Length
All of these entry options may be tailored to be checked for on a different Time Frame than the one you are currently using the Strategy on. For instance, you may be running the Strategy on the 15 minute Time Frame yet decide you want the RSI to cross over the RSI MA on the 1 Day to be a valid entry location.
Please keep in mind, this Strategy focuses on DCA, this means you may not want the initial purchase to be the best location. You may want to buy when others think it is a good time to sell. This is because there may be strong bearish momentum which drives the price down drastically and potentially getting you a good DCA before it corrects back up.
We will continue to add more Entry options as time goes on, and if you have any in mind please don’t hesitate to let us know.
Now, back to the example above, if we refer to the Yellow circle, you may see that the Lowest of a length of 3 was less than its previous lowest, this triggered the martingales to create their grids. Only a few bars later, the price went into the first grid and went a little lower than its midpoint (Yellow line). This caused about 60% of the first grid to be purchased. Shortly after the price went even lower into this grid and caused the entire first martingale grid to be purchased. However, if you notice, the white line (your DCA) is lower than the midpoint of the first grid. This is due to the fact that we have ‘Stack Grid Purchases’ enabled. This allows the Strategy to purchase more when a single bar crosses through multiple grid locations; and effectively may lower your average more than if it simply executed a purchase order at each grid.
Still looking at the same location within our next example, if we simply increase the Martingale amount from 2 to 3 we can see something strange happens. What happened is our Target Profit price was reached, then our entry condition was met, which caused all of the martingale grids to be formed; however, the price continued to increase afterwards. This may not be a good thing, sure the price could correct back down to these grid locations, but what if it didn’t and it just kept increasing? This would result in this Strategy being stuck and unable to make any trades. For this reason we have implemented a Failsafe in the Settings called ‘Reset Grids if no purchase happens after X bars’.
We have enabled our Failsafe ‘Reset Grids if no purchase happens after X bars’ in this example above. By default it is set to 100 bars, but you can change this to whatever works best for you. If you set it to 0, this Failsafe will be disabled and act like the example prior where it is possible to be stuck with no trades executing.
This Failsafe may be an important way to ensure the Strategy is able to make purchases, however it may also mean the Grids increase in price when it is used, and if a massive correction were to occur afterwards, you may lose out on potential profit.
This Strategy was designed with WebHooks in mind. WebHooks allow you to send signals from the Strategy to your exchange. Simply set up a Custom TradingView Bot within the OKX exchange or 3Commas platform (which has your exchange API), enter the data required from the bot into the settings here, select your bot type in ‘Webhook Alert Type’, and then set up the alert. After that you’re good to go and this Strategy will fully automate all of its trades within your exchange for you. You need to format the Alert a certain way for it to work, which we will go over in the next example.
Add an alert for this Strategy and simply modify the alert message so all it says is:
{{strategy.order.alert_message}}
Likewise change from the Alert ‘Settings’ to Alert ‘Notifications’ at the top of the alert popup. Within the Notifications we will enable ‘Webhook URL’ and then we will pass the URL we are sending the Webhook to. In this example we’ve put OKX exchange Webhook URL, however if you are using 3Commas you’ll need to change this to theirs.
OKX Webhook URL:
www.okx.com
3Commas Webhook URL:
app.3commas.io
Make sure you click ‘Create’ to actually create this alert. After that you’re all set! There are many Tutorials videos you can watch if you are still a little confused as to how Webhook trading works.
Due to the nature of this Strategy and how it is designed to work, it has the ability to never sell unless there it will make profit. However, because of this it also may be stuck waiting in trades for quite a long period of time (usually a few months); especially when your Target Profit % is 15% like in the example above. However, this example above may be a good indication that it may maintain profitability for a long period of time; considering this ‘Deep Backtest’ is from 2017-8-17.
We will conclude the tutorial here. Hopefully you understand how this Strategy has the potential to make calculated and strategic DCA Grid purchases for you and then based on a traditional Martingale fashion, bulk sell at the desired Target Profit Percent.
Settings:
Purchase Settings:
Only Purchase if its lower than DCA: Generally speaking, we want to lower our Average, and therefore it makes sense to only buy when the close is lower than our current DCA and a Purchase Condition is met.
Purchase Condition: When creating the initial buy location you must remember, you want to Buy when others are Fearful and Sell when others are Greedy. Therefore, many of the Buy conditions involve times many would likewise Sell. This is one of the bonuses to using a Strategy like this as it will attempt to get you a good entry location at times people are selling.
Lower / Upper Change Length: This Lower / Upper Length is only used if the Purchase Condition is set to 'Lower Changed' or 'Upper Changed'. This is when the Lowest or Highest of this length changes. Lowest would become lower or Highest would become higher.
Purchase Resolution: Purchase Resolution is the Time Frame that the Purchase Condition is calculated on. For instance, you may only want to start a new Purchase Order when the RSI Crosses RSI MA on the 1 Day, but yet you run this Strategy on the 15 minutes.
Sell Settings:
Trailing Take Profit: Trailing Take Profit is where once your Target Profit Percent has been hit, this will trail up to attempt to claim even more profit.
Target Profit Percent: What is your Target Profit Percent? The Strategy will close all positions when the close price is greater than your DCA * this Target Profit Percent.
Grid Settings:
Stack Grid Purchases: If a close goes through multiple Buy Grids in one bar, should we amplify its purchase amount based on how many grids it went through?
Reset Grids if no purchase happens after X Bars: Set this to 0 if you never want to reset. This is very useful in case the price is very bullish and continues to increase after our Target Profit location is hit. What may happen is, Target Profit location is hit, then the Entry condition is met but the price just keeps increasing afterwards. We may not want to be sitting waiting for the price to drop, which may never happen. This is more of a failsafe if anything. You may set it very large, like 500+ if you only want to use it in extreme situations.
Grid % Less than Initial Purchase Price: How big should our Buy Grid be? For instance if we bought at 0.25 and this value is set to 20%, that means our Buy Grid spans from 0.2 - 0.25.
Grid Amounts: How many Grids should we create within our Buy location?
Martingale Settings:
Amount of Times 'Planned' to Martingale: The more Grids + the More Martingales = the less $ spent per grid, however the less risk. Remember it may be better to be right and take your time than risk too much and be stuck too long.
Martingale Percent: When the current price is this percent less than our DCA, lets create another Buy Grid so we can lower our average more. This will make our profit location less.
Webhook Alerts:
Webhook Alert Type: How should we format this Alert? 3Commas and OKX take their alerts differently, so please select the proper one or your webhooks won't work.
3Commas Webhook Alerts:
3Commas Bot ID: The 3Commas Bot ID is needed so we know which BOT ID we are sending this webhook too.
3Commas Email Token: The 3Commas Email Token is needed for your webhooks to work properly as it is linked to your account.
OKX Webhook Alerts:
OKX Signal Token: This Signal Token is attached to your OKX bot and will be used to access it within OKX.
If you have any questions, comments, ideas or concerns please don't hesitate to contact us.
HAPPY TRADING!
GKD-BT Baseline Backtest [Loxx]The Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Baseline Backtest is a backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System."
█ GKD-BT Baseline Backtest
The GKD-BT Baseline Backtest allows traders to backtest the Regular and Stepped baselines used in the GKD trading system. This module includes 65+ moving averages and 15+ types of volatility to choose from.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test the GKD-B indicator with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
This backtest also includes an optional GKD-E Exit indicator that can be used to test early exits.
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. You can change the values of the multipliers in the settings as well.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps:
1. (Required) Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-B Baseline indicator into the GKD-BT Baseline Backtest field "Import GKD-B Baseline"
2. (Optional) Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-E Exit indicator into the GKD-BT Baseline Backtest field "Import GKD-E Exit". You can toggle the Exit on or off using the "Activate GKD-E Exit" option.
Baselines that are compatible with this backtest module:
GKD-B Baseline
GKD-B Stepped Baseline
Volatility Types Included
17 types of volatility are included in this indicator
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
8. Metamorphosis - a technical indicator that produces a compound signal from the combination of other GKD indicators*
*(not part of the NNFX algorithm)
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
What is an Metamorphosis indicator?
The concept of a metamorphosis indicator involves the integration of two or more GKD indicators to generate a compound signal. This is achieved by evaluating the accuracy of each indicator and selecting the signal from the indicator with the highest accuracy. As an illustration, let's consider a scenario where we calculate the accuracy of 10 indicators and choose the signal from the indicator that demonstrates the highest accuracy.
The resulting output from the metamorphosis indicator can then be utilized in a GKD-BT backtest by occupying a slot that aligns with the purpose of the metamorphosis indicator. The slot can be a GKD-B, GKD-C, or GKD-E slot, depending on the specific requirements and objectives of the indicator. This allows for seamless integration and utilization of the compound signal within the GKD-BT framework.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
6. GKD-M - Metamorphosis module (Metamorphosis, Number 8 in the NNFX algorithm, but not part of the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: GKD-BT Baseline Backtest as shown on the chart above
Baseline: Hull Moving Average as shown on the chart above
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Sherif's HiLo
Confirmation 2: uf2018
Continuation: Coppock Curve
Exit: Fisher Transform as shown on the chart above
Metamorphosis: Baseline Optimizer
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, GKD-M, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System Signals
Standard Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2. Baseline agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
1-Candle Standard Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation gives signal
2a. Baseline agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Baseline Entry
1. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Volatility/Volume agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
1-Candle Baseline Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSBC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Baseline agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Volatility/Volume Entry
1. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Confirmation 2 agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry
1a. GKD-V Volatility/Volume gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSVVC Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Volatility/Volume agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
Confirmation 2 Entry
1. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2. Confirmation 1 agrees
3. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5. Volatility/Volume agrees
6. Baseline agrees
7. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 7 candles prior
1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry
1a. GKD-C Confirmation 2 gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
4a. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
5a. Confirmation 1 signal was less than 'Maximum Allowable PSC2C Bars Back' prior
Next Candle
1b. Price retraced
2b. Confirmation 2 agrees
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Volatility/Volume agrees
5b. Baseline agrees
PullBack Entry
1a. GKD-B Baseline gives signal
2a. Confirmation 1 agrees
3a. Price is beyond 1.0x Volatility of Baseline
Next Candle
1b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Minimum
2b. Price inside Goldie Locks Zone Maximum
3b. Confirmation 1 agrees
4b. Confirmation 2 agrees
5b. Volatility/Volume agrees
Continuation Entry
1. Standard Entry, 1-Candle Standard Entry, Baseline Entry, 1-Candle Baseline Entry, Volatility/Volume Entry, 1-Candle Volatility/Volume Entry, Confirmation 2 Entry, 1-Candle Confirmation 2 Entry, or Pullback entry triggered previously
2. Baseline hasn't crossed since entry signal trigger
4. Confirmation 1 agrees
5. Baseline agrees
6. Confirmation 2 agrees
Easy Trade Pro [Buy and Sell Strategy + Backtesting System]Hello Traders,
Easy Trade Pro is a comprehensive tool that combines multiple technical indicators into a single customizable one. This tool is the culmination of an extensive trading career, it is designed to help traders navigate the markets in any timeframe and financial asset, like Equities, Futures, Crypto, Forex and Commodities.
Before we deep dive into the comprehensive guide on what Easy Trade Pro is, let's kick off by showcasing the strategy used in this example. Please note, we have adopted an extremely conservative approach strictly following the Tradingview House Rules, which you can review here: www.tradingview.com
The backtest strategy parameters:
Currency pair: EUR USD
Timeframe: 15-min chart
Market: Spot, no leverage
Broker: FXCM
Trading range: 2022-09-01 07:30 — 2023-06-26 20:00
Backtesting range: 2022-08-31 23:00 — 2023-06-26 20:00
Initial Capital: $10,000
Buy Order Size: 20% of the capital, $2,000
Stop Loss: 0.50%
Sell orders: Four different take profits where we unload the position by 25% each time
Broker Fees: Commission set at 0.08$
Slippage: 10 ticks
Understanding FXCM Commissions and Setting Realistic Slippage for EUR/USD Spot Trading:
◉I would like to provide some clarity on the commission structure and slippage setting used in the study for trading the EUR/USD pair on the FXCM spot market. Based on the information available, FXCM charges a commission of $4.00 per standard lot (100,000) on both sides of the trade (meaning at open and close) for the EUR/USD pair. Since the study involve an order size of $2,000 USD, which is equivalent to 0.02 lots, the commission fee for one side of the trade (either buying or selling) would be calculated as $4.00 multiplied by 0.02, which is $0.08. This means that for each individual trade, whether it be a buy or sell, the commission fee would be $0.08.
◉As for slippage, it is crucial to account for the inherent uncertainty in the execution price due to market fluctuations. In the forex market, the EUR/USD pair is quoted with a precision of five decimal places, with the smallest price change being a "pipette" (0.00001). Given that slippage can vary based on market conditions, it is considered fair practice to use a slippage of around 10 ticks under normal market conditions for the EUR/USD pair. This allows for a more realistic representation of the execution price, especially in a liquid and fast-moving market such as forex.
More detailed information about FXCM fees structure in the link below:
docs.fxcorporate.com
Enter a Trade conditions:
For our buy order, we utilize a custom buy signal called 'Bullish Reversal'. A detailed explanation of this and other buy orders can be found later in the guide, specifically in section 1).
To enhance realism in our trading strategy, we have implemented a confirmation mechanism. When utilizing the strategy tester, you have the option to input a value to determine the number of confirmation candles to consider.
For example, if you set the input to 1, the system will check if the next candle following the signal meets the criteria for confirmation. If set to 2, the system will evaluate the second candle, and so on for higher values. The confirmation is determined by comparing the closing or opening price of the selected buy signal candle with the corresponding closing price of the confirmation candle.
In this case we choose as buy signal: 'Bullish Reversal' + 2 candle of confirmation
Exit a trade conditions:
On the sell side, we exit a trade in four different types of sell orders where we take profits. Inside '', you will encounter unique labels attributed to our custom sell signals. A detailed explanation of these sell orders can be found later in the guide, specifically in section 1). We used custom order called:
1TP 'Good Sell'
2TP 'Good Sell'
3TP 'Good Sell'
4TP 'Bearish Reversal' + 4 confirmation candles
Our confirmation logic, for sell signals, is applied only to 'Bearish Reversal' signal. The confirmation is determined by comparing the closing or opening price of the selected 'Bearish Reversal' candle with the corresponding closing price of the confirmation candle. In this case, we wait for the fourth candle from the 'Bearish Reversal' signal to confirm the sell trade.
Protect your capital:
This super-conservative study involves a clear low risk, with the use of $2,000, 20% of our capital. If the stop loss of 0.5% were triggered, we lose 10$, equating to 0.10% of $10,000 - thus affecting only 0.10% of our capital.
Super Conservative Approach & Results:
With 353 closed trades, we achieved a net profit of 2.03%, or $203.34$ relative to our initial $10,000 capital, and a win rate of 73.37%.
Less Conservative Approach & Results:
We could also consider increasing our risk to 0.5% of our capital per trade. We would maintain our stop loss at 0.50%, but we would need to use all our capital to enter the market. If the stop loss of 0.5% will be triggered, we would lose 50$, equating to 0.5% of $10,000.
In this scenario, our net profit would have increased to 10.15%, equivalent to $1015.
Please be aware:
While fully automated strategies can bring considerable advantages, they are not without their cons. For one, relying solely on an automated system may not take into account the potential confluence of other strategies or indicators, such as the significance of support and resistance zones. These elements often require a more nuanced, human understanding of the markets and cannot always be perfectly replicated by an algorithm.
Additionally, it's essential to remember that a significant percentage of traders are not consistently profitable. As such, prudent risk management, a conservative approach, and acceptance of a reasonable profit are crucial aspects of successful trading. While the allure of high returns can be tempting, the sustainability of your trading strategy should always take precedence. Achieving steady, reliable profits over time often outweighs the appeal of a risky, high-return strategy that could potentially lead to substantial losses.
So, while automation can be a powerful tool in your trading arsenal, it's also important to consider other strategies and factors. Always ensure you're managing your risk effectively and approaching trading with a realistic and informed perspective.
------------------------------------------------------------------------ Why Easy Trade Pro is Original? ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
We developed Easy Trade Pro as a unique and comprehensive solution, and we decided to protect our code to preserve its originality. We invested significant time and effort into making it a realistic trading strategy simulator. The standout features that set Easy Trade Pro apart include:
☀ Versatile Stop Loss Mechanisms: Stop loss execution can be complex and often requires careful coding to work as intended. In most freely available open-source codes, stop losses are implemented using the Average True Range (ATR). ATR can be beneficial but has limitations:
☁ Lagging Indicator - Like most technical indicators, the ATR is a lagging indicator. This means it is based on past data, and so it may not accurately reflect future market volatility. If market conditions change rapidly, the ATR may not adjust quickly enough, potentially leading to suboptimal stop loss levels.
☁ No Directional Information - The ATR measures volatility, but it does not provide any indication of the direction of the trend. Therefore, it should not be used as a standalone tool for making trading decisions, but should be used in conjunction with other technical analysis tools that can provide directional cues.
☁ Inefficiency in Trending Markets - In strongly trending markets, ATR-based stops can sometimes be too far from the current price level. This could lead to larger losses if the price moves against your trade before hitting the stop loss. On the flip side, in less volatile, sideways markets, an ATR-based stop might be set too close to the entry point, leading to premature stop outs.
☁ Overoptimization Risk - If you're backtesting a trading strategy, there's a risk of overoptimizing your stop loss settings by fine-tuning them to past data. The best ATR multiplier that worked in the past might not necessarily work in the future, leading to potential performance issues.
☀ We countered these by implementing four different types of 'protect the trade' mechanisms:
✔ Fixed Percentage Stop Loss
✔ Trailing Stop Loss
✔ Stop Loss Moved to Entry Upon Reaching Certain Gain
✔ Stop Loss Moved to Entry Upon Reaching First Take Profit Order ("Custom Order").
☀ Dual Exit Strategy: We incorporated two distinct methods of exiting a trade. The first uses our custom signals, while the second triggers exit at a certain percentage of gain.
☀ Multiple Take Profit Orders: You have the flexibility to establish up to four different sell orders. This feature enables you to fractionate your exit strategy according to your needs. You can choose to trigger these fractions based on our custom signals or determine your own exit points by setting targeted gains at a fixed percentage.
☀ Confirmation Candle System: This feature enhances trade precision by requiring confirmation candles after a buy or sell signal. This confirmation, dependent on the next candle's closing price, helps reduce false signals and improves entry and exit points. While our confirmation system is applicable to all custom buy signals, it's solely dedicated for the bearish reversal when it comes to sell signals.
☀ Universal Compatibility: Easy Trade Pro's Strategy Tester works perfectly with any asset class. The code can handle different contract types, including the SPX contracts and fractional assets like Bitcoin. It's optimized to ensure proper execution of trades without rounding issues.
☀ Bullish and Bearish Reversal candles: Our method of detecting these pivotal candles combines conditions from buy and sell signals with pertinent divergences in Price, RSI, and Volume (OBV). The distinguishing factor, however, lies in recognizing significant shifts in market structure and liquidity grabs. To further enhance the credibility of our indicator, we've incorporated Bollinger Bands, serving as an additional layer in spotting potential trend reversals, particularly when aligned with long-wick candlesticks, engulfing patterns, and morning or evening star formations.
☀ Non-Repainting Indicator: Our indicator signals are designed not to repaint. Once a signal appears, it stays fixed, offering a reliable tool for your trading decisions.
================================================== EXTENSIVE TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ====================================================
Easy Trade Pro is versatile, allowing you to analyze market trends across any financial asset. With its rigorous testing, our tool can be used confidently on any timeframe, from 1D to 1min, whether you prefer longer-term or shorter-term trades.
Although we recommend trading on timeframes between 1D and 1min, higher timeframes like 1W chart, can also provide broader insights.
Our study combines a variety of popular technical indicators, such as RSI, Stochastic RSI, MACD, DMI, Bollinger Bands as well as relevant EMAs. On the volume side OBV and MFI. Using a data-driven approach, “Easy Trade Pro” analyzes historical market trends to identify optimal ways to combine these indicators with significant divergences between price and oscillators. On top of that the code considers relevant changes in market structure and liquidity grabs, to generate reliable and accurate signals for potential buy and sell opportunities.
* ☎ --> Please not that MACD, BBs, and EMAs account for a minimal part of our script <--- ☎, If you're looking for a simpler tool, consider checking out our open-source indicator, 'RSI, SRSI, MACD, and DMI cross - Open source code'. You can find it here:
With our customizable system, traders will be able to identify:
1) Three types of buy signals🐂,💰,💎 and sell signals 🐻,🔨,💀
2) Bullish and bearish reversal candles with support and resistance lines
3) Bull and bear momentum signals
4) A function that utilizes Color bars to identify the strength of the trend
5) Three customizable moving averages
6) Alerts direct to your email or phone
7) Advanced and customizable settings menu
8) Our software also includes a backtesting system that that allows users to test their trading strategies on historical data, to check how they would have performed in real-world market conditions. This can help refine a trading strategy and make more informed decisions.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1) BUY AND SELL SIGNALS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Our buy and sell signals are generated using a custom combination of RSI, MFI, and Stochastic RSI levels, as well as relevant MACD and Stochastic RSI crosses. These indicators are carefully analyzed to identify potential trading opportunities and determine optimal entry and exit points for trades.
RSI (Relative strength index) measures the strength of a security's price action, while the SRSI (Stochastic Relative Strength Index) is a momentum oscillator that measures the current price relative to its high and low range over a set period. The Money Flow Index (MFI) is another momentum indicator that uses both price and volume data to measure buying and selling pressure. MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence) is a popular technical indicator used in financial markets to analyze price trends and momentum.
▶ With our system, you'll be able to identify three different levels of buy signals:
◉ The first level of buy signal is represented by a 🐂 emoji and is a "Good Buy". This signal indicates a possible buying opportunity. It indicates that could be a good opportunity to enter in a long trade. It's important to note that, the "Good Buy" signal can sometimes be supplemented with a green "Bull" text and a flag plotshape positioned beneath the signal. In these scenarios, we categorize this as a "Good Buy Bull" signal.
◉ The second level of buy signal is represented by a 💰 emoji and is a "Great Buy". This signal indicates a stronger buying opportunity than the "Good Buy" signal.
◉ The third and strongest buy signal is represented by a 💎 emoji and is an "Incredible Buy". This signal indicates a stronger buying opportunity than the "Good Buy" and "Great Buy" signals
▶ With our system, you'll be able to identify three different levels of sell signals:
◉ On the sell side, the first level is represented by a 🐻 emoji and is a "Good Sell". This signal indicates a possible selling opportunity. It indicates that could be a good opportunity to exit a trade or open a short position. It's important to note that, the "Good Sell" signal can occasionally be accompanied by a red "Bear" text and a flag plotshape positioned beneath the signal. In such instances, we refer to this as a "Good Sell Bear" signal.
◉ The second sell signal is represented by a 🔨 emoji and is a "Great Sell". This signal indicates a stronger selling opportunity than the "Good Sell" signal.
◉ The third and strongest sell signal is represented by a 💀 emoji and is an "Incredible Sell". This signal indicates a stronger selling opportunity than the "Good Sell" and "Great Sell" signals.
------------------------------------------2) "BULLISH AND BEARISH REVERSAL CANDLES PLUS SUPPORT AND RESISTANCE LINES" ------------------------------------------------
Bullish and bearish reversal candles are specific candles that have more probability to reverse the trend.
Our trading indicator is designed to identify bullish and bearish reversal candles. Our method of detecting these pivotal candles combines conditions from buy and sell signals with pertinent divergences in Price, RSI, and Volume (OBV). The distinguishing factor, however, lies in recognizing significant shifts in market structure and liquidity grabs. To further enhance the credibility of our indicator, we've incorporated Bollinger Bands, serving as an additional layer in spotting potential trend reversals, particularly when aligned with long-wick candlesticks, engulfing patterns, and morning or evening star formations.
These candles are represented by blue and orange colors respectively by default. Additionally, the indicator also uses lines that are drawn at either the opening or closing of candles to help identify pivot points of support or resistance. These candles, lines color or shape are customizable in the settings menu.
How can I benefit the most from bullish reversal candles? To make the most of bullish reversal candles, a powerful strategy is:
E.g, 1D chart - Wait for the next 1 or 2 candles to close above the support line linked to the bullish reversal candle. For lower timeframes, it is recommended to wait for 2 or 3 candles before making a trading decision. A good tip is also to look for other signals (confluence), like a buy signal. Traders should decide based on their risk tolerance.
Here below we can see an example of a bullish reversal candle in the BTC/USDT, 1D, chart. The system identify a bullish reversal candle (blue color), the next 2 candles are green and closed above the support blue line, in addition we have other bullish signals (confluence).
How can I benefit the most from bullish reversal lines? Bullish reversal lines can help traders to identify key level of support and maintain control of their position until a clear break below occurs.
In the example below we se how the price retrace to the support line:
After touching the price bounce up.
How can I benefit the most from bearish reversal candles? To make the most of bearish reversal candles, a powerful strategy is:
E.g, 1D chart - Wait for the next 1 or 2 candles to close below the resistance line linked to the bearish reversal candle. For lower timeframes, it is recommended to wait for 2 or 3 candles before making a trading decision. Traders should decide based on their risk tolerance.
Here below we can see an example of a bearish reversal candle in the ETH/USDT, 1D, chart. The system identify a bearish reversal candle (orange color), the next candle is red and closes below the resistance orange line. A good tip is also to look for other signals (confluence), like a sell signal.
How can I benefit the most from bearish reversal lines? Bearish reversal lines can help traders to identify key level of resistance and maintain control of their position until a clear break above occurs.
In the example below we se how the price bounce back to the resistance line and get rejected.
------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3) BULL AND BEAR MOMENTUM SIGNALS -----------------------------------------------------------------------
We analyzed factors such as buy or sell signals, long or short confirmation signals, DMI crossup or crossdown and breaks of market structure (BOS) or change of character (CHoCh) to determine the strength and direction of the trend. These study give us bull trend or bear trend signals that can help traders identify potential trading opportunities and make informed decisions.
These conditions are represented by a green word "BULL" and a flag shape below (bull momentum) and by a red word "BEAR" and a flag shape above (bear momentum) respectively by default. These plots shapes are customizable in the settings menu.
How can I benefit the most from bull momentum signals? To make the most of bull momentum signals, a powerful strategy is:
E.g, 1D chart - Look for confluence. If bull signal comes with a "Good Buy 🐂" in the same candle the signal is more strong. Another good combo is to look for a bullish reversal candle prior or after this signal, usually within a range of 1/2 candles. For lower timeframes, it is recommended to wait 2/3 candles before making a trading decision.
In the picture below we can see an example of a bull momentum signal in the US500, 1D, chart.
How can I benefit the most from bear momentum signals? To make the most of bear momentum signals, a powerful strategy is:
E.g, 1D chart - Look for confluence. If bear signal comes with a "Good Sell 🐻" in the same candle the signal is more strong. Another good combo is to look for a bearish reversal candle prior or after this signal, usually within a range of 1/2 candles. For lower timeframes, it is recommended to wait 2/3 candles before making a trading decision.
In the picture below we can see an example of a bear momentum signal in combo with a sell signal, NETFLIX, 1D, chart.
-------------------------------------------------------------- 4) "COLOR BARS THAT INDICATE THE STRENGTH OF THE TREND -----------------------------------------------------
This code is responsible for changing the color of the bars on a chart based on certain conditions. The gradient colors are defined for green and red, and the algorithm checks if the current bar is within a certain range of either a bearish reversal or bullish reversal candle and whether the price is above or below certain exponential moving averages or if important break of market structure occurs.
Ultimately, this feature helps traders visually identify potential trends and market shifts and avoid getting distracted by price fluctuations. Please note that every gradient of color can be customize by the user. We set 3 different bullish colors and 3 different bearish colors.
Below the picture of the settings menu related to the bar color.
----------------------------------------------------------------------5)THREE CUSTOMIZABLE MOVING AVERAGES ----------------------------------------------------------------------
You can choose up to three moving averages, any length and any type like SMA, EMA, WMA, HMA, RMA, SWMA and VWMA. Furthermore, you have the freedom to adjust the color and width of the lines to your preference.
Below the picture of the settings menu related to the moving averages.
----------------------------------------------------------------------6) ALERTS DIRECT TO YOUR EMAIL OR PHONE --------------------------------------------------------------------
Our alert feature sends real-time notifications directly to your email or phone when a signal is generated, allowing you to take immediate action and stay ahead of the market.
With our system, you first establish your own rules for trading in the strategy tester - this includes your criteria for entering and exiting trades.
Once you've defined these conditions, our system will start sending you alerts. These alerts will be triggered whenever your specified conditions are met. So, if the market matches your 'enter trade' conditions, you'll receive an alert prompting. Similarly, when your 'exit trade' conditions are met, you'll receive another alert.
Remember, these alerts are purely based on the conditions you set.
Once the condition is met, you will receive alerts directly to your email or phone when enter and exit a trade based on your custom conditions. To make sure you receive these notifications click on notifications tab.
---------------------------------------------------------------7) ADVANCED AND CUSTOMIZABLE SETTINGS MENU----------------------------------------------------------------------
We designed Easy Trade indicators with traders in mind, so it's user-friendly, easy to navigate and users can customize inputs, style, and colors of every feature in the indicator's settings menu.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------8) EASY TRADE PRO - BACKTESTING SYSTEM----------------------------------------------------------------------
Easy Trade Pro features a highly effective and realistic backtesting system, designed to mirror as closely as possible the real-world scenarios of entering and exiting trades.
Step 1:
Open the settings menu of the Indicator.
Once opened the settings menu click on properties.
Decide on the capital you wish to invest. Choose whether to use contracts or USD and determine the size of your orders. For the sake of realism, we recommend not exceeding 25% of your capital per order. However, if you decide to utilize your entire capital, make sure to adjust your stop loss accordingly. For instance, if you have a capital of 10K and use 10K with a stop loss at 2%, your potential loss would be $200. Conversely, if you use only 2K of your 10K capital with a stop loss at 10%, you would still lose the same 2% of your capital. To make your simulation even more authentic, consider incorporating broker fees or commissions into your calculations. For example, spot market fees are typically around 0.10%. If you're backtesting markets with low liquidity, consider factoring in slippage as well.
Step 2:
Navigate to the 'Inputs' section and scroll down until you come across 'Backtesting System - Strategy Test'. Once you locate this, click on the box and activate the 'USE STRATEGY SYSTEM' option by checking the tick box.
Also You will then need to set a 'Start Date' and 'End Date', establishing a specific time period during which you wish to test your strategy.
Otherwise you can consider to use the deep backtesting feature.
Step 3:
It's now time to establish the conditions for entering a trade. You can choose from five different types of custom buy signals: Good Buy, Good Buy Bull, Great Buy, Incredible Buy, and Bullish Reversal. Note that 'Great Buy' and 'Incredible Buy' are rare signals, so we advise against using them frequently in mechanical strategy tests; instead, consider them more for manual live tests. For more consistent results, we recommend using the other buy signals.
After determining your preferred buy signal, you can choose how many confirmation candles you wish to wait for before entering a trade. A 'confirmation' means that if the next candle closes above the opening or closing price of the chosen buy signal, it's considered a confirmation. This could be the opening or closing price, depending on whether the candle is green (close > open) or red.
You can set the number of confirmation candles in different time frames: below 2h, between 2h and 10h, and above 10h.
Step 4:
It's now time to safeguard your trade by managing risk. You can choose to implement a stop loss, expressed in percentage terms, or opt for a trailing stop. A trailing stop is a type of stop loss order that moves with the market price. It is designed to protect gains by enabling a trade to remain open and continue to profit as long as the market price is moving in a favorable direction. However, the trade closes if the market price changes direction by a specified amount (the 'trailing stop distance').
Additionally, you can minimize losses and move the stop loss to your entry point once the price reaches a certain percentage of profit. This strategy can help secure potential gains while limiting the potential for losses.
Step 5:
Now it's time to set the conditions for exiting the trade. You have the option to divide your exit into a maximum of four parts, with each part representing 25% of the position size. For each take profit point, you can choose from three different custom sell signals: Good Sell, Good Sell Bear, and Bearish Reversal.
Similarly, the concept of confirmation candles also applies here, but in this case, the candles are not closing above. A 'confirmation' for a sell signal means that if the next candle closes below the opening or closing price of the selected sell signal, it's considered a confirmation. This could be the opening or closing price, depending on whether the candle is green (open > close) or red (close < open).
So, when you're looking to sell, a confirmation would occur if the next candlestick's closing price is lower than the opening or closing price of the candlestick that triggered the sell signal. This indicates a potential bearish trend, providing the confirmation to execute the sell order.
Additionally, we've introduced a feature that allows you to move your stop loss to the entry point whenever the first take profit (1TP) is reached, which equates to hitting one custom sell signal.
Step 6:
We've also designed an alternative method for taking profits. With this approach, you can choose to exit your position once a fixed percentage gain from the entry point is reached. For instance, you might decide to exit when a 10% profit is achieved. Similarly to the previous method, this approach allows you to choose up to four exit points and determine the proportion of your position you want to close at each stage.
Conclusion:
Easy Trade Pro provides users with various options for entering and exiting trades. To effectively utilize the indicator, we strongly recommend conducting thorough backtesting and considering the results across your preferred trading pairs. It is advisable to analyze a substantial number of trades, ideally exceeding 100 trades, to obtain reliable insights into the indicator's performance. This approach will help you gain a better understanding of how Easy Trade Pro aligns with your trading strategy and objectives.
❗Keep attention❗
It is important to note that no trading indicator or strategy is foolproof, and there is always a risk of losses in trading. While this indicator may provide useful information for making conclusions, it should not be used as the sole basis for making trading decisions. Traders should always use proper risk management techniques and consider multiple factors when making trading decisions.
It is also important to be aware of the limitations of simulated performance results. Hypothetical or simulated results do not represent actual trading, and since trades have not been executed, results may be over- or under-compensated for market factors such as lack of liquidity. Simulated trading programs are also designed with the benefit of hindsight, and no representation is being made that any account will achieve profits or losses similar to those shown. Therefore, our indicators are for informative purposes only and not intended to be used as financial advice.
We encourage traders to use our indicators as part of a well-rounded trading strategy and to always be aware of the risks involved in trading. Remember that past performance is not indicative of future results and always trade responsibly.
GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest is a Backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest
The Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest module allows users to perform backtesting on Long and Short signals from the confluence between GKD-C Confirmation 1 and GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicators. This module encompasses two types of backtests: Trading and Full. The Trading backtest permits users to evaluate individual trades, whether Long or Short, one at a time. Conversely, the Full backtest allows users to analyze either Longs or Shorts separately by toggling between them in the settings, enabling the examination of results for each signal type. The Trading backtest emulates actual trading conditions, while the Full backtest assesses all signals, regardless of being Long or Short.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test using indicators with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed.
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed.
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest module also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps:
1. Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation 1 Indicator to "GKD New."
2. GKD-C Confirmation 1 Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation 1 module into the GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation 1."
3. Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation 2 Indicator to "GKD New."
4. GKD-C Confirmation 2 Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation 2 module into the GKD-BT Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest module setting named "Import GKD-C Confirmation 2."
█ Giga Confirmation Stack Backtest Entries
Entries are generated from the confluence of a GKD-C Confirmation 1 and GKD-C Confirmation 2 indicators. The Confirmation 1 gives the signal and the Confirmation 2 indicator filters or "approves" the the Confirmation 1 signal. If Confirmation 1 gives a long signal and Confirmation 2 shows a downtrend, then the long signal is rejected. If Confirmation 1 gives a long signal and Confirmation 2 shows an uptrend, then the long signal is approved and sent to the backtest execution engine.
█ Volatility Types Included
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users can also adjust the multiplier values in the settings.
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Confiramtion Stack Backtest
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Fisher Transform as shown on the chart above
Confirmation 2: uf2018 as shown on the chart above
Continuation: Vortex
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest [Loxx]Giga Kaleidoscope GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest is a Backtesting module included in Loxx's "Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System".
█ GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest
The Giga Stacks Backtest module allows users to perform backtesting on Long and Short signals from the confluence of GKD-B Baseline, GKD-C Confirmation, and GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicators. This module encompasses two types of backtests: Trading and Full. The Trading backtest permits users to evaluate individual trades, whether Long or Short, one at a time. Conversely, the Full backtest allows users to analyze either Longs or Shorts separately by toggling between them in the settings, enabling the examination of results for each signal type. The Trading backtest emulates actual trading conditions, while the Full backtest assesses all signals, regardless of being Long or Short.
Additionally, this backtest module provides the option to test using indicators with 1 to 3 take profits and 1 stop loss. The Trading backtest allows for the use of 1 to 3 take profits, while the Full backtest is limited to 1 take profit. The Trading backtest also offers the capability to apply a trailing take profit.
In terms of the percentage of trade removed at each take profit, this backtest module has the following hardcoded values:
Take profit 1: 50% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 2: 25% of the trade is removed.
Take profit 3: 25% of the trade is removed.
Stop loss: 100% of the trade is removed.
After each take profit is achieved, the stop loss level is adjusted. When take profit 1 is reached, the stop loss is moved to the entry point. Similarly, when take profit 2 is reached, the stop loss is shifted to take profit 1. The trailing take profit feature comes into play after take profit 2 or take profit 3, depending on the number of take profits selected in the settings. The trailing take profit is always activated on the final take profit when 2 or more take profits are chosen.
The backtest module also offers the capability to restrict by a specific date range, allowing for simulated forward testing based on past data. Additionally, users have the option to display or hide a trading panel that provides relevant information about the backtest, statistics, and the current trade. It is also possible to activate alerts and toggle sections of the trading panel on or off. On the chart, historical take profit and stop loss levels are represented by horizontal lines overlaid for reference.
To utilize this strategy, follow these steps (where "Stack XX" denotes the number of the Stack):
GKD-B Baseline Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-B Baseline module into the GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest module setting named "Stack XX: Import GKD-C, GKD-B, or GKD-V."
GKD-V Volatility/Volume Import: Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-V Volatility/Volume module into the GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest module setting named "Stack XX: Import GKD-C, GKD-B, or GKD-V."
GKD-C Confirmation Import: 1) Adjust the "Confirmation Type" in the GKD-C Confirmation Indicator to "GKD New."; 2) Import the value "Input into NEW GKD-BT Backtest" from the GKD-C Confirmation module into the GKD-BT Giga Stacks Backtest module setting named "Stack XX: Import GKD-C, GKD-B, or GKD."
█ Giga Stacks Backtest Entries
Entries are generated form the confluence of up to six GKD-B Baseline, GKD-C Confirmation, and GKD-V Volatility/Volume indicators. Signals are generated when all Stacks reach uptrend or downtrend together.
Here's how this works. Assume we have the following Stacks and their respective trend on the current candle:
Stack 1 indicator is in uptreend
Stack 2 indicator is in downtrend
Stack 3 indicator is in uptreend
Stack 4 indicator is in uptreend
All stacks are in uptrend except for Stack 2. If Stack 2 reaches uptrend while Stacks 1, 3, and 4 stay in uptrend, then a long signal is generated. The last Stack to align with all other Stacks will generate a long or short signal.
█ Volatility Types Included
The GKD system utilizes volatility-based take profits and stop losses. Each take profit and stop loss is calculated as a multiple of volatility. Users can also adjust the multiplier values in the settings.
This module includes 17 types of volatility:
Close-to-Close
Parkinson
Garman-Klass
Rogers-Satchell
Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
Average True Range
True Range Double
Standard Deviation
Adaptive Deviation
Median Absolute Deviation
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Mean Absolute Deviation
Static Percent
Close-to-Close
Close-to-Close volatility is a classic and widely used volatility measure, sometimes referred to as historical volatility.
Volatility is an indicator of the speed of a stock price change. A stock with high volatility is one where the price changes rapidly and with a larger amplitude. The more volatile a stock is, the riskier it is.
Close-to-close historical volatility is calculated using only a stock's closing prices. It is the simplest volatility estimator. However, in many cases, it is not precise enough. Stock prices could jump significantly during a trading session and return to the opening value at the end. That means that a considerable amount of price information is not taken into account by close-to-close volatility.
Despite its drawbacks, Close-to-Close volatility is still useful in cases where the instrument doesn't have intraday prices. For example, mutual funds calculate their net asset values daily or weekly, and thus their prices are not suitable for more sophisticated volatility estimators.
Parkinson
Parkinson volatility is a volatility measure that uses the stock’s high and low price of the day.
The main difference between regular volatility and Parkinson volatility is that the latter uses high and low prices for a day, rather than only the closing price. This is useful as close-to-close prices could show little difference while large price movements could have occurred during the day. Thus, Parkinson's volatility is considered more precise and requires less data for calculation than close-to-close volatility.
One drawback of this estimator is that it doesn't take into account price movements after the market closes. Hence, it systematically undervalues volatility. This drawback is addressed in the Garman-Klass volatility estimator.
Garman-Klass
Garman-Klass is a volatility estimator that incorporates open, low, high, and close prices of a security.
Garman-Klass volatility extends Parkinson's volatility by taking into account the opening and closing prices. As markets are most active during the opening and closing of a trading session, it makes volatility estimation more accurate.
Garman and Klass also assumed that the process of price change follows a continuous diffusion process (Geometric Brownian motion). However, this assumption has several drawbacks. The method is not robust for opening jumps in price and trend movements.
Despite its drawbacks, the Garman-Klass estimator is still more effective than the basic formula since it takes into account not only the price at the beginning and end of the time interval but also intraday price extremes.
Researchers Rogers and Satchell have proposed a more efficient method for assessing historical volatility that takes into account price trends. See Rogers-Satchell Volatility for more detail.
Rogers-Satchell
Rogers-Satchell is an estimator for measuring the volatility of securities with an average return not equal to zero.
Unlike Parkinson and Garman-Klass estimators, Rogers-Satchell incorporates a drift term (mean return not equal to zero). As a result, it provides better volatility estimation when the underlying is trending.
The main disadvantage of this method is that it does not take into account price movements between trading sessions. This leads to an underestimation of volatility since price jumps periodically occur in the market precisely at the moments between sessions.
A more comprehensive estimator that also considers the gaps between sessions was developed based on the Rogers-Satchel formula in the 2000s by Yang-Zhang. See Yang Zhang Volatility for more detail.
Yang-Zhang
Yang Zhang is a historical volatility estimator that handles both opening jumps and the drift and has a minimum estimation error.
Yang-Zhang volatility can be thought of as a combination of the overnight (close-to-open volatility) and a weighted average of the Rogers-Satchell volatility and the day’s open-to-close volatility. It is considered to be 14 times more efficient than the close-to-close estimator.
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang
Garman-Klass-Yang-Zhang (GKYZ) volatility estimator incorporates the returns of open, high, low, and closing prices in its calculation.
GKYZ volatility estimator takes into account overnight jumps but not the trend, i.e., it assumes that the underlying asset follows a Geometric Brownian Motion (GBM) process with zero drift. Therefore, the GKYZ volatility estimator tends to overestimate the volatility when the drift is different from zero. However, for a GBM process, this estimator is eight times more efficient than the close-to-close volatility estimator.
Exponential Weighted Moving Average
The Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) is a quantitative or statistical measure used to model or describe a time series. The EWMA is widely used in finance, with the main applications being technical analysis and volatility modeling.
The moving average is designed such that older observations are given lower weights. The weights decrease exponentially as the data point gets older – hence the name exponentially weighted.
The only decision a user of the EWMA must make is the parameter lambda. The parameter decides how important the current observation is in the calculation of the EWMA. The higher the value of lambda, the more closely the EWMA tracks the original time series.
Standard Deviation of Log Returns
This is the simplest calculation of volatility. It's the standard deviation of ln(close/close(1)).
Pseudo GARCH(2,2)
This is calculated using a short- and long-run mean of variance multiplied by ?.
?avg(var;M) + (1 ? ?) avg(var;N) = 2?var/(M+1-(M-1)L) + 2(1-?)var/(M+1-(M-1)L)
Solving for ? can be done by minimizing the mean squared error of estimation; that is, regressing L^-1var - avg(var; N) against avg(var; M) - avg(var; N) and using the resulting beta estimate as ?.
Average True Range
The average true range (ATR) is a technical analysis indicator, introduced by market technician J. Welles Wilder Jr. in his book New Concepts in Technical Trading Systems, that measures market volatility by decomposing the entire range of an asset price for that period.
The true range indicator is taken as the greatest of the following: current high less the current low; the absolute value of the current high less the previous close; and the absolute value of the current low less the previous close. The ATR is then a moving average, generally using 14 days, of the true ranges.
True Range Double
A special case of ATR that attempts to correct for volatility skew.
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation is a statistic that measures the dispersion of a dataset relative to its mean and is calculated as the square root of the variance. The standard deviation is calculated as the square root of variance by determining each data point's deviation relative to the mean. If the data points are further from the mean, there is a higher deviation within the data set; thus, the more spread out the data, the higher the standard deviation.
Adaptive Deviation
By definition, the Standard Deviation (STD, also represented by the Greek letter sigma ? or the Latin letter s) is a measure that is used to quantify the amount of variation or dispersion of a set of data values. In technical analysis, we usually use it to measure the level of current volatility.
Standard Deviation is based on Simple Moving Average calculation for mean value. This version of standard deviation uses the properties of EMA to calculate what can be called a new type of deviation, and since it is based on EMA, we can call it EMA deviation. Additionally, Perry Kaufman's efficiency ratio is used to make it adaptive (since all EMA type calculations are nearly perfect for adapting).
The difference when compared to the standard is significant--not just because of EMA usage, but the efficiency ratio makes it a "bit more logical" in very volatile market conditions.
Median Absolute Deviation
The median absolute deviation is a measure of statistical dispersion. Moreover, the MAD is a robust statistic, being more resilient to outliers in a data set than the standard deviation. In the standard deviation, the distances from the mean are squared, so large deviations are weighted more heavily, and thus outliers can heavily influence it. In the MAD, the deviations of a small number of outliers are irrelevant.
Because the MAD is a more robust estimator of scale than the sample variance or standard deviation, it works better with distributions without a mean or variance, such as the Cauchy distribution.
Efficiency-Ratio Adaptive ATR
Average True Range (ATR) is a widely used indicator for many occasions in technical analysis. It is calculated as the RMA of the true range. This version adds a "twist": it uses Perry Kaufman's Efficiency Ratio to calculate adaptive true range.
Mean Absolute Deviation
The mean absolute deviation (MAD) is a measure of variability that indicates the average distance between observations and their mean. MAD uses the original units of the data, which simplifies interpretation. Larger values signify that the data points spread out further from the average. Conversely, lower values correspond to data points bunching closer to it. The mean absolute deviation is also known as the mean deviation and average absolute deviation.
This definition of the mean absolute deviation sounds similar to the standard deviation (SD). While both measure variability, they have different calculations. In recent years, some proponents of MAD have suggested that it replace the SD as the primary measure because it is a simpler concept that better fits real life.
Static Percent
Static Percent allows the user to insert their own constant percent that will then be used to create take profits and stoploss
█ Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System
Core components of an NNFX algorithmic trading strategy
The NNFX algorithm is built on the principles of trend, momentum, and volatility. There are six core components in the NNFX trading algorithm:
1. Volatility - price volatility; e.g., Average True Range, True Range Double, Close-to-Close, etc.
2. Baseline - a moving average to identify price trend
3. Confirmation 1 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
4. Confirmation 2 - a technical indicator used to identify trends
5. Continuation - a technical indicator used to identify trends
6. Volatility/Volume - a technical indicator used to identify volatility/volume breakouts/breakdown
7. Exit - a technical indicator used to determine when a trend is exhausted
What is Volatility in the NNFX trading system?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, ATR (Average True Range) is typically used to measure the volatility of an asset. It is used as a part of the system to help determine the appropriate stop loss and take profit levels for a trade. ATR is calculated by taking the average of the true range values over a specified period.
True range is calculated as the maximum of the following values:
-Current high minus the current low
-Absolute value of the current high minus the previous close
-Absolute value of the current low minus the previous close
ATR is a dynamic indicator that changes with changes in volatility. As volatility increases, the value of ATR increases, and as volatility decreases, the value of ATR decreases. By using ATR in NNFX system, traders can adjust their stop loss and take profit levels according to the volatility of the asset being traded. This helps to ensure that the trade is given enough room to move, while also minimizing potential losses.
Other types of volatility include True Range Double (TRD), Close-to-Close, and Garman-Klass
What is a Baseline indicator?
The baseline is essentially a moving average, and is used to determine the overall direction of the market.
The baseline in the NNFX system is used to filter out trades that are not in line with the long-term trend of the market. The baseline is plotted on the chart along with other indicators, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR).
Trades are only taken when the price is in the same direction as the baseline. For example, if the baseline is sloping upwards, only long trades are taken, and if the baseline is sloping downwards, only short trades are taken. This approach helps to ensure that trades are in line with the overall trend of the market, and reduces the risk of entering trades that are likely to fail.
By using a baseline in the NNFX system, traders can have a clear reference point for determining the overall trend of the market, and can make more informed trading decisions. The baseline helps to filter out noise and false signals, and ensures that trades are taken in the direction of the long-term trend.
What is a Confirmation indicator?
Confirmation indicators are technical indicators that are used to confirm the signals generated by primary indicators. Primary indicators are the core indicators used in the NNFX system, such as the Average True Range (ATR), the Moving Average (MA), and the Relative Strength Index (RSI).
The purpose of the confirmation indicators is to reduce false signals and improve the accuracy of the trading system. They are designed to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators by providing additional information about the strength and direction of the trend.
Some examples of confirmation indicators that may be used in the NNFX system include the Bollinger Bands, the MACD (Moving Average Convergence Divergence), and the MACD Oscillator. These indicators can provide information about the volatility, momentum, and trend strength of the market, and can be used to confirm the signals generated by the primary indicators.
In the NNFX system, confirmation indicators are used in combination with primary indicators and other filters to create a trading system that is robust and reliable. By using multiple indicators to confirm trading signals, the system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of the trades.
What is a Continuation indicator?
In the NNFX (No Nonsense Forex) trading system, a continuation indicator is a technical indicator that is used to confirm a current trend and predict that the trend is likely to continue in the same direction. A continuation indicator is typically used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as a baseline indicator, to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
What is a Volatility/Volume indicator?
Volume indicators, such as the On Balance Volume (OBV), the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF), or the Volume Price Trend (VPT), are used to measure the amount of buying and selling activity in a market. They are based on the trading volume of the market, and can provide information about the strength of the trend. In the NNFX system, volume indicators are used to confirm trading signals generated by the Moving Average and the Relative Strength Index. Volatility indicators include Average Direction Index, Waddah Attar, and Volatility Ratio. In the NNFX trading system, volatility is a proxy for volume and vice versa.
By using volume indicators as confirmation tools, the NNFX trading system aims to reduce the risk of false signals and improve the overall profitability of trades. These indicators can provide additional information about the market that is not captured by the primary indicators, and can help traders to make more informed trading decisions. In addition, volume indicators can be used to identify potential changes in market trends and to confirm the strength of price movements.
What is an Exit indicator?
The exit indicator is used in conjunction with other indicators in the system, such as the Moving Average (MA), the Relative Strength Index (RSI), and the Average True Range (ATR), to provide a comprehensive trading strategy.
The exit indicator in the NNFX system can be any technical indicator that is deemed effective at identifying optimal exit points. Examples of exit indicators that are commonly used include the Parabolic SAR, the Average Directional Index (ADX), and the Chandelier Exit.
The purpose of the exit indicator is to identify when a trend is likely to reverse or when the market conditions have changed, signaling the need to exit a trade. By using an exit indicator, traders can manage their risk and prevent significant losses.
In the NNFX system, the exit indicator is used in conjunction with a stop loss and a take profit order to maximize profits and minimize losses. The stop loss order is used to limit the amount of loss that can be incurred if the trade goes against the trader, while the take profit order is used to lock in profits when the trade is moving in the trader's favor.
Overall, the use of an exit indicator in the NNFX trading system is an important component of a comprehensive trading strategy. It allows traders to manage their risk effectively and improve the profitability of their trades by exiting at the right time.
How does Loxx's GKD (Giga Kaleidoscope Modularized Trading System) implement the NNFX algorithm outlined above?
Loxx's GKD v2.0 system has five types of modules (indicators/strategies). These modules are:
1. GKD-BT - Backtesting module (Volatility, Number 1 in the NNFX algorithm)
2. GKD-B - Baseline module (Baseline and Volatility/Volume, Numbers 1 and 2 in the NNFX algorithm)
3. GKD-C - Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation module (Confirmation 1/2 and Continuation, Numbers 3, 4, and 5 in the NNFX algorithm)
4. GKD-V - Volatility/Volume module (Confirmation 1/2, Number 6 in the NNFX algorithm)
5. GKD-E - Exit module (Exit, Number 7 in the NNFX algorithm)
(additional module types will added in future releases)
Each module interacts with every module by passing data to A backtest module wherein the various components of the GKD system are combined to create a trading signal.
That is, the Baseline indicator passes its data to Volatility/Volume. The Volatility/Volume indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 1 indicator. The Confirmation 1 indicator passes its values to the Confirmation 2 indicator. The Confirmation 2 indicator passes its values to the Continuation indicator. The Continuation indicator passes its values to the Exit indicator, and finally, the Exit indicator passes its values to the Backtest strategy.
This chaining of indicators requires that each module conform to Loxx's GKD protocol, therefore allowing for the testing of every possible combination of technical indicators that make up the six components of the NNFX algorithm.
What does the application of the GKD trading system look like?
Example trading system:
Backtest: Stacks Backtest
Baseline: Hull Moving Average
Volatility/Volume: Hurst Exponent
Confirmation 1: Vorext
Confirmation 2: Coppock Curve
Continuation: Fisher Transform
Exit: Rex Oscillator
Each GKD indicator is denoted with a module identifier of either: GKD-BT, GKD-B, GKD-C, GKD-V, or GKD-E. This allows traders to understand to which module each indicator belongs and where each indicator fits into the GKD system.
